Contents

Subaru Forester 2.0XT Premium 2017 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 626
1 of 626

Summary of Content for Subaru Forester 2.0XT Premium 2017 Owner's Manual PDF

Black plate (1,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 27

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owners Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owners Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This Owners Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

*C Copyright 2016 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

Black plate (2,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 27

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

Black plate (3,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Black plate (3,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Warranties

& Warranties for U.S.A. All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties: . SUBARU Limited Warranty . Emission Control Systems Warranty . Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the following warranties: . SUBARU Limited Warranty . Anti-Corrosion Warranty . Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Service Booklet. Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada

All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owners Manual

& Using your Owners Manual Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious injury and damage to your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains precau- tions for the SRS airbags. Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows. Chapter 3: Instruments and controls This chapter informs you about the opera- tion of instrument panel indicators and how to use the instruments and other switches.

CONTINUED

1

0

Black plate (4,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Chapter 4: Climate control This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control. Chapter 5: Audio This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system. Chapter 6: Interior equipment This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment. Chapter 7: Starting and operating This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU. Chapter 8: Driving tips This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various conditions and ex- plains some safety tips on driving. Chapter 9: In case of emergency This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine overheating. Chapter 10: Appearance care This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good. Chapter 11: Maintenance and service This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications This chapter informs you about dimen- sions and capacities of your SUBARU. Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting safety defects This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards and Report- ing safety defects. Chapter 14: Index This is an alphabetical listing of all thats in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

& Safety warnings You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to poten- tial hazards that could result in injury to you or others. Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual care- fully in order to gain a better understand- ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.

NOTE A NOTE gives information or sugges- tions how to make better use of your vehicle.

& Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual. This symbol means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen, depending upon the context.

2

Black plate (5,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Abbreviation list You may find several abbreviations in this manual. The meanings of the abbrevia- tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

A/C Air conditioner

ALR/ELR Automatic locking retractor/ Emergency locking retractor

ABS Anti-lock brake system

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD/RCTA Blind Spot Detection/Rear Cross Traffic Alert

CVT Continuously variable trans- mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD Electronic brake force distri- bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

INT Intermittent

Abbreviation Meaning

LATCH Lower anchors and tethers for children

LED Light emitting diode

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man- ganese tricarbonyl

MT Manual transmission

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB Reverse Automatic Braking

RON Research octane number

SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive

SRF Steering responsive fog lights system

SRH Steering Responsive Head- light

SRS Supplemental restraint sys- tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. For warning and indicator lights, refer to Warning and indicator lights F23.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

3

0

Black plate (6,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Safety precautions when driving

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Other- wise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or acci- dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS (Supple- mental Restraint System) airbag does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combina- tion with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections. . For the seatbelt system, refer to Seat- belts F1-16. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) F1-42.

& Child safety

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passen- ger and objects inside the vehi- cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, in- fants and small children should always be placed in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat- ing positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Place children in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

4

Black plate (7,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly re- strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR- BAG.

. Always turn the child safety locks to the LOCK position when children sit in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out. Refer to Child safety locks F2-32.

. Always lock the passengers win- dows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. Re- fer to Windows F2-32.

. Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the ve- hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high en- ough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.

. When leaving the vehicle, close all windows and lock all doors.

. In models with power rear gate, when it operates, the rear gate moves with remarkable force. It is possible to be injured if any- one is caught in or hit by the rear gate so be sure to obey the following cautions.

Check that there are no chil- dren around the rear gate before operating the power rear gate.

Do not allow children to oper- ate the power rear gate.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections. . For the seatbelt system, refer to Seat- belts F1-16.

. For the child restraint system, refer to Child restraint systems F1-29. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) F1-42.

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dan- gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en- gine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from enter- ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the venti- lation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

CONTINUED

5

0

Black plate (8,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system al- ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- stream delays your reaction time and impairs your perception, judg- ment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking even if you drink just a little it will increase the risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself, your passengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please dont drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- hol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- tely before getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers and other persons risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction time will be delayed and your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers and other per- sons chances of being involved in a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh yourself before continuing on your journey.

6

Black plate (9,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

When possible, you should share the driving with others.

& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified other than with genuine SUBARU parts and accessories. Other types of modifications could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be cov- ered under warranties.

& Car phone/cell phone and driving

CAUTION

Do not use a car phone/cell phone while driving; it may distract your attention from driving and can lead to an accident. If you use a car phone/cell phone, pull off the road and park in a safe place before using your phone. In some States/ Provinces, only hands-free phones

may legally be used while driving.

& Driving vehicles equipped with navigation system

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract your attention from driving. Also, do not operate the controls of the navigation system while driving. The loss of attention to driving could lead to an accident. If you wish to operate the controls of the navigation system, first take the vehicle off the road and stop it in a safe location.

& Driving with pets Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- strain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be secured to the rear

seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carriers handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passengers seat. For further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection society or pet shop.

& Tire pressures Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. For detailed information, refer to Tires and wheels F11-23.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces- sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp in- crease in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

CONTINUED

7

0

Black plate (10,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& On-road and off-road driving This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance and higher center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over than ordinary passenger cars. It also handles and maneuvers differently from other passenger cars. For this reason, please read carefully the following section and follow the instructions and precautions in order to prevent serious injury or death due to loss of control, rollover and other accidents. Refer to On-road and off-road driving F8-6.

& Attaching accessories

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories, labels or stickers (other than properly placed inspection stick- ers) to the windshield. Such items may obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach an accessory (such as an electronic toll collection (ETC) device or security pass) to the windshield, consult your SUBARU dealer for details on the proper location.

General information

& California proposition 65 warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti- tuents, and certain vehicle compo- nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addi- tion, certain fluids in vehicles and certain components of product wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

& California Perchlorate Advi- sory

Certain vehicle components such as air- bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless entry transmitter batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

8

Black plate (11,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Noise from under the vehicle NOTE You may hear a noise from under the vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours after the engine is turned off. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. This noise is caused by the operation of the fuel evaporation leakage check- ing system and the operation is normal. The noise will stop after approximately 15 minutes.

& Event data recorder This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: . How various systems in your vehicle were operating; . Whether or not the driver and passen- ger safety belts were buckled/fastened; . How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and, . How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac- quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the informa- tion if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

9

0

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22 Left Page

Black plate (1,1)

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2

Instruments and controls

Climate control 4

Audio 5

Interior equipment 6

Starting and operating 7

Driving tips 8

In case of emergency 9

Appearance care 10

Maintenance and service 11

Specifications 12

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13

Index 14

3

Model "A8220BE-B" Edited: 2016/ 7/ 27

Black plate (14,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Illustrated index

& Exterior

1) Engine hood (page 11-7) 2) Headlight (page 3-93) 3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-39) 4) Front wiper (page 3-105) 5) Moonroof (page 2-45) 6) Roof rails (page 8-14) 7) Door locks (page 2-5) 8) Outside mirrors (page 3-115) 9) Tire pressure (page 11-25) 10) Flat tires (page 9-5) 11) Snow tires (page 8-11) 12) Fog light (page 3-102) 13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13) 14) Towing hook (page 9-13)

12

Black plate (15,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

1) Rear window defogger (page 3-116) 2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-5) 3) Child safety locks (page 2-32) 4) Tie-down hole (page 9-13) 5) Rear gate (page 2-38) 6) Towing hook (page 9-13)

CONTINUED

13

0

Black plate (16,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Interior

! Passenger compartment area

1) Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 1-37)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-16) 3) Front seat (page 1-2) 4) Rear seat heater switch (page 1-10) 5) Rear seat (page 1-11) 6) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK

NOTE For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU STARLINK: Refer to the Owners Man- u a l supp l emen t f o r SUBARU STARLINK.

14

Black plate (17,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

1) Power windows (page 2-32) 2) Door locks (page 2-5) 3) Glove box (page 6-6) 4) Front power supply socket (page 6-9) 5) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-22)/Select lever

(CVT) (page 7-24) 6) Parking brake lever (page 7-47) 7) Cup holder (page 6-7) 8) Center console (page 6-6)

CONTINUED

15

0

Black plate (18,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Instrument panel 1) Outside mirror switch (page 3-115) 2) Seat position memory switch (page 1-5) 3) Steering Responsive Headlight OFF

switch (models with Steering Respon- sive Headlight) (page 3-99)/Steering re- sponsive fog light off switch (if equipped) (page 3-103)

4) Illumination brightness control (page 3-101)

5) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-58) 6) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(models without power rear gate) (page 7-41)/Memory switch (models with power rear gate) (page 2-42)

7) Combination meter (page 3-9) 8) Information display (page 3-34)/Multi

function display (page 3-44) 9) Hazard warning flasher switch (models

with multi function display) (page 3-8) 10) Hazard warning flasher switch (models

without multi function display) (page 3-8) 11) Multi function display control switch

(page 3-44) 12) Audio (page 5-1) 13) Climate control (page 4-1) 14) Power rear gate switch (page 2-39) 15) Fuse box (page 11-37) 16) Hood lock release (page 11-7) 17) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(models with power rear gate) (page 7-41)

16

Black plate (19,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Steering wheel 1) Audio control switches (page 5-63) 2) Talk switch for voice command system

(page 5-81) 3) Cruise control (page 7-53) 4) Shift paddle (page 7-27) 5) Tilt/telescopic lock lever (page 3-118) 6) Hands-free phone switches (page 5-73) 7) Multi information display control switches

(page 3-39) 8) SRS airbag (page 1-42) 9) Horn (page 3-118) 10) Heated steering wheel switch

(page 3-119) 11) SI-DRIVE switches (page 7-34)

CONTINUED

17

0

Black plate (20,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-104) 2) Mist (page 3-105) 3) Windshield washer (page 3-106) 4) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-106) 5) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 3-105) 6) Wiper control lever (page 3-105) 7) Light control switch (page 3-93) 8) Fog light switch (page 3-102) 9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-93) 10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-95) 11) Turn signal lever (page 3-100)

18

Black plate (21,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Combination meter

! U.S.-spec. models (type A)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-11) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31) 3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10) 4) Speedometer (page 3-10) 5) Information display selection knob

(page 3-34) 6) Fuel gauge (page 3-12) 7) X-mode (if equipped) (page 7-42)/SI-

DRIVE (if equipped) (page 7-32) 8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10)

CONTINUED

19

0

Black plate (22,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! U.S.-spec. models (type B)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-11) 2) Multi information display (page 3-39) 3) Fuel gauge (page 3-12) 4) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31) 5) Speedometer (page 3-10) 6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10) 7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)

20

Black plate (23,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Canada-spec. and Mexico-spec. models (type A)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-11) 2) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10) 3) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31) 4) Speedometer (page 3-10) 5) Information display selection knob

(page 3-34) 6) ECO gauge (Mexico-spec. models)

(page 3-12) 7) Fuel gauge (page 3-12) 8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10)

CONTINUED

21

0

Black plate (24,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Canada-spec. and Mexico-spec. models (type B)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-11) 2) Multi information display (page 3-39) 3) Fuel gauge (page 3-12) 4) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31) 5) Speedometer (page 3-10) 6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10) 7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)

22

Black plate (25,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-14

Front passengers seatbelt warning light 3-14

SRS airbag system warning light 3-15

/ Front passengers frontal airbag ON indi- cator

3-16

/ Front passengers frontal airbag OFF in- dicator

3-16

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunc- tion indicator light

3-16

Coolant temperature low indicator light/ Coolant temperature high warning light

3-17

Charge warning light 3-18

Oil pressure warning light 3-18

Engine low oil level warning light

3-18

Mark Name Page

AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) 3-19

ABS warning light 3-21

Brake system warning light 3-21

Door open warning light 3-23

AWD warning light (CVT models) 3-23

Power steering warn- ing light 3-23

Hill start assist warn- ing light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light

3-23

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi- cator light

3-24

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

3-25

Turn signal indicator lights 3-32

Mark Name Page

High beam indicator light 3-32

High beam assist indi- cator light (if equipped) 3-32

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (if equipped)

3-32

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/Steering Respon- sive Headlight OFF indicator light (if equipped)

3-99

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) 3-33

Access key warning light (if equipped) 3-25

Security indicator light 3-30

Headlight indicator light (if equipped) 3-33

Cruise control indica- tor light 3-32

Cruise control set in- dicator light 3-32

CONTINUED

23

0

Black plate (26,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Mark Name Page

X-mode indicator light (if equipped) 3-33

Hill descent control in- dicator light (if equipped)

3-33

Low fuel warning light 3-22

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)

3-19

Windshield washer fluid warning light 3-19

Sport (S) mode indi- cator light (if equipped) 3-31

Intelligent (I) mode in- dicator light (if equipped)

3-31

Sport Sharp (S#) mode indicator light (if equipped)

3-31

Steering responsive fog lights warning in- dicator/Steering re- sponsive fog lights OFF indicator (if equipped)

3-33

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) 3-33

Mark Name Page

BSD/RCTA OFF indi- cator (if equipped) 3-34

RAB warning light (if equipped) 3-34

RAB OFF indicator (if equipped) 3-34

24

Black plate (27,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a multi function display, the settings for some of these functions can be changed using the display. For details, refer to Multi function display F3-44.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation

Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors) 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Impact sensor operation (only models with shock sensors (dealer option))

Operation/Non-operation Non-operation

Passive arming (models without keyless access with push-button start system)

Operation/Non-operation Non-operation

Dome light and map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF

Keyless access (if equipped) Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Door unlock selection function (drivers door unlock) Drivers door only/All doors Drivers door only

Door unlock selection function (rear gate unlock) Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only

Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Defogger and deicer system for models with the automatic climate control system

Rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and windshield wiper deicer

Operation for 15 minutes/ Continuous operation

Operation for 15 minutes

CONTINUED

25

0

Black plate (28,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Dome light Operation of dome light/map light/cargo area light OFF delay timer

OFF/10 seconds/20 sec- onds/30 seconds

30 seconds

Map light

Cargo area light

Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto on/off headlights (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/off headlights Low/Mid/High/Max Mid

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper operation Operation/Non-operation Non-operation*1

One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane changer Operation/Non-operation Operation

High beam assist function (if equipped) High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Welcome lighting function (if equipped) Welcome lighting function (when approaching) OFF/30 seconds/60 sec- onds/90 seconds

30 seconds

Welcome lighting function (when exiting) OFF/30 seconds/60 sec- onds/90 seconds

30 seconds

*1: Except for U.S. model, the default setting will be Operation.

26

Black plate (1,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Front seats........................................................... 1-2 Manual seat ........................................................ 1-4 Power seat (drivers seat if equipped) .............. 1-5 Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8

Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-9 Front seat heater (if equipped)............................. 1-9 Rear seat heater (if equipped)............................. 1-10

Rear seats........................................................... 1-11 Armrest (if equipped).......................................... 1-11 Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-12 Folding down the rear seatback.......................... 1-13 Reclining the seatback (if equipped) ................... 1-15

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-16 Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-16 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-17 Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) ......................................... 1-17

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-18 Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-18 Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-24

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-25 Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ............. 1-25

Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt pretensioners .................................................. 1-26

System monitors ............................................... 1-28 System servicing ............................................... 1-28 Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-29

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-29 Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-30 Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-32 Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt ........................................................... 1-32

Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-36 Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-37

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-40 *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)................................................ 1-42 General precautions regarding SRS airbag system ............................................................ 1-42

Components...................................................... 1-49 SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-51 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-61 SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-69 SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-71 Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-72

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1

Black plate (32,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

Front seats

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv- ing to avoid loss of vehicle con- trol and personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear seat passengers and cargo are clear of the adjusting mechan- ism.

. After adjusting the seat, push it slightly to make sure it is se- curely locked. If the seat is not securely locked, it may move or the seatbelt may not operate properly.

. Do not put objects under the front seats. They may interfere with front seat locking and cause an accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright posi- tion while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with consider- able speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or impro- perly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that rea- son, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly re- strained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt,

1-2

Black plate (33,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

whichever is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. Se- cure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precau- tions concerning child restraint sys- tems, refer to Child restraint sys- tems F1-29.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid- ing under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seatback and seat cushion. Doing so may lead to defective operation of the following systems and could result in serious injury.

. Occupant detection system

. SRS side airbag

. Seat heater (if equipped)

. Power seat (if equipped)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

CONTINUED

1-3

1

Black plate (34,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

& Manual seat

! Forward and backward adjustment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then release the lever and try to move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked into place.

! Reclining the seatback

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place. The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force when the lever is pulled. While operating the lever to return the seatback, hold the seatback lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.

! Seat height adjustment (drivers seat)

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat is lowered.

2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by moving the seat adjustment lever up and down.

1-4

Black plate (35,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Power seat (drivers seat if equipped)

1) Seat position forward/backward con- trol switch To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat cushion angle or seat height.

2) Seat cushion angle control switch To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the control switch.

3) Seat height control switch To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.

4) Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.

5) Lumbar support control switch To increase lower back support, push the front side of the switch. To decrease lower back support, push the rear side of the switch.

! Memory function (drivers seat if equipped)

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv- ing to avoid loss of vehicle con- trol and personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make sure that cargo or the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechan- ism.

. Never retrieve the seat position while driving to avoid loss of

vehicle control and personal in- jury.

. Perform the seat position retrie- val before driving. Be sure to confirm that the select lever is in the P position, and the parking brake is applied, when adjusting the seat position. Do not drive until the retrieval of the seat position is complete.

. When retrieving a registered seat position, make sure the hands, feet and possessions of rear seat passengers are clear of the seat adjusting mechanism.

. When any unusual conditions or malfunctions occur during the retrieval of the seat position, stop the retrieval of the seat position by performing any of the follow- ing procedures.

Operate any of the power seat switches

Press the SET button

Press button 1 or 2

Some of your desired seat positions can be registered. Register the seat position with button 1 or 2 or each of the access keys and retrieve the seat position.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

CONTINUED

1-5

1

Black plate (36,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

The following seat positions can be registered. . Forward/backward position of the seat . Angle of seatback . Angle of seat cushion . Height of seat

! Registration of seat position with button 1 or 2

1. Adjust the seat position under the following conditions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The select lever is in the P posi- tion.

2. While pressing the SET button, press and hold the desired button 1 or 2.

A chirp sounds once, and the seat position

is registered.

! Registration of seat position with each access key

1. Adjust the seat position under the following conditions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The ignition switch is in the LOCK/ OFF position. . The select lever is in the P posi- tion.

2. While holding the access key and pressing the SET button, press the button of the access key.

A chirp sounds once, and the seat position is registered.

! Retrieval of seat position regis- tered with button 1 or 2

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct button to retrieve your registered seat position. If the seat position is not optimum for you, it may adversely affect your driving and may reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt. That could result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. While the select lever is in the P position and the parking brake is applied, press button 1 or 2.

1-6

Black plate (37,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the registered position. When the seat moves to the registered position, a chirp will sound.

NOTE . If a new position is registered for the same button, the previously registered seat position is deleted. . If the vehicle battery is removed, the registered seat position is not deleted. . When the button 1 or 2 is pressed within 45 seconds after the drivers door is opened, the registered seat position can be retrieved even if the ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position.

! Retrieval of the seat position registered with access key

1. Hold the registered access key.

2. Unlock the drivers door by pressing the button or gripping the door handle. 3. Open the drivers door.

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the registered position. When the seat moves to the registered position, a chirp will sound.

NOTE . If the registered seat position cannot be retrieved after performing the pre- vious procedures, try the following procedures.

(1) Press the SET button on the drivers door.

(2) Press the button on the access key or touch the door lock sensor to lock the doors. (3) Perform the prior procedures again.

. If the keyless access function is disabled, the seat position cannot be retrieved by gripping the drivers door handle. However, the seat position can still be retrieved by pressing the button on the access key. For informa- tion about how to enable/disable the keyless access function, refer to Dis- abling keyless access function F2-17. . If a new position is registered for the same access key, the previously regis- tered seat position is deleted.

! Clearing the registered seat position with access key

1. Close the drivers door. 2. While holding the access key and pressing the SET button, press the button on the access key.

A chirp will sound, and the registered seat position will be cleared.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

CONTINUED

1-7

1

Black plate (38,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. Also, never install the head restraints the opposite way round. Doing so will prevent the head restraints from func- tioning as intended. Therefore, when you remove the head re- straints, you must reinstall all head restraints correctly to pro- tect vehicle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri- ver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to mini- mize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

Both the drivers seat and front passen- gers seat are equipped with head re- straints. Both head restraints are adjusta- ble in the following ways.

! Head restraint height adjustment

1) Head restraint 2) Release button

To raise: Pull the head restraint up. To lower: Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback. To remove: While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint. To install: Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

Each head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupants ears.

NOTE When the head restraint cannot be pulled out or installed due to insuffi- cient clearance between the head re- straint and the roof, tilt the seat and then perform the installation and re- moval tasks.

1-8

Black plate (39,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Head restraint angle adjustment

The angle of the head restraint can be adjusted in several steps. While maintain- ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the head restraint to a position where the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

To tilt: Tilt the head restraint by hand to the preferred position. A click will be audible when the head restraint is locked. To return: Tilt the head restraint once as far forward as it can go. The head restraint will automatically return to the fully upright position. Then, adjust the head restraint again to the preferred angle.

Seat heater (if equipped)

CAUTION

. People with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the seat heater for a long period of time. When using the heater, always be sure to warn the persons con- cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.

. When the seat is warmed enough or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the seat heater.

NOTE Use of the seat heater for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

& Front seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater operates when the igni- tion switch is either in the ACC or ON position.

Front seat heater switch 1) HIGH Rapid heating 2) LOW Normal heating 3) Off A) Left-hand side B) Right-hand side

To turn on the seat heater, push the LOW

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater

CONTINUED

1-9

1

Black plate (40,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater

or HIGH position on the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. Selecting the HIGH position will cause the seat to heat up quicker.

To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the opposite side of the current position.

The indicator located on the switch illumi- nates when the seat heater is in operation.

& Rear seat heater (if equipped) The seat heater operates when the igni- tion switch is in the ON position.

Rear seat heater switch 1) HIGH mode indicator 2) LOW mode indicator A) Left-hand side B) Right-hand side

Press the rear seat heater switch to turn on the rear seat heater. Then select the HIGH or LOW mode, as desired, depending on the temperature. Each time you press the switch, the mode will change as follows.

When LOW mode is selected, the LOW

mode indicator on the rear seat heater switch illuminates. When HIGH mode is selected, both the LOW and HIGH mode indicators illuminate. When the OFF mode is selected, all the indicators turn off.

Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat to heat up quicker.

NOTE Only the front seat heater switches retain the previous switch position even if the engine has restarted. The rear seat switch will reset.

1-10

Black plate (41,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Rear seats

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

& Armrest (if equipped)

To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge of the armrest.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury, passengers must never be allowed to sit on the center armrest.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

CONTINUED

1-11

1

Black plate (42,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

& Head restraint adjustment Both the rear window side seats and the rear center seat are equipped with head restraints.

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. Therefore, when you have removed the head re- straints, you must reinstall all head restraints to protect vehicle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri- ver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to mini- mize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

! Rear windows side seating position

1) Head restraint 2) Release button

To remove: While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint. To install: Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

After installing the head restraint, make sure it is securely locked.

! Rear center seating position

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended posi- tion.

1) When not used (retracted position) 2) When used (extended position)

1-12

Black plate (43,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

1) Head restraint 2) Release button

To raise: Pull the head restraint up. To lower: Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback. To remove: While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint. To install: Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

When the rear-center seating position is occupied, raise the head restraint to the extended position. When the rear center seating position is not occupied, lower the head restraint to improve rearward visibi- lity.

& Folding down the rear seat- back

WARNING

. When you fold down the seat- back, check that there are no passengers or objects on the rear seat. Not doing so creates a risk of injury or property da- mage if the seatback suddenly folds down.

. Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.

. Secure all objects and especially long items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop, a sudden steering maneu- ver or a rapid acceleration.

. When you return the seatback to its original position, shake the

seatback slightly to confirm that it is securely fixed in place. If the seatback is not securely fixed in place, the seatback may sud- denly fold down in the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area, which could cause serious injury or death.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

CONTINUED

1-13

1

Black plate (44,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

1) Securing hook

WARNING

When the seatback is returned to its original position, observe the follow-

ing precautions. Failure to do so may lead to serious injury or an accident because the operation effi- ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.

. Be careful to prevent the seatbelt from running off the belt guide.

. The seatbelt should not be caught in the seatback and it should be fully visible.

. The seatbelt should not pass behind the securing hook for the seatback.

CAUTION

. Do not hang luggage etc. on the securing hook. The possibility exists that the seatback may not be able to be fixed firmly in place. This could lead to unexpected accidents.

. While driving, if something hits the release latch, it is possible that the seatback will fold down. Be careful that no luggage etc. hits the latch.

1. Lower the head restraint of the rear center seating position.

Release knob

Release latch on both sides of the cargo area (if equipped)

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock release knob or release latch (if equipped) and then fold the seatback down.

1-14

Black plate (45,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

To return the seatback to its original position, raise the seatback until it locks into place and make sure that it is securely locked referring to the following descrip- tion.

Lock release knob 1) Unlocked 2) Locked A) Unlocking marker in red

When the seatback is locked, the lock release knob is automatically pulled into the seatback and the unlocking marker, which is red colored and attached to the bottom of the lock release knob, will no longer be visible.

WARNING

After returning the seatback to its original position, confirm that the unlocking marker of the lock release knob is no longer visible. Failure to do so could lead to serious injury or death in the event of an accident. When you return the seatback to its original position, shake the seat- back slightly to confirm that it is securely fixed in place.

& Reclining the seatback (if equipped)

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid- ing under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, observe the following precautions:

. Keep the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion.

. Do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback.

Otherwise, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious inter- nal injury or death.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with a cargo area cover, observe the fol- lowing precautions.

. Be careful not to pinch your hand between the head restraint and the cargo area cover when you recline the rear seat.

. Move the front cover of the cargo area cover backward so that the cover is not damaged by the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

CONTINUED

1-15

1

Black plate (46,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

reclined seatback. Refer to Car- go area cover F6-14.

Pull the strap and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then release the strap and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place.

Seatbelts

& Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Other- wise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or acci- dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never use a single belt for two or more persons even children. Other- wise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attach- ing hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident. The entire as- sembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

. Place children in the rear seat

properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill chil- dren, especially if they are not restrained or improperly re- strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child re- straint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re- straint devices (including for- ward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR- BAG.

1-16

Black plate (47,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat- ing positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, refer to Child restraint systems F1-29.

! Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your vehicle. Refer to Child restraint systems F1-29.

! Children

If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the childs waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the childs arm or behind the childs back.

! Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ELR)

The drivers seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

& Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ALR/ELR)

Each passengers seatbelt has an Auto- matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emer- gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/ ELR has an additional locking mode Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode intended to secure a child restraint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seatbelt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re- moved, make sure that the seatbelt retracts fully and the retractor returned to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode. For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

CONTINUED

1-17

1

Black plate (48,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

the ELR mode, refer to Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt F1-32.

& Seatbelt warning light and chime

Refer to Seatbelt warning light and chime F3-14.

& Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a colli- sion, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright posi- tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weath- er; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.

! Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position according to the following procedure. Drivers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control. Front passengers seat: Adjust the seat- back to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible. 2. Sit well back in the seat. 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

1-18

Black plate (49,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver/front passenger. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.

To raise: Slide the anchor up. To lower: Pull the release knob and slide the anchor down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

CONTINUED

1-19

1

Black plate (50,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

1. Push the button on the buckle. 2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt)

1. Sit well back in the seat. 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

1-20

Black plate (51,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Unfastening the seatbelt

1. Push the button on the buckle. 2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear center seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate 2) Connector (tongue) 3) Connector (buckle) 4) Center seatbelt buckle

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web- bing twisted can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, espe- cially when inserting the connec- tors tongue plate into the mating buckle (on right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

CONTINUED

1-21

1

Black plate (52,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

WARNING

. Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the connec- tors tongue plate not fastened to the connectors buckle on the right-hand side), it cannot prop- erly restrain the wearer in posi- tion in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.

. The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the ex- tended position. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

. Before fastening the seatbelt, confirm that the seatbelt is rou- ted through the belt guide. A seatbelt not routed through the belt guide can cause neck inju- ries during sudden braking or in a collision since it may slip up on your neck.

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the ceiling above the cargo area.

1. Retrieve the connector (tongue) plate from the slot in the recess by pulling the connector (tongue) plate, then pull out the seatbelt slowly.

2. Pass the seatbelt through the belt guide.

3. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the connector (tongue) attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a click is heard.

. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

1-22

Black plate (53,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure that the mark on the connector (tongue) and the mark on the buckle face outwards.

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate into the center seatbelt buckle marked

CENTER on the left-hand side until it clicks.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 7. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

1. Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.

NOTE When the seatback is folded down for greater cargo area, it is necessary to disconnect the connector.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

CONTINUED

1-23

1

Black plate (54,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard pointed object into the slot in the con- nector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in. The connector (tongue) plate will then disconnect from the buckle.

3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess and then insert the connector (tongue) plate into the slot.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly. Otherwise, the metal tongue plates may hit against the trim, resulting in damaged trim.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are neatly stored. A hanging tongue plate can swing and hit against the trim during driving, causing damage to the trim.

& Seatbelt maintenance To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Replace the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica- tions or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating prop- erly.

1-24

Black plate (55,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The drivers and front passengers seat- belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident involving moderate to severe frontal and side collisions and rollover accidents.

& Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner

NOTE This section is applicable to the dri- vers side seatbelt.

The pretensioner sensor also serves as follows. . SRS frontal airbag sensor

. Side impact sensor

. Front door impact sensor

. Rollover sensor

If the sensor detects a certain predeter- mined amount of force during frontal or side collisions or rollover accidents, the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the driver.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

NOTE . Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- signed to activate in minor impacts or in rear impacts. . In cases of rollover accidents, as the curtain airbags deploy, the drivers side seatbelt pretensioner and front passen- gers side shoulder belt pretensioner

are activated simultaneously. . In cases of frontal collisions, the following components will operate si- multaneously.

Seatbelt pretensioner for driver Seatbelt pretensioner for front passenger SRS frontal airbag for driver SRS frontal airbag for front pas- senger* SRS side airbags (both sides) (if an offset frontal collision occurs) SRS curtain airbags (both sides) (if an offset frontal collision occurs) *: This does not operate if the occupant detection system deactivates airbag op- eration. For details, refer to Front passengers SRS frontal airbag F1-51.

. In cases of side collisions, the following components will operate si- multaneously.

SRS curtain airbag (impacted side) SRS side airbag (impacted side) (when both the satellite safing sen- sor and any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors sense an impact force) Seatbelt pretensioner for driver (when both the satellite safing sen- sor and the drivers side front door

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners

CONTINUED

1-25

1

Black plate (56,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners

impact sensor sense an impact force) However, when a center pillar im- pact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the seatbelt preten- sioner does not activate. Seatbelt pretensioner for front passenger (shoulder belt preten- sioner only) (when both the satellite safing sensor and the front passen- gers side front door impact sensor sense an impact force) However, when a center pillar im- pact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the seatbelt preten- sioner does not activate.

. Pretensioners are designed to func- tion on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, both the drivers and front passengers seatbelt retractor assemblies should be replaced only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- belt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts. . If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the

pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . If the front seatbelt retractor assem- bly or surrounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the buyer to the contents of this section.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an upright position with their seat- belts properly fastened. Refer to Seatbelts F1-16.

. Do not modify, remove or strike the front seatbelt retractor as- semblies or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt preten- sioners or could make the sys- tem inoperative, possibly result- ing in serious injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-ser- viceable parts. For required ser- vicing of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt preten- sioners, consult your SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding front seatbelt retractor assemblies or scrap- ping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult your SUBARU dealer.

& Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt pretensioners

NOTE This section is applicable to the front passengers side seatbelt.

1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder belt pretensioner)

2) Lap belt pretensioner

On the front passenger s side, the shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen-

1-26

Black plate (57,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is located at the base of the center pillar. Like the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of frontal or side collision force or a rollover accident is detected. As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat occu- pant more effectively.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re- mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

NOTE . Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- signed to activate in minor impacts or in rear impacts. . In cases of rollover accidents, the lap belt pretensioner does not activate; however, as the curtain airbags deploy, the drivers side seatbelt pretensioner and front passengers side shoulder belt pretensioner are activated simulta-

neously. . In cases of frontal collisions, the following components will operate si- multaneously.

Seatbelt pretensioner for driver Seatbelt pretensioners for front passenger SRS frontal airbag for driver SRS frontal airbag for front pas- senger* SRS side airbags (both sides) (if an offset frontal collision occurs) SRS curtain airbags (both sides) (if an offset frontal collision occurs) *: This does not operate if the occupant detection system deactivates airbag op- eration. For details, refer to Front passengers SRS frontal airbag F1-51.

. In cases of side collisions, the following components will operate si- multaneously.

SRS curtain airbag (impacted side) SRS side airbag (impacted side) (when both the satellite safing sen- sor and any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors sense an impact force) Seatbelt pretensioner for driver (when both the satellite safing sen- sor and the drivers side front door

impact sensor sense an impact force) However, when a center pillar im- pact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the seatbelt preten- sioner does not activate. Seatbelt pretensioner for front passenger (shoulder belt preten- sioner only) (when both the satellite safing sensor and the front passen- gers side front door impact sensor sense an impact force) However, when a center pillar im- pact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the seatbelt preten- sioner does not activate.

. Pretensioners are designed to func- tion on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, both the drivers and front passengers seatbelt retractor assemblies should be replaced only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- belt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts. . If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners

CONTINUED

1-27

1

Black plate (58,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners

pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . If the front seatbelt retractor assem- bly or surrounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the buyer to the contents of this section.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an upright position with their seat- belts properly fastened. Refer to Seatbelts F1-16.

. Do not modify, remove or strike the front seatbelt retractor as- semblies or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt preten- sioners or could make the sys- tem inoperative, possibly result- ing in serious injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-ser- viceable parts. For required ser- vicing of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt preten- sioners, consult your SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding front seatbelt retractor assemblies or scrap- ping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult your SUBARU dealer.

& System monitors A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner while the vehicle is being driven. The seatbelt pretensioners share the control module with the SRS airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. For details, refer to SRS airbag system monitors F1-69.

& System servicing

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re- tractor assembly or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting the systems wiring could result in accidental activation of the

seatbelt pretensioner and/or SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. Do not use elec- trical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems. For required servicing of the seatbelt pretensioner, con- sult your nearest SUBARU deal- er.

CAUTION

The sensors and SRS airbag control modules are located in the following locations.

. Front sub sensors: on both the right and left side at the front of the vehicle

. Front door impact sensors: on both front doors

. Satellite safing sensor: under the rear center seat

. Side airbag sensors: on both center pillars

. Curtain airbag sensors: on both rear wheel houses

. SRS airbag control module (in- cluding the impact sensors): un-

1-28

Black plate (59,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

der the center of the instrument panel

If you need service or repair in those areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, have the work performed by your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE If the front or side part of the vehicle is damaged in an accident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehicle modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts to your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genu- ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers door pillar or specified for indivi- dual vehicle models in this Own- ers Manual.

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com- patible with your vehicle and is appro- priate for the childs age and size. All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those described in Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) F1-37). Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraints are not

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

CONTINUED

1-29

1

Black plate (60,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, care- fully follow the manufacturers instructions.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap or in his or her arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the

child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children should be properly re- strained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

& Where to place a child re- straint system

The following are SUBARUs recommen- dations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.

1-30

Black plate (61,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

A: Front passengers seat You should not install a child restraint system (including a booster seat) due to the hazard to children posed by the passengers airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating positions Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems. In these positions, the following equip- ment is provided for installing a child restraint system. . Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat- belts . Lower anchorages (bars) . Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)

Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating position The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper anchorage (tether anchorage) are pro- vided in this position.

Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt. When you install a child restraint system in the rear seats center seating position, raise the center head restraint. Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side seating positions may be used for a seat in the center seating position if a child restraint system manufacturers instruc- tions permit and specify using anchors as far apart as those in this vehicle. If a child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place (for example, if a child restraint system can be moved more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you should install the child restraint system in a rear seat, window-side seating position.

WARNING

. Even with advanced airbags, chil- dren can be seriously injured by the airbag. Place children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly re- strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to se- cure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is appro- priate for the childs age, height and weight. According to acci- dent statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

. Do not use lower anchorages (bars) for a seat in the center seating position unless a child restraint system manufacturers instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced as far apart as those in this vehicle.

. Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same an- chorage (bar).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

CONTINUED

1-31

1

Black plate (62,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

WARNING

S I NCE YOUR VEH I C L E I S EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGERS SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- CING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

& Choosing a child restraint system

Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for the childs age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child restraint system should meet all applic- able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standards for the United States or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards for Canada. It can be identified by looking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufacturers statement of compliance in the document attached to the system. Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is compa- tible with the vehicle in which it will be used.

& Installing child restraint sys- tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat- belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint sys- tems can be thrown around in- side of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occu- pants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your

1-32

Black plate (63,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in- creased.

! Installing a rearward facing child restraint

1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

6. Push and pull the child restraint system forward and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

CONTINUED

1-33

1

Black plate (64,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

8. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

! Installing forward facing child re- straint

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm that it is securely locked into place.

It is possible to check whether the seatback is locked visually. If the seatback is locked into place, the red colored unlocking marker which is attached to the bottom of the lock release knob is invisible. For details, refer to Folding down the rear seat- back F1-13.

2. Remove the head restraint of the rear seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed. For details, refer to Head restraint adjustment F1-12.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has been removed in the cargo area. Avoid placing the head restraint in the passenger compartment to pre- vent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

3. For models with rear seat reclining mechanism, adjust the seatback to the upright position. 4. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child restraint system on the rear center seating position, if the child restraint system does not fit snugly against the contours of the rear center seat cushion, install the child restraint system on the window-side seating position to be safe. For details, refer to Where to place a child restraint system F1-30.

1-34

Black plate (65,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

When a child restraint system is installed on the rear center seating position, pass the rear center seatbelt through the belt guide properly. For details, refer to Rear center seatbelt F1-21.

6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

7. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

9. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. 10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning). 11. Latch the top tether hook onto the tether anchorage that is located behind the rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to Top tether anchorages F1-40.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

CONTINUED

1-35

1

Black plate (66,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

12. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat- belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint sys- tems can be thrown around in- side of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occu- pants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in-

creased.

1. For models with rear seat reclining mechanism, adjust the seatback to the upright position.

2. Place the booster seat in the rear seating position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the booster seat. 3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. 4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt. Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as

1-36

Black plate (67,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

possible on the childs hips.

5. To remove the booster seat, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt under the childs arm or behind the childs back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or redu- cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as possible on the childs hips. A high-positioned lap belt will in- crease the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious inter- nal injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sud- den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat- belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint sys- tems can be thrown around in- side of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occu- pants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in- creased.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

CONTINUED

1-37

1

Black plate (68,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the designated anchorages provided on the vehicle body. The lower and tether an- chorages are sometimes referred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages (bars) and three upper an- chorages (tether anchorages) for accom- modating such child restraint systems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are provided for installing a child restraint system only

on the rear seat window-side seating positions. For each window-side seating position, two lower anchorages are pro- vided. Each lower anchorage is located behind the cover of the seatback bottom.

The tether anchorages (upper an- chorages) are provided at the locations shown in the above illustration. For de- tails, refer to Top tether anchorages F1- 40.

To install a child restraint system using lower and tether anchorages, perform the following procedure.

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the

1-38

Black plate (69,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm that it is securely locked into place.

It is possible to check whether the seatback is locked visually. If the seatback is locked into place, the red colored unlocking marker which is attached to the bottom of the lock release knob is invisible. For details, refer to Folding down the rear seat- back F1-13.

2. You will find marks at the bottom of the rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate the positions of the lower an- chorages (bars).

Remove the covers and locate the lower anchorages (bars). 3. Remove the rear seat head restraint. For details, refer to Head restraint adjust- ment F1-12.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has been removed in the cargo area. Avoid placing the head restraint in the passenger compartment to pre- vent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

4. For models with rear seat reclining mechanism, adjust the seatback to the upright position.

5. While following the instructions sup- plied by the child restraint system manu- facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

CONTINUED

1-39

1

Black plate (70,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

6. [If your child restraint system is of a flexible attachment type (which uses tether belts to connect the child restraint system properly to the lower anchorages)] While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in the belt. 7. Latch the top tether hook onto the tether anchorage that is located behind the rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to Top tether anchorages F1-40.

8. Before seating a child in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to verify that it is held securely in position. 9. To remove the child restraint system, follow the reverse procedures of installa- tion.

If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint system, ask your SUBARU dealer.

& Top tether anchorages Your vehicle is equipped with three top tether anchorages so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceed as follows, while observing the instructions by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or avail- able.

1-40

Black plate (71,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Anchorage location

1) For left seat 2) For center seat 3) For right seat

Three upper anchorages are installed on the back side of the rear seatback.

! To hook the top tether

CAUTION

. Remove the head restraint when mounting a child restraint sys- tem. Otherwise, it might be pos- sible that the top tether cannot be fastened tightly.

. Store the head restraint that has been removed in the cargo area. Avoid placing the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger com- partment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

1. Remove the head restraint of the rear seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed. For details, refer to Head restraint adjustment F1-12. 2. For models with rear seat reclining mechanism, adjust the seatback to the upright position.

3. Attach the top tether hook to the appropriate upper anchorage. 4. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if you have any question regarding the installation of a child restraint system.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-41

1

Black plate (72,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re- straint system. This name is used be- cause the airbag system supplements the vehicles seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple- mental restraint system in addition to a lap/shoulder belt at each front seating position and each rear window-side seat- ing positions. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of seven airbags. The configurations are as follows. . Drivers and front passengers frontal airbags . Drivers and front passengers side airbags . Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas- senger, and window-side rear passen- gers) . Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the primary protec- tion provided by the seatbelt. The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to Front seatbelt pre- tensioners F1-25.

& General precautions regard- ing SRS airbag system

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supple- ment to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to Seatbelts F1-16.

. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seat- belt. They do not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear your seatbelt

to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright posi- tion.

WARNING

. The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control

1-42

Black plate (73,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either front door. The SRS side airbags are stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and they provide pro- tection by deploying rapidly (fas- ter than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact or frontal collision. However, the force of SRS side airbag deployment may cause injuries if your head or other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equipped with SRS curtain airbags, do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the front or rear door on either side. Also, do not put your head, arms or hands out of the window. The SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the cabin are stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass), and they provide protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact, roll- over or frontal collision. How- ever, the force of its deployment may cause injuries if your head is too close to it.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed faster than the blink of an eye and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not

in proper position such as one thrown forward during pre-acci- dent braking.

Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag de- ployment force.

WARNING

. Do not rest your arm on either front door or its internal trim. You could be injured in the event of SRS side airbag deployment.

. Do not place any objects over or

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-43

1

Black plate (74,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, these objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

WARNING

. Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dash- board. If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, these objects could in- terfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

. Do not put any objects under the

drivers side of the instrument panel. If the SRS knee airbag deploys, those objects could in- terfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

. The key must not be attached to heavy, sharp or hard acces- sories, or another key. If the SRS knee airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- ror over the inside rear view mirror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event of SRS side airbag deploy- ment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicles occupants and cause injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-

1-44

Black plate (75,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

phone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side win- dow, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A hands-free microphone or other accessory in such a loca- tion could be propelled through the cabin with great force by the curtain airbag, or it could prevent correct deployment of the curtain airbag. In either case, the result could be serious injuries.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the

passengers hand grips. If such items were hanging on the passen- gers hand grips during deployment of the SRS curtain airbags, they could cause serious injuries by coming off the passengers hand grips and being thrown through the cabin or by preventing deployment of the curtain airbags.

WARNING

Do not put any kind of cover or clothes or other objects over either front seatback and do not attach labels or stickers to the front seat surface on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent proper deployment of the SRS side airbag,

reducing protection available to the front seats occupant.

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with consider- able speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or impro- perly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

Consequently, we strongly recom- mend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-45

1

Black plate (76,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

have outgrown child restraint de- vices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating posi- tions.

For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint sys- tem, refer to Child restraint sys- tems F1-29.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passengers seat. The SRS airbag deploys with con- siderable force and can injure or even kill the child.

1-46

Black plate (77,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

WARNING

. Never allow a child to do the following.

Kneel on any passengers

seat facing the side window

Wrap his/her arms around the front seat seatback

Put his/her head, arms or other parts of the body out of the window

In the event of an accident, the force of SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his/her head, arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag and/ or SRS curtain airbag.

. Since your vehicle is also equipped with a front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag, children should be placed in the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breath- ing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing pro- blems after SRS airbag deploys,

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-47

1

Black plate (78,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

NOTE . When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting the buyer to the applicable section in this Owners Manual. . If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel supply will be cut off to reduce the risk of fire caused by leaking fuel. For details about restarting of the engine, refer to If your vehicle is involved in an accident F9-21.

1-48

Black plate (79,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Components

1) SRS frontal airbag 2) SRS side airbag 3) SRS curtain airbag 4) SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in the following locations.

Drivers SRS frontal airbag: in the center portion of the steering wheel A SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the pad of the airbag.

Front passengers SRS frontal airbag: near the top of the dashboard under the SRS AIRBAG mark

SRS side airbag: in the door side of each front seat seatback which bears an SRS AIRBAG label

SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass) An SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the top of each center pillar.

SRS knee airbag: under the steering column A SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the door of the airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-49

1

Black plate (80,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1) Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)

2) Frontal airbag module (drivers side) 3) Frontal airbag module (front passengers

side) 4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (drivers side) 7) Side airbag module (front passengers

side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side) 10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side) 12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passengers

side) 13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side) 14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side) 15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) 16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side) 17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passengers

side) 18) Knee airbag module (drivers side) 19) Front passengers occupant detection

system sensor 20) Front passengers occupant detection

control module 21) Front passengers frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator 22) SRS airbag system warning light 23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat) 24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side) 25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand

side) 26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passengers

side)

1-50

Black plate (81,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system that com- plies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system automatically determines the de- ployment force of the drivers SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy- ment. Your vehicle has warning labels on the drivers and front passengers sun visors beginning with the phrase EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS and a tag attached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase Even with Advanced Air Bags. Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag. Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt. All occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint

system. For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer to Components F1-49.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following components deploy. . SRS frontal airbag for driver . SRS frontal airbag for front passenger . SRS knee airbag for driver . SRS side airbag*1

. SRS curtain airbag*1

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat- belts by reducing the impact to the occupants head, chest and knees.

! Drivers SRS frontal airbag

The drivers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.

Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.

! Front passengers SRS frontal air- bag

The front passengers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact. The occupant detection system sensor is installed under the seat upholstery and monitors the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passengers SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not. The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag even when the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is normal. In this case, although the front passengers SRS frontal airbag does not operate, the front passengers seatbelt pretensioner oper- ates with the drivers seatbelt preten- sioner. For details about the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to Front seatbelt pre- tensioners F1-25.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact to the front passengers seat such as by kicking.

. Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seat-

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-51

1

Black plate (82,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

back and seat cushion.

. Do not spill liquid on the front passengers seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble the front passengers seat.

. Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU acces- sory under the front passengers seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passengers seat.

. Do not use the front passengers seat with the head restraint re- moved.

. Do not leave any articles on the front passengers seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle en- gaged when you leave your ve- hicle.

. Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat uphols- tery.

. Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and

seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to Manual seat F1-4 (models equipped with manual seats only).

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passengers occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU deal- er immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front passengers seat while driving the vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

! Passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators

Refer to Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators F3-16.

! Occupant detection system

The occupant detection system sensor is installed under the seat upholstery and monitors the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information,

the occupant detection system determines whether the front passengers SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not.

If the front passengers seat cushion is wet, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. If the seat cushion is wet, the front passen- ger should stop sitting on the front passengers seat. Wipe off liquid from the seat immediately, let the seat dry naturally and then check that the front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators work properly.

ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator

If the front passengers frontal airbag ON

1-52

Black plate (83,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

and OFF indicators do not work properly even when the front passengers seat is dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passengers seat and have the occupant detection system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

Also, if luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passengers seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. This may prevent the front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators from work- ing properly. Check that the indicators work properly. When the OFF indicator turns off and the ON indicator illuminates, the front passen- gers frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage and electronic devices from the front passengers seat.

CAUTION

Electrical devices, such as cell phones, laptops, portable music players, or electronic games, espe- cially when connected to the acces- sory power outlet and placed on the front passengers seat or used by the person sitting in the front pas- sengers seat, may affect the opera- tion of the occupant detection sys- tem. If either of the following situa-

tions occurs when using an electro- nic device in the vehicle, at first try to relocate that device to avoid it creating any interference.

. The SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.

. The front passengers frontal air- bag ON and OFF indicators oper- ate erratically.

If the device continues to cause interference, the use of that device in the vehicle should be discontin- ued.

! Conditions in which front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag is not activated

The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passengers seat: . The seat is empty. . The seat is equipped with an appro- priate child restraint system and an infant is restrained in it. (See WARNING that follows.) . The front passengers occupant detec- tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSEN- GERS SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recom- mended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be in- stalled in the REAR seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passengers seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passengers SRS frontal airbag de- ploy. REAR seats are the safest place for children.

CAUTION

When the front passengers seat is occupied by an infant in an appro- priate child restraint system, ob- serve the following precautions. Failure to do so may interfere with the proper operation of the occu- pant detection system, activating

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-53

1

Black plate (84,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

the front passengers SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by the infant in the child restraint system.

. Do not place any article (includ- ing electronic devices) on the seat other than the infant in the child restraint system.

. Do not place more than one infant in the child restraint sys- tem.

! If the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint sys- tem (including booster seat)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. 2. Remove the child restraint system from the seat. 3. By referring to the child restraint manufacturers recommendations as well as the child restraint system installation procedures in Child restraint systems F1-29, correctly install the child restraint system. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and make sure that the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off, take the following actions. . Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant. . Ensure that the backward-forward po- sition and seatback of front passengers seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off after taking relevant corrective actions de- scribed above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passengers seat, the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag depending on the occupants seating posture. Children should always wear a seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre- spective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated. If the front

passengers SRS frontal airbag is acti- vated (the ON indicator remains illumi- nated while the OFF indicator turns off), take the following action. . Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi- nated while the OFF indicator turns off despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the child/ small adult in the rear seat and im- mediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is recommended that on subsequent trips the child/small adult always take the rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon impact when any of the following condi- tions are met regarding the front passen- gers seat. . When the seat is occupied by an adult. . When certain items (e.g. jug of water)

1-54

Black plate (85,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

are placed on the seat.

! If the passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator turns off even when the front passengers seat is occupied by an adult

This can be caused by the adult incor- rectly sitting in the front passengers seat. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. 2. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, take the following actions. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. 2. Make sure that the front passenger does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat cover, seat heater or massager, etc. 3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passengers seat, or should sit in a

rear seat. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi- nated while the ON indicator remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

! How to contact the vehicle manu- facturer concerning modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the advanced airbag system

Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, front side frame, radiator panel, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have any questions, you may contact the following SUBARU distributors.

Subaru of America, Inc. Customer Dealer Services Department P.O. Box 6000 Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu, HI 96819-4467 808-839-2273

Shens Corporation dba Prestige Automo- bile 491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1 Dededo, Guam 96921-6225 671-633-2698

Trebol Motors P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00910 787-793-2828

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-55

1

Black plate (86,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

Subaru Canada, Inc. Consumer Support Department 560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4J7 1-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distribu- tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are in such an area, please contact the SUBARU distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle.

1-56

Black plate (87,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Operation

A) Drivers side B) Passengers side 1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. 2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the drivers vision is not

obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag depending on the characteristic of item (s) or person on the front passengers seat monitored by the front passengers occu- pant detection system sensor. For this reason, only the drivers SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system.

If the following sensors detect a predeter- mined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only drivers module or both drivers and front passen- gers modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). . the front sub sensors . the impact sensors in the airbag control module

On the drivers side, the SRS knee airbag also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-57

1

Black plate (88,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

The drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simulta- neously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the drivers SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the characteristic of item(s) or person on the seat in the case of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag.

After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- diately starts to deflate so that the drivers vision is not obstructed and the drivers ability to maintain control of the vehicle is not impaired. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys and the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy, the drivers and front passengers seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passengers SRS frontal airbag are de- signed as follows. . to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision . to function on a one-time-only basis

The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passengers SRS frontal airbag are not designed as follows. . to deploy in most lesser frontal im- pacts*1

. to deploy in most side or rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents*2

*1: Because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone.

*2: Because deployment of only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags would not protect the occupant in those situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passen- ger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of accident in which the drivers/drivers and front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy

A head-on collision against a thick con- crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti- vated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and

1-58

Black plate (89,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

magnitude to the collision described above.

! Examples of the types of acci- dents in which it is possible that the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy

Only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-59

1

Black plate (90,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the drivers/ drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a truck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal collision.

5) The vehicle strikes an object that can move or deform, such as a parked vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the dri- vers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend- ing on the level of accident forces in- volved.

1-60

Black plate (91,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Examples of the types of acci- dents in which the drivers/dri- vers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) are not de- signed to deploy in most cases

The drivers and front passengers SRS

frontal airbags are not designed to deploy in the following cases. . If the vehicle is struck from the side or from behind . If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof . If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed frontal collision

1) First impact 2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the drivers and/or front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision, first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags is/are activated on the first impact, it/they will not be activated on the second impact.

& SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU SRS curtain airbag system that complies with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an SRS AIRBAG label. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupants chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates only for front seat occupants.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass). An SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the top of each center pillar. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-61

1

Black plate (92,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

between the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupants head. In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and sup- plement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupants head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and sup- plement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupants head and chest.

! Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag can function only when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The drivers and front passengers SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact sensor.

An impact sensor, which senses impact force, is located in each of the following locations. . In the left and right front doors . In the left and right center pillars . In the left and right rear wheel houses . Under the rear center seat . On both the right and left sides at the front of the vehicle (front sub sensors)

Rollover sensor and frontal impact sensor are located inside the airbag control module which is located under the center of the instrument panel.

If the impact sensor that is located under the rear center seat and one of the center pillar impact sensors or front door impact sensors both sense an impact force above a predetermined level in a side collision, the control module causes both the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on the impacted side to inflate regardless of whether the rear wheel house impact sensor on the same side senses an impact.

If the impact sensor that is located under the rear center seat and one of the rear wheel house impact sensors together sense an impact force above a predeter- mined level in a side collision, the control module causes only the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side to inflate.

Even if a frontal collision occurs, both right and left SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags will deploy when the front sensor and the control unit determine that the impact results from an offset frontal colli- sion.

The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags are designed to deploy when the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys or the drivers and passengers SRS frontal air- bags deploy in a frontal collision, and also when the system determines that the collision is an offset frontal collision. The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain air- bags are basically designed not to deploy in a frontal collision when the SRS frontal airbags do not deploy or the system determines that the collision is other than an offset frontal collision.

If the rollover sensor detects rollover of the vehicle, the control module inflates the SRS curtain airbags on both sides. At this time, the drivers and front passengers seatbelt pretensioners also operate at the

1-62

Black plate (93,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

same time.

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occur- rences are a normal result of the deploy- ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the compo- nents can be very hot as a result of deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain airbag system (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact collision. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser side impact. Also, they are not designed to deploy in most rear impacts because SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment would not help the occupant in those situations.

The SRS curtain airbags are also de- signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely inclined state such as during a rollover. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser inclined state.

Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed to function on a one- time-only basis.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment depend on the level of force experienced in the passenger compart- ment during a side impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-63

1

Black plate (94,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Example of the type of accidents in which the SRS side airbag will most likely deploy.

1) A severe side impact near the front seat or the rear seat.

2) An offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag.

1-64

Black plate (95,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side impact near the front seat or the rear seat.

2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof. 3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or

the skidding vehicles tires hit a curb- stone laterally.

4) An offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-65

1

Black plate (96,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy.

1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole 3) Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustra- tion.

1-66

Black plate (97,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of acci- dents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-67

1

Black plate (98,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curtain airbag deployment. In the event of acci- dents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

1-68

Black plate (99,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Examples of the types of acci- dents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary). 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. 3) The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases.

1) First impact 2) Second impact A) SRS curtain airbag B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second.

& SRS airbag system monitors

SRS airbag system warning light (type A)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-69

1

Black plate (100,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

SRS airbag system warning light (type B)

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including front seatbelt pretensioners) while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS airbag system warning light will show normal system operation by illuminating for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The following components are monitored by the indicator: . Front sub sensor

Right-hand side Left-hand side

. Airbag control module (including im- pact sensor and rollover sensor) . Frontal airbag module

Drivers side Front passengers side

. Knee airbag module (drivers side)

. Side airbag sensor Center pillar right-hand side Center pillar left-hand side

. Front door impact sensor Right-hand side Left-hand side

. Side airbag module Drivers side Front passengers side

. Curtain airbag sensor Rear wheel house right-hand side Rear wheel house left-hand side

. Curtain airbag module Right-hand side Left-hand side

. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear center seat) . Seatbelt pretensioner

Drivers side Front passengers side

. Lap belt pretensioner Front passengers side

. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- gers side) . Front passengers occupant detection system sensor . Front passengers occupant detection

control module . Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator . All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn- ing light

. No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position

. Continuous illumination of the warning light

. Illumination of the warning light while driving

Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury.

1-70

Black plate (101,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod- ule or scrapping the entire vehi- cle damaged by a collision, con- sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user- serviceable parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper- ing with or disconnecting the systems wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas indicated in the following list, have the work performed by an author- ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- bag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules are stored in these areas.

. Under the center of the instru- ment panel

. On both the right and left sides at the front of the vehicle

. Steering wheel and column and nearby areas

. Bottom of the steering column and nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front passengers side and nearby areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. Inside each front door

. In each roof side (from the front pillar to a point behind the rear quarter glass)

. Between the rear seat cushion and rear wheel house on each side

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the system should be performed only by an author- ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- nents of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine SUBARU parts.

NOTE In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags did not deploy. . The pad of the steering wheel, the cover over the front passengers SRS frontal airbag, or either roof side (from the front pillar to a point behind the rear quarter glass) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. . The center pillar, front door, rear wheel house or rear sub frame, or an area near these parts, was involved in an accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy. . The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged. . The rear part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which no SRS airbag was deployed.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

CONTINUED

1-71

1

Black plate (102,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

& Precautions against vehicle modification

WARNING

To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag system.

This includes following modifica- tions.

. Installation of custom steering wheels

. Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard

. Installation of custom seats

. Replacement of seat fabric or leather

. Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat

. Attachment of a hands-free mi- crophone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

. Installation of additional electri- cal/electronic equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genu- ine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.

. Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers door pillar or specified for indivi- dual vehicle models in this Own- ers Manual.

. Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts on your vehicle.

1-72

Black plate (3,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys ..................................................................... 2-3 Key number plate................................................ 2-3

Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3 Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4 Key replacement ................................................. 2-4 Certification for immobilizer system..................... 2-4

Door locks ........................................................... 2-5 Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-5 Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-7 Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-7

Power door locking switches............................. 2-8 Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-9

Keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped) ........................................ 2-9 Safety precautions ............................................. 2-10 Locking and unlocking with keyless access entry function................................................... 2-13

Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-16 Warning chimes and warning light ...................... 2-16 Disabling keyless access function ...................... 2-17 When access key does not operate properly ....... 2-18 Replacing battery of access key ......................... 2-18 Replacing access key......................................... 2-18 Certification for keyless access with push-button start system..................................................... 2-19

PIN Code Access (models with keyless access with push-button start system)........ 2-19 Registering a PIN code....................................... 2-20 Unlocking .......................................................... 2-21

Remote keyless entry system........................... 2-21 Locking the doors.............................................. 2-23 Unlocking the doors .......................................... 2-23 Vehicle finder function ....................................... 2-23 Sounding a panic alarm ..................................... 2-24 Selecting audible signal operation (models without keyless access with push-button start system).......................................................... 2-24

Replacing the battery......................................... 2-24 Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-24

Alarm system..................................................... 2-25 System operation............................................... 2-25 Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-25 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm system ............................................................ 2-26

Arming the system ............................................ 2-26 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-29 Valet mode ........................................................ 2-29 Passive arming (models without keyless access with push-button start system) ....................... 2-30

Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-31 Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-31

Child safety locks .............................................. 2-32 Windows............................................................. 2-32

Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-33 Power window operation by passengers............. 2-36 Initialization of power window ............................ 2-38

Rear gate............................................................ 2-38 Manual rear gate (if equipped)............................ 2-38 Power rear gate (if equipped) ............................. 2-39

Keys and doors

2

Black plate (4,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors

Moonroof (if equipped) ...................................... 2-45 Moonroof switch ................................................ 2-46

Anti-entrapment function.................................... 2-46 Sun shade ......................................................... 2-47

Black plate (107,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys

NOTE

For models with keyless access with push-button start system, refer to Keyless access with push-button start system F2-9.

1) Master key 2) Submaster key 3) Valet key 4) Key number plate

Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle: Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle. . Ignition switch

. Drivers door

. Glove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it bangs against your knees while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position, thereby stopping the engine.

& Key number plate The key number is stamped on the key number plate attached to the key set. Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle. Refer to Key replacement F2-4.

Immobilizer

The immobilizer system is designed to prevent an unauthorized person from starting the engine. Only keys registered with your vehicles immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle. This system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft guarantee.

For models with keyless access with push-button start system: If you press the push-button ignition switch when carrying an unregistered access key, the switch will not turn to the ON position and the engine will not start.

If the engine does not start, perform the procedure described in Starting engine F9-18.

For models without keyless access with push-button start system: Even if an unregistered key fits into the ignition switch and can be turned to the START position, the engine will auto- matically stop after several seconds.

If the engine does not start, pull out the key once before trying again. Refer to Ignition switch (models without push- button start system) F3-4.

Keys and doors/Keys

CONTINUED

2-3

2

Black plate (108,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Immobilizer

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct sunlight or anywhere it may become hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.

. Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the sys- tem cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE . To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the fol- lowing security precautions:

Never leave your vehicle unat- tended with its keys inside. Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows and the moon- roof, and lock the doors and rear gate. Do not leave spare keys or any record of your key number in the vehicle.

. The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

& Security indicator light Refer to Security indicator light F3-30.

& Key replacement Your key number plate will be required if you ever need a replacement key made. Any new key must be registered for use with your vehicles immobilizer system before it can be used. The maximum number of keys that can be registered for use with one vehicle is as follows. . Four (models without keyless access with push-button start system) . Seven (models with keyless access with push-button start system)

One key that has already been registered is required in order to register a new key.

If you lose a key, the lost keys ID code still remains in the memory of the vehicles immobilizer system. For security reasons, the lost keys ID code should be erased from the memory. To erase the lost keys ID code, all keys that will be used are required.

For details about new key registration and erasing the lost keys ID code, contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for immobilizer system

. For models with keyless access with push-button start system: Refer to Certification for keyless access with push-button start system F2-19.

. For models without keyless access with push-button start system:

U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH

CAUTION

FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-4

Black plate (109,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Canada-spec. models

NOTE This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard (s). Operation is subject to the follow- ing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

Mexico-spec. models Door locks

& Locking and unlocking from the outside

NOTE If you unlock the drivers door with a key (including a mechanical key) and open the door while the alarm system is armed, the alarm system is triggered and the vehicles horn sounds. In this case, perform any of the following operations:

Models with keyless access with push-button start system: . Press any button on the access key (except when the access key battery is discharged). . Turn the push-button ignition switch to the ACC position. . Carry the access key and perform either of the following procedures.

Grip the front door handle Press the rear gate opener button

Models without keyless access with push-button start system: . Press any button on the remote transmitter (except when the transmit- ter battery is discharged). . Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to

Keys and doors/Door locks

CONTINUED

2-5

2

Black plate (110,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Door locks

the ON position.

For details about the alarm system, refer to Alarm system F2-25.

To lock the drivers door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the front.

To unlock the door, turn the key toward the rear. Pull the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.

NOTE For models with keyless access with push-button start system: The mechanical key is directional. If the key cannot be inserted, change the direction that the grooved side is facing and insert it again.

To lock the door from outside without the key, the following methods are available.

Locking using lock lever 1) Rotate the lock lever forward. 2) Close the door.

2-6

Black plate (111,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Locking using power door locking switch 1) Press the front side (lock side) of the

power door locking switch. 2) Close the door.

In this case, all closed doors and the rear gate are locked at the same time.

Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are locked before leaving your vehicle.

NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle when locking the doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking from the inside

1) Unlock 2) Lock

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever forward. To unlock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.

Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are closed before starting to drive.

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small chil- dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat- belts and child restraints, locking the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an accident.

It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is acciden- tally opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle.

& Battery drainage prevention function

If a door or the rear gate is not completely closed, the interior lights will remain illuminated as a result. However, several lights will be automatically turned off by the battery drainage prevention function to prevent the battery from discharging. The following interior lights will be affected by this function.

Keys and doors/Door locks

CONTINUED

2-7

2

Black plate (112,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Power door locking switches

Item Switch position

Automatically turning off

Map lights DOOR*1 Approximately 20 minutes later

Dome light DOOR Approximately 20 minutes later

Ignition switch light Approximately 20

minutes later

Door step lights None*2

Cargo area light DOOR Approximately 20

minutes later

*1: The map lights can be controlled by the battery drainage prevention function only when the map light switches are in the OFF position and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR position. For the switch positions, refer to Map lights F6-3.

*2: The door step lights are not affected by the battery drainage prevention function, so the lights will not turn off automatically. To turn off the lights, it is necessary that each door is completely closed.

The operational/non-operational setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting.

NOTE . The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as operational. . When leaving the vehicle, please make sure that all doors and the rear gate are completely closed. . The battery drainage prevention function does not operate while the key is in the ignition switch.

Power door locking switches

1) Lock 2) Unlock

All doors and the rear gate can be locked and unlocked by the power door locking switches located at the drivers side and the front passengers side doors.

To lock the doors, push the front side of the switch. To unlock the doors, push the rear side of the switch.

When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain locked.

2-8

Black plate (113,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using the power door locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func- tion

This function prevents the doors from being locked under the following condi- tions. . The key is still in the ignition switch (models without keyless access with push-button start system) . The ignition switch is in the ON position (models with keyless access with push-button start system)

This functions operational/non-opera- tional setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for details.

NOTE . The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as operational. . When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are holding the key before locking the doors.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven- tion function operational

With the drivers door open, the doors are automatically kept unlocked even if the front side of the power door locking switch is pressed.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven- tion function non-operational

. If the lock lever is turned to the front (LOCK) position with the drivers door open and the drivers door is then closed with the lock lever in that position, the drivers door is locked. . If the spare key is used to lock the drivers door from the outside of the vehicle, the door is locked.

Keyless access with push- button start system (if equipped)

1) Access key (main) 2) Access key (sub) 3) Key number plate

The vehicle has two access keys and a key number plate. For details about the key number plate, refer to Key number plate F2-3.

The keyless access with push-button start system allows you to perform the following functions when you are carrying the access key. . Locking and unlocking of the doors and rear gate . Starting and stopping the engine. For

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

CONTINUED

2-9

2

Black plate (114,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

detailed information, refer to Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) F7-12. . Arming and disarming the alarm sys- tem. For detailed information, refer to Alarm system F2-25.

Locking and unlocking by the remote keyless entry system can also be con- trolled with the buttons on the access key. For detailed information, refer to Remote keyless entry system F2-21.

A mechanical key is attached to each access key. The mechanical key is used for the following operations. . Locking and unlocking the drivers door . Locking and unlocking the glove box

You cannot unlock the glove box without using the mechanical key. You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and the access key (with the mechanical key removed) at a parking facility.

1) Release button 2) Mechanical key

While pressing the release button of the access key, take out the mechanical key.

& Safety precautions

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, stay at least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the transmitting antennas installed on the vehicle.

The radio waves from the transmit- ting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of implanted pacemakers and im- planted defibrillators.

If you wear electric medical equip- ment other than an implanted pace- maker or an implanted defibrillator, before using the keyless access with push-button start system, refer to Radio waves used for the key- less access with push-button start system mentioned later, and con- tact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for more information. The radio waves from the transmit- ting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the electric medical equipment.

Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start sys- tem

. The keyless access with push- button start system uses radio waves of the following fre- quency* in addition to the radio waves used for the remote key- less entry system. The radio waves are periodically output from the antennas installed on the vehicle as shown in the following illustrations.

* Radio frequency: 134 kHz

2-10

Black plate (115,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

1) Antenna

CAUTION

. Never leave or store the access key inside the vehicle (e.g., on the instrumental panel, inside the

glove box, on the seat, in the door pocket or at the corner of the cargo area) or within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The access key may be locked inside the vehicle, or the battery may discharge rapidly. Note that the push-button igni- tion switch may not turn on in some cases depending on the location of the access key.

. The access key contains electro- nic components. Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunctions.

Although you can replace the battery of the access key yourself, it is recommended that the battery be replaced by a SUBARU dealer to avoid the risk of damage at the time of replacement.

Do not get the access key wet. If the access key gets wet, wipe it off immediately and let it dry completely.

Do not allow strong impacts to the access key.

Keep the access key away from magnetic sources.

Never leave the access key in

direct sunlight or anywhere that may become hot, such as on the dashboard. It may damage the battery or cause circuit malfunctions.

Do not wash the access key in an ultrasonic washer.

Do not leave the access key in humid or dusty locations. Doing so may cause malfunc- tions.

Do not leave the access key near personal computers or home electric appliances. Doing so may cause the ac- cess key to malfunction, re- sulting in battery discharge.

. If the access key is dropped, the integrated mechanical key inside may become loose. Be careful not to lose the mechanical key.

. When you carry the access key on an airplane, do not press the button of the access key while in the airplane. When any button of the access key is pressed, radio waves are sent and may affect the operation of the airplane. When you carry the access key in a bag on an airplane, take measures to prevent the buttons

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

CONTINUED

2-11

2

Black plate (116,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

of the access key from being pressed.

NOTE . The operational/non-operational setting for the keyless access function can be changed. For the setting proce- dure, refer to Disabling keyless ac- cess function F2-17. The setting can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer. . For detailed information about the operation method for the push-button ignition switch while the keyless ac- cess function is switched to the non- operational mode, refer to Access key if access key does not operate properly F9-17. . The keyless access with push-but- ton start system uses weak radio waves. The status of the access key and environmental conditions may in- terfere with the communication be- tween the access key and the vehicle under the following conditions, and it may not be possible to lock or unlock the doors or start the engine.

When operating near a facility where strong radio waves are trans- mitted, such as a broadcast station

and power transmission lines When products that transmit radio waves are used, such as an access key or a remote transmitter key of another vehicle When carrying the access key of your vehicle together with an ac- cess key or a remote transmitter of another vehicle When the access key is placed near wireless communication equipment such as a cell phone When the access key is placed near a metallic object When metallic accessories are attached to the access key When carrying the access key with electronic appliances such as a laptop computer When the battery of the access key is discharged

. The access key is always commu- nicating with the vehicle and is con- tinuously using the battery. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, it is ap- proximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery becomes fully discharged, replace it with a new one. . If an access key is lost, it is recommended that the remaining ac- cess key be reregistered. For reregis-

tration of an access key, contact a SUBARU dealer. . For a spare access key, contact a SUBARU dealer. . Up to 7 access keys can be regis- tered for one vehicle. . Carefully store the key number plate supplied with the access key. It is necessary for vehicle repair. . Do not leave the access key in the storage spaces inside the vehicle, such as the door pocket, dashboard and the corner of the cargo area. Vibrations may damage the key or turn on the switch, possibly resulting in a lockout. . After the vehicle battery is dis- charged or replaced, initialization of the steering lock system may be re- quired to start the engine. In this case, perform the following procedure to initialize the steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignition switch to the OFF position. For details, refer to Switching power status F3-7. (2) Open and close the drivers door. (3) Wait for approximately 10 sec- onds.

When the steering is locked, the initi- alization is completed.

2-12

Black plate (117,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Locking and unlocking with keyless access entry func- tion

! Operating ranges

1) Antenna 2) Operating range

The operating ranges of the door and rear gate locking/unlocking functions are ap- proximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from the respective door handles and the rear gate ornament.

1) LED indicator

When the access key is within either of the operating ranges of the front doors, the LED indicator on the access key flashes. When the keyless access functions are disabled, the LED indicator does not flash unless a button on the access key is pressed.

! Operating range tips

. Locking by using the keyless access function can be operated only by the door lock sensor in the operating range in which the access key is detected. . Unlocking by using the keyless access function can be operated only by the door handle in the operating range in which the access key is detected. . If the access key is placed too close to

the vehicle body, the keyless access function may not operate properly. If they do not operate properly, repeat the opera- tion from further away. . If the access key is placed near the ground or in an elevated location from the ground, even if it is in the indicated operating range, the keyless access func- tion may not operate properly. . When the access key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who is not carrying the access key, to operate the keyless access function. Note that locking and unlocking can be operated only by the door handle, door lock sensor, rear gate opener button or rear lock button in the operating range in which the access key is detected. . It is not possible to lock the doors and rear gate using the keyless access func- tion when the access key is inside the vehicle. However, depending on the status of the access key and the environmental conditions, the access key may be locked inside the vehicle. Before locking, make sure that you have the access key. . When the battery of the access key is discharged, or when operating it in a location with strong radio waves or noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power plant, broadcast station or an area where wire- less equipment is used), or while talking

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

CONTINUED

2-13

2

Black plate (118,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

on a cell phone, the operating ranges may be reduced, or the keyless access func- tion may not operate. In such a case, perform the procedure described in Locking and unlocking F9- 17. . When an access key is in the operating range, if the door handle becomes wet due to exposure to a significant amount of water when the vehicle is washed or during heavy rain, the doors may be locked or unlocked. . The keyless access function may not operate properly depending on the status of the access key and the radio wave conditions around the vehicle. In such a case, perform the procedure described in Locking and unlocking F9-17.

! How to use keyless access func- tions

! Keyless access function tips

. When you lock the doors and rear gate using the keyless access function, turn the push-button ignition switch off. It is not possible to lock the doors and rear gate using the keyless access function when the push-button ignition switch is on the ACC or ON position. Refer to Switch- ing power status F3-7. . If the door handle is gripped with a gloved hand, the door lock may not be

released. . If the door lock sensor is touched three times or more repeatedly, the system will ignore the sensor operation. . When performing the locking proce- dure too quickly, locking may not have been completed. After performing the locking procedure, it is recommended to pull the REAR door handle to confirm that the doors have been locked. . It is possible to lock the doors even when one of the doors is open. After performing the locking procedure, close the opened door or rear gate to lock it. . Within 3 seconds after locking the doors and the rear gate by using the keyless access function, it is not possible to unlock doors and/or the rear gate by using the keyless access function. . When locking, be sure to carry the access key to prevent locking the access key in the vehicle. . The setting of the hazard warning flasher operation and the volume of the audible signal can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. . For models with the multi function display, the setting of the hazard warning flasher operation can be changed by operating the multi function display. For details, refer to Hazard warning flasher

setting F3-82.

! Unlocking

Carry the access key, and grip the door handle. . When the drivers door handle is gripped, only the drivers door will be unlocked. . When the front passengers door han- dle is gripped, all doors including the rear gate will be unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

2-14

Black plate (119,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Opening rear gate

1) Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key, and press the rear gate opener button. Only the rear gate will be unlocked and opened. Also, an elec- tronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

! Locking with the door lock sensor

1) Door lock sensor

Carry the access key, close all doors including the rear gate and touch the door lock sensor on the door handle. All doors including the rear gate will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

NOTE After touching the door lock sensor to lock all of the doors (including the rear gate), if you touch the door lock sensor once more to attempt the lock opera- tion without first unlocking the doors, nothing will happen, even if the door lock sensor is touched. In this case, perform the unlocking operation once

first. You can then touch the door lock sensor to lock the doors.

! Locking with the rear lock button

1) Rear lock button

Carry the access key, close all doors including the rear gate and press the rear lock button. The rear gate and all doors will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

! Power saving function

The keyless access function will be disabled in the following cases to protect the access key battery and the vehicle battery.

. Case 1: When the keyless access function and the remote keyless entry

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

CONTINUED

2-15

2

Black plate (120,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

system have not been used for 2 weeks or longer while all doors are locked

To recover the keyless access func- tion: Operate one of the following items.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Unlock the doors by operating any procedure other than gripping the front passengers door handle Lock the doors Open a door and then close it

. Case 2: When the access key has been left in the operating range for 10 minutes or longer while all doors are locked

To recover the keyless access func- tion: Operate one of the following items.

Unlock the doors by gripping the door handle Unlock the doors by pressing the rear gate opener button Lock the doors by touching the door lock sensor Lock or unlock the doors by using the remote keyless entry system Lock or unlock the doors by using the power door locking switch Open either of the front doors

! Door unlock selection function

The door unlock selection function makes it possible to unlock the drivers door or the rear gate without unlocking any other doors. You can change the setting for the drivers door and for the rear gate inde- pendently.

Operational: Only the drivers door or the rear gate will be unlocked.

Non-operational: All doors and the rear gate will be unlocked.

For the factory setting (default setting), refer to Function settings F25.

NOTE The setting can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for models with the multi function display, the setting can be changed by operating the multi function display. For details, refer to Keyless access setting (models with keyless access with push-button start system) F3-86.

& Selecting audible signal op- eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn the audible signal off. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE For models with the multi function display, the setting can be changed by operating the multi function display. For details, refer to Keyless buzzer volume setting F3-81.

& Warning chimes and warning light

The keyless access with push-button start system sounds a warning chime and flashes the access key warning light on the combination meter in order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft. For details, refer to Warning chimes and warning light of the keyless access with push-button start system F3-25.

2-16

Black plate (121,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Disabling keyless access function

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, per- form the procedure described in By operating the drivers door F2-18 to disable the keyless access function. If you perform the proce- dure described in By operating the access key F2-17, the operation of an implanted pacemaker or im- planted defibrillator may be affected by the radio waves from the trans- mitter antenna.

When the vehicle is not going to be used for a long time, or when you choose not to use the keyless access function, the keyless access function can be disabled.

NOTE . The locking and unlocking function by the remote keyless entry system is not disabled. . The setting can also be changed at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer. . To start the engine while the func- tions are disabled, perform the proce-

dure described in Starting engine F9-18. . We recommend that you disable the keyless access functions under the following conditions.

When the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended period of time When the keyless access func- tions are not going to be used

! Disabling functions

! By operating the access key

If you have registered a PIN code for PIN Code Access, you can disable the keyless access function by operating the access key. For details about registering a PIN code, refer to Registering a PIN code F2-20. 1. Open the drivers door.

2. Rotate the lock lever forward.

3. Press and hold the button and button on the access key simulta- neously for more than 5 seconds.

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

CONTINUED

2-17

2

Black plate (122,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system

! By operating the drivers door

A chirp sound will be heard, and the function will be disabled. 1. Sit in the drivers seat, and close the door.

2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the power door locking switch. 3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is performed, open the drivers door. 4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is performed, push the rear side (unlock side) of the power door locking switch twice while the door is open. 5. Within 10 seconds after step 4 is performed, close and open the drivers door twice. 6. Within 10 seconds after step 5 is performed, push the rear side (unlock

side) of the power door locking switch twice while the door is open. 7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is performed, close and open the drivers door once. 8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is performed, close the door. A chirp sound will be heard, and the functions will be disabled.

NOTE In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch slowly. If the switch is pressed quickly, the functions may not be disabled.

! Enabling functions

When the procedure to disable the func- tions is performed again, the functions are enabled.

NOTE . The keyless access function will be enabled only if you perform the proce- dure in the same manner that you disabled the function (for example, when disabling by operating the dri- vers door, the function will not be enabled even if you operate the access key). . Press the push-button ignition switch if you do not know the proce-

dure in which the keyless access function was disabled.

When disabling by operating the drivers door: a chirp will not be heard When disabling by operating the access key: a chirp will be heard

& When access key does not operate properly

Refer to Access key if access key does not operate properly F9-17.

& Replacing battery of access key

Refer to Replacing battery of access key F11-45.

& Replacing access key Access keys can be replaced at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

2-18

Black plate (123,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Certification for keyless ac- cess with push-button start system

! U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AHC FCC ID: HYQ13CZZ FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02 FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.

! Canada-spec. models

NOTE This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard (s). Operation is subject to the follow- ing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

PIN Code Access (models with keyless access with push-button start system)

1) Rear lock button

When all doors and the rear gate are locked, you can unlock them without a key by operating the rear lock button. You need to register a PIN code to your vehicle before using this function.

NOTE PIN Code Access will be helpful if the key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It is recommended that a 5-digit security code (PIN code) is registered.

Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with keyless access with pushbutton start system)

CONTINUED

2-19

2

Black plate (124,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with keyless access with pushbutton start system)

& Registering a PIN code

! Preparation

1. Close all doors and the rear gate. 2. Press and hold the button on the access key. Then all doors and the rear gate will be locked. 3. Keep the button pressed, and press the rear lock button within 5 seconds after step 2. 4. Press and hold the above button for more than 5 seconds. Then a chirp will sound. 5. Release the button and the rear lock button. 6. Press the button on the access key while the chirp sounds. Then the chirp will stop and the prepara- tion is complete.

NOTE If you do not press the button on the access key, the chirp will sound for 30 seconds. In this case, the prepara- tion for registering a PIN code does not complete even if the chirp stops.

! Registration

For example, to register 32468 as the PIN code, perform the following proce- dure. 1. Press the rear lock button three times. 2. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once, press the rear lock button twice. 3. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once, press the rear lock button four times. 4. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once, press the rear lock button six times. 5. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once, press the rear lock button eight times. 6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the buz- zer starts sounding intermittently. 7. All doors and the rear gate that have been unlocked will be locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.

NOTE . If you make an error during the registration procedure, open the dri- vers door and then close it. Then, start over from the procedure described in Preparation. . To protect your vehicle from theft, you cannot register a string of the same five numbers together, such as 00000, nor 12345 as a PIN code. . Do not register your vehicle license

plate number or simple numbers such as 11122 or 12121 as a PIN code. Doing so will increase the risk of vehicle theft. . When you try to register 22222, the registered PIN code will be deleted. You cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code Access until a new code is registered. . After registering a new PIN code, make sure that you can unlock the doors using the PIN code. . When you delete the PIN code while the keyless access function is dis- abled, the keyless access function will be enabled. . Reregister the PIN code in the following case.

when you forget the PIN code when you want to change the PIN code

2-20

Black plate (125,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Unlocking Perform steps 1 to 5 described in Regis- tration.

NOTE . You cannot unlock by PIN Code Access in the following cases.

when the access key is within the operating ranges when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position

. If you make an operation error during the unlocking procedure, start over with the unlocking procedure after waiting for 5 seconds or longer. . To protect your vehicle from theft, a buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes are entered five times continuously. If this occurs, you cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code Access for 5 minutes.

Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans- mitter to severe shocks, such as those experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmit- ter apart except when replacing the battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.

. When you carry the remote trans- mitter on an airplane, do not press the button of the remote transmitter while in the airplane. When any button of the remote transmitter is pressed, radio waves are sent and may affect the operation of the airplane. When you carry the remote trans- mitter in a bag on an airplane, take measures to prevent the buttons of the remote transmitter from being pressed.

. FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

FCC ID: CWTWB1U811 FCC ID: CWTWD1U781 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard (s). Operation is subject to the follow- ing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

CONTINUED

2-21

2

Black plate (126,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

For models with keyless access with push-button start system, the access key is used as the transmitter for the remote keyless entry system. For models without keyless access with push-button start system, the transmitter for the remote keyless entry system is located inside the key head.

The remote keyless entry system has the following functions. . Locking and unlocking the doors (and rear gate) without a key . Unlocking the rear gate without a key . Sounding a panic alarm . Arming and disarming the alarm sys- tem. For detailed information, refer to Alarm system F2-25.

The operable distance of the remote keyless entry system is approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this distance will vary depending on environmental conditions. The systems operable dis- tance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote

controller of home electronic appliances.

NOTE . For models with keyless access with push-button start system, the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in any position other than the OFF position. . For models without keyless access with push-button start system, the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the key is inserted in the ignition switch. Access key

1) Lock/arm button 2) Unlock/disarm button 3) Rear gate unlock button 4) PANIC button

2-22

Black plate (127,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Transmitter 1) Lock/arm button 2) Unlock/disarm button 3) Rear gate unlock button 4) PANIC button

NOTE The hazard warning flashers will flash once or twice when the access key/ transmitter button is pressed in the following cases. When locking the doors When unlocking the doors When unlocking the rear gate

Operation of the hazard warning flashers in the above cases can be set to On or Off by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails. Also, for models with a multi function display, the setting can be changed using the display. For details, refer to Hazard warning flasher setting F3-82.

& Locking the doors Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors and rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate) is not fully closed, the following will occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed. . an electronic chirp sounds five times. . the hazard warning flashers flash five times.

When you close the door, it will automa- tically lock and then the following will occur. . an electronic chirp sounds once. . the hazard warning flashers flash once.

& Unlocking the doors Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock the drivers door. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors and the rear gate, briefly press the

unlock/disarm button a second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE If the interval between the first and second presses of the unlock/disarm button (for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the system may not respond.

& Vehicle finder function Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the lock/arm button three times in a 5-second period will cause your vehicles horn to sound once and its hazard warning flashers to flash three times.

NOTE If the interval between presses is too short when you press the lock/arm button three times, the system may not respond to the signals from the access key/remote transmitter.

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

CONTINUED

2-23

2

Black plate (128,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

& Sounding a panic alarm To activate the alarm, press the PANIC button once. The horn will sound and the hazard warning flashers will flash. To deactivate the panic alarm, press any button on the access key/remote transmit- ter. Unless a button on the access key/ remote transmitter is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.

& Selecting audible signal op- eration (models without keyless access with push- button start system)

Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn the audible signal off.

Perform the following steps to deactivate the audible signal. You can also use the same steps to restore the function. 1. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all doors and the rear gate.

2. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side of the power door locking switch. 3. While holding down the REAR (UN- LOCK) side of the power door locking switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into the ignition switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds after Step 2. 4. Open and close the drivers door once within 10 seconds after Step 3. 5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times to indicate completion of the setting.

You may have the above settings done by your SUBARU dealer. Also, for models with a multi function display, the setting can be changed using the display. For details, refer to Keyless buzzer volume setting F3-81.

& Replacing the battery Refer to Replacing key battery F11-44.

& Replacing lost transmitters If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), your transmit- ters should be reprogrammed for security reasons. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters programmed into the remote keyless entry system.

2-24

Black plate (129,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the hazard warning flashers flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle.

For models with keyless access with push-button start system: The system can be armed and disarmed with the keyless access function or access key. The system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

For models without keyless access with push-button start system: The system can be armed and disarmed with the remote transmitter. The system will not be activated when the key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicles alarm system has been set for activation at the time of shipment from the factory. You can set the system for deactivation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer.

& System operation The alarm system will sound the following alarms when triggered. . The vehicles horn will sound for 30 seconds. . The hazard warning flashers will flash for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors or the rear gate remains open after the 30-second period, the horn will continue to sound for a maximum of 3 minutes. If the door or the rear gate is closed while the horn is sounding, the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.

The alarm is triggered by: . Opening any of the doors or the rear gate . Physical impact to the vehicle, such as forced entry (only models with shock sensors (dealer option))

NOTE The alarm system can be set to trigger the illumination of the following interior lights. . Map lights (illuminate only when the door interlock switch is in the DOOR position) . Dome light (illuminates only when the dome light switch is in the DOOR

position) . Cargo area light (illuminates only when the cargo area light switch is in the ON position)

The notifications regarding the map lights, dome light and cargo area light are deactivated as the factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can activate the sys- tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Activating and deactivating the alarm system

To change the setting of your vehicles alarm system for activation or deactiva- tion, do the following. 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to Disarming the system F2-29. 2. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all doors and the rear gate. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side of the drivers power door locking switch, open the drivers door within the following 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without releasing the switch. The setting will then be changed as follows.

If the system was previously activated: The odometer/trip meter screen displays

Keys and doors/Alarm system

CONTINUED

2-25

2

Black plate (130,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Alarm system

AL oF and the horn sounds twice, indicating that the system is now deacti- vated. If the system was previously deacti- vated: The odometer/trip meter screen displays AL on and the horn sounds once, indicating that the system is now acti- vated.

NOTE You may have the above setting change done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig- gered the alarm system

! To stop the alarm

Perform any of the following operations. . Press any button on the access key/ remote transmitter. . Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (models without keyless access with push-button start system). . Turn the push-button ignition to the ACC position (models with keyless access with push-button start system).

NOTE Only registered keys will stop the alarm. If the immobilizer transponder is not registered, the alarm will not

stop.

& Arming the system NOTE . The system can be armed even if the engine hood, the windows and/or moonroof are open. Always make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system. . When arming the system, if any of the doors (including the rear gate) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, and the hazard warning flashers flash five times to alert you that the doors (including the rear gate) are not properly closed. When you close the door, the doors will automatically lock and the system will automatically arm in 30 seconds. . The 30-second standby time can be eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- formed by your SUBARU dealer. . The system is in the standby mode for a 30-second period before arming the system. The security indicator light will flash at short intervals during this period. . If any of the following actions is done during the standby period, the system will not switch to the surveil- lance state.

Doors (including the rear gate) are unlocked using the access key/ remote transmitter. Doors (including the rear gate) are unlocked using the keyless access function (models with key- less access with push-button start system). Any door (including the rear gate) is opened. The ignition switch is turned to the ON position (models without keyless access with push-button start system). Push-button ignition switch is turned to the ACC position (mod- els with keyless access with push- button start system).

! To arm the system using the access key/remote transmitter

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if equipped). 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch (models without keyless access with push-button start system)/turn the push-button ignition switch to the OFF position (models with keyless access with push-button start system). 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle. 4. Make sure that the engine hood is

2-26

Black plate (131,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

locked. 5. Close all doors and the rear gate.

Access key 1) Arm button: Press to arm the system 2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the

system

Transmitter 1) Arm button: Press to arm the system 2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the

system

Security indicator light (type A)

Security indicator light (type B)

6. Briefly press the arm button (for less than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear gate) will lock, an electronic chirp will sound once, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and the security indicator light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicat- ing that the system has been armed for surveillance.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, the hazard warning flashers flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed. When you close the door, the system will automatically arm and doors will automa-

Keys and doors/Alarm system

CONTINUED

2-27

2

Black plate (132,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Alarm system

tically lock.

! To arm the system using power door locking switches

1. Close all windows. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch (models without keyless access with push-button start system)/turn the push-button ignition switch to the OFF position (models with keyless access with push-button start system). 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle. 4. Make sure that the engine hood is locked. 5. Close the doors (and the rear gate) but leave only the drivers door or the front passengers door open.

6. Press the front side (LOCK side) of

the power door locking switch to set the door locks. 7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will sound once, the hazard warning flashers will flash once and the security indicator light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicat- ing that the system has been armed for surveillance.

! To arm the system using the key- less access function (if equipped)

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if equipped) 2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle. 4. Make sure that the engine hood is locked. 5. Close all doors and the rear gate.

1) Door lock sensor

Security indicator light (type A)

2-28

Black plate (133,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Security indicator light (type B)

6. Carry the access key and touch the door lock sensor. All doors (and the rear gate) will lock, an electronic chirp will sound once, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and the security indicator light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the security indicator light will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec- onds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveillance.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, the hazard warning flashers flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed. When you close the door, the system will automatically arm and doors will automa-

tically lock.

& Disarming the system Perform either of the following procedures. . Briefly press the disarm button (for less than 2 seconds) on the access key/remote transmitter. . Carry the access key and perform either of the following procedures (models with keyless access with push-button start system).

Grip the front door handle. Press the rear gate opener button.

The flashing of the security indicator light will then change slowly (once approxi- mately every 3 seconds from twice ap- proximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the alarm system has been disarmed.

! Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the access key/transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can disarm the system without using the access key/remote transmitter. The system can be disarmed if you turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF to the ON position with a registered key/ access key.

NOTE For models with keyless access with push-button start system, if the ac- cess key battery is discharged, perform the procedure described in Switching power status F9-17. In such a case, replace the battery immediately. Refer to Replacing battery of access key F11-45.

& Valet mode When you choose the valet mode, the alarm system does not operate. In valet mode, the access key/remote transmitter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate and for panic activa- tion.

To enter the valet mode, change the setting of your vehicles alarm system for deactivation mode. Refer to Activating and deactivating the alarm system F2- 25. The security indicator light will con- tinue to flash once every 3 seconds indicating that the system is in the valet mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of your vehicles alarm system for activation mode. Refer to Activating and deactivat- ing the alarm system F2-25.

Keys and doors/Alarm system

CONTINUED

2-29

2

Black plate (134,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Alarm system

& Passive arming (models without keyless access with push-button start system)

When passive arming mode has been programmed by the dealer, arming of the system is automatically accomplished without using the remote transmitter. Note that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY LOCKED.

! To enter the passive mode

If you wish to program the passive arming mode, have it done by your SUBARU dealer.

! Arming the system

CAUTION

In passive mode, the system will automatically activate the alarm but WILL NOT automatically lock the doors. In order to lock the doors you must either lock them as in- dicated in step 4 below or with the key once they have been closed. Failure to lock the doors manually will result in a higher security risk.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

1) ON 2) LOCK

2. Turn the ignition switch from ON to LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors with the inside door lock levers. 5. Close the doors. The system will automatically arm after 1 minute.

In the passive mode, the system can also be armed with the remote transmitter or with the power door locking switches. If the remote transmitter or power door locking switch is used to lock the vehicle, arming will take place immediately regard- less of whether or not the passive mode has been selected.

! Disarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the disarm button on the remote transmitter.

2-30

Black plate (135,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Tripped sensor identification The security indicator light flashes when the alarm system has been triggered. Also, the number of flashes indicates the location of unauthorized intrusion or the severity of impact on the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the indicator light will light for 1 second and then flash as follows. . When a door or rear gate was opened: 5 times . When a strong impact or multiple impacts were sensed: twice (only models with shock sensors (dealer option)) . When a light impact was sensed: once (only models with shock sensors (dealer option))

NOTE Any of the above indicator light flash- ings will recur each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. Rearming the alarm system cancels the flashing.

& Shock sensors (dealer op- tion)

The shock sensors trigger the alarm system when they sense impacts applied to the vehicle and when any of their electric wires are cut. The alarm system causes the horn to sound and the hazard warning flashers to flash for a short time when the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of a strong impact or multiple impacts by sounding the horn and flashing the hazard warning flashers, both lasting approximately 30 seconds. If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can connect them and set them for activation or deactivation.

NOTE . The shock sensors are not always able to sense impacts caused by break- ing in, and cannot sense an impact that does not cause vibration (such as breaking the glass using a rescue hammer). . The shock sensors may sense vi- bration as indicated in the following examples and trigger the alarm system. Select the settings of the alarm system and shock sensors appropriately de- pending on where you usually park your vehicle.

Examples: Vibration from a construction site Vibration in a multistory car park Vibration from trains

. You can have the sensitivity of the shock sensors adjusted to your pre- ference by your SUBARU dealer.

Keys and doors/Alarm system 2-31

2

Black plate (136,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Child safety locks

Child safety locks

Each rear door has a child safety lock. When the child safety lock lever is in the LOCK position, the door cannot be opened from inside. The door can only be opened from the outside.

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks to the LOCK position when children sit on the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out.

Windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always con- form to the following instructions without exception.

. When operating the power win- dows, be extremely careful to prevent anyones fingers, arms, neck, head or other objects from being caught in the window.

. Always lock the passengers win- dows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle.

. Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety rea- sons and never allow an unat- tended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window.

. The driver should be aware of and pay careful attention to his/ her responsibilities.

CAUTION

After fully opening or fully closing a window, do not continue to press the switch in the same direction. It may cause the power window to malfunction.

NOTE . Due to the structure of the vehicle body, the rear seat window cannot be fully opened. . When the following operations are performed, the power window breaker will operate and it may not be possible to open or close the window.

After the drivers window and, for some models, the front passengers window are fully closed or fully opened, the switch is continuously operated in the same direction for a few seconds. After the windows for three or more seats are fully closed or fully opened, each switch is continu- ously operated in the same direc- tion simultaneously for a few sec- onds.

. In this case, after the breaker re- covers, be sure to initialize the power windows. If they are not initialized, the

2-32

Black plate (137,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

one-touch auto up/down function will not operate. Refer to Initialization of power window F2-38.

The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

& Power window operation by driver

! Drivers side power window switches

1) Lock switch 2) For drivers window (with one-touch auto

up and down feature) 3) For front passengers window (with one-

touch auto up and down feature) (if equipped)

4) For rear left window 5) For rear right window

All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster at the driver side door.

! Operating the drivers window

1) Automatically open/close 2) Open/close

To open: Press the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long as the switch is held.

NOTE If you continue to hold the AUTO switch in the down position after the window has been fully opened, the circuit breaker may activate for a short time and the window may not operate. Allow several seconds for the system

to reset without touching the switch, and the window will begin to operate normally on its own.

This switch also has a one-touch auto down feature that allows the window to be opened fully without holding the switch. Press the switch down until it clicks and release it, and the window will fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up lightly.

To close: Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as the switch is held.

NOTE If you continue to hold the AUTO switch in the up position after the window has fully closed, the circuit breaker may open and the system may not operate. After several seconds, the window will be able to be opened by holding the switch down until it is fully opened. The AUTO function will not operate. The window can be raised by pulling up on the switch several times until the window is fully closed. To reset to normal operation, initialize the power window to reactivate the one-touch auto up/down function. Re- fer to Initialization of power window

Keys and doors/Windows

CONTINUED

2-33

2

Black plate (138,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Windows

F2-38.

This switch also has a one-touch auto up feature that allows the window to be closed fully without holding the switch. Pull the switch up until it clicks and release it, and the window will fully close. To stop the window halfway, press the switch down lightly.

NOTE If the vehicles battery is disconnected due to situations such as battery or fuse replacement, the one-touch auto up/down function will be deactivated. Initialize the power window to reacti- vate the one-touch auto up/down func- tion. Refer to Initialization of power window F2-38.

! Operating the front passengers window

1) Automatically open/close (if equipped) 2) Open/close

To open: Press the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long as the switch is held.

NOTE If you continue to hold the AUTO switch in the down position after the window has been fully opened, the circuit breaker may activate for a short time and the window may not operate. Allow several seconds for the system to reset without touching the switch, and the window will begin to operate normally on its own.

For some models, this switch is also equipped with a one-touch auto down feature that allows the window to be opened fully without holding the switch. Press the switch down until it clicks and release it, and the window will fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up lightly.

To close: Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as the switch is held.

NOTE If you continue to hold the AUTO switch in the up position after the window has fully closed, the circuit breaker may open and the system may not operate. After several seconds, the window will be able to be opened by holding the switch down until it is fully

2-34

Black plate (139,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

opened. The AUTO function will not operate. The window can be raised by pulling up on the switch several times until the window is fully closed. To reset to normal operation, initialize the power window to reactivate the one-touch auto up/down function. Re- fer to Initialization of power window F2-38.

For some models, this switch is also equipped with a one-touch auto up feature that allows the window to be closed fully without holding the switch. Press the switch up until it clicks and release it, and the window will fully close. To stop the window halfway, push the switch down lightly.

NOTE If the vehicles battery is disconnected due to situations such as battery or fuse replacement, the one-touch auto up/down function will be deactivated. Initialize the power window to reacti- vate the one-touch auto up/down func- tion. Refer to Initialization of power window F2-38.

! Anti-entrapment function

CAUTION

. Never attempt to test this func- tion using fingers, hands or other parts of your body.

. The anti-entrapment function may not operate properly if some object gets trapped just before the window fully closes.

NOTE . If a window detects an impact simi- lar to that caused by trapping an object (for example, when the vehicle encoun- ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap- ment function may operate. . The window cannot be operated for a few seconds after the anti-entrap- ment function operates. . If the vehicles battery is discon- nected due to situations such as battery or fuse replacement, the anti- entrapment function will be deacti- vated. Initialize the power window to reactivate the anti-entrapment function. Refer to Initialization of power win- dow F2-38.

While closing the drivers or front passen- gers window automatically, if the window

detects a substantial enough object trapped between the window and the window frame, it automatically moves down slightly and stops.

! Operating the rear passengers windows

To open: Push the appropriate switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close: Pull the switch up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.

Keys and doors/Windows

CONTINUED

2-35

2

Black plate (140,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Windows

! Locking the passengers windows

1) Lock 2) Unlock

To lock: Press the lock switch. When the lock switch is in the lock position, the passen- gers windows cannot be opened or closed. To unlock: Press the lock switch again.

& Power window operation by passengers

! Passengers side power window switches

Each passenger window can be controlled by the power window switch located on the door.

! Operating the front passengers window

1) Automatically open/close (if equipped) 2) Open/close

To open: Press the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long as the switch is held.

2-36

Black plate (141,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

NOTE If you continue to hold the AUTO switch in the down position after the window has been fully opened, the circuit breaker may activate for a short time and the window may not operate. Allow several seconds for the system to reset without touching the switch, and the window will begin to operate normally on its own.

For some models, this switch is also equipped with a one-touch auto down feature that allows the window to be opened fully without holding the switch. Press the switch down until it clicks and release it, and the window will fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up lightly.

To close: Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as the switch is held.

NOTE If you continue to hold the AUTO switch in the up position after the window has fully closed, the circuit breaker may open and the system may not operate. After several seconds, the window will be able to be opened by holding the switch down until it is fully

opened. The AUTO function will not operate. The window can be raised by pulling up on the switch several times until the window is fully closed. To reset to normal operation, initialize the power window to reactivate the one-touch auto up/down function. Re- fer to Initialization of power window F2-38.

For some models, this switch is also equipped with a one-touch auto up feature that allows the window to be closed fully without holding the switch. Press the switch up until it clicks and release it, and the window will fully close. To stop the window halfway, push the switch down lightly.

NOTE If the vehicles battery is disconnected due to situations such as battery or fuse replacement, the one-touch auto up/down function will be deactivated. Initialize the power window to reacti- vate the one-touch auto up/down func- tion. Refer to Initialization of power window F2-38.

! Anti-entrapment function

Refer to Anti-entrapment function F2- 35.

! Operating the rear passengers windows

To open: Press the switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close: Pull the switch up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.

When the lock switch on the power window switch cluster, located on the drivers side door, is in the lock position, the passengers windows cannot be oper- ated with the passengers switches.

Keys and doors/Windows

CONTINUED

2-37

2

Black plate (142,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Rear gate

& Initialization of power win- dow

If the vehicles battery is disconnected due to situations such as battery or fuse replacement, the following functions will be deactivated. . One-touch auto up/down function . Anti-entrapment function

Initialize the power window using the following procedure to reactivate these functions. 1. Close the drivers door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Open the drivers side window halfway by pushing down the power window switch. 4. Pull up the power window switch and close the window completely. Continue pulling up the switch for approximately 1 second after the window is closed com- pletely. 5. Open the drivers side window com- pletely by fully pushing down the power windows switch.

Rear gate

& Manual rear gate (if equipped)

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using any of the following systems. . Power door locking switch: Refer to Power door locking switches F2-8. . Keyless access with the push-button start system (if equipped): Refer to Key- less access with push-button start system F2-9. . Remote keyless entry system: Refer to Remote keyless entry system F2-21.

To open:

Rear gate opener button

1. Unlock the rear gate.

2. Press and hold the rear gate opener button. The rear gate will open slightly. 3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.

NOTE If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due to a discharged vehicle battery, a malfunction in the door locking/unlock- ing system or other causes, you can unlock it by manually operating the rear gate lock release lever. For the procedure, refer to Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be opened F9-18.

To close:

Lower the rear gate slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull it down holding the recessed grip.

2-38

Black plate (143,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, always keep the rear gate closed while driving.

. Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the recessed grip. Also avoid closing the rear gate by pulling on the recessed grip from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand being caught and injured.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo. That could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head or face on the rear gate when open- ing or closing the rear gate and when loading or unloading car- go.

& Power rear gate (if equipped)

WARNING

. When opening the rear gate, make sure there are no people around it. If the rear gate, by any chance, should hit a part of the body, this may result in an injury.

. When closing the rear gate, be extremely careful to prevent any- ones fingers, arms, neck, head or other objects from being caught in the rear gate. Other- wise, serious personal injury may be caused by entrapment.

. If either of the operating condi- tions has not been satisfied while operating the power rear gate, an electronic chirp will sound and the power rear gate will be deac- tivated. In this case, the rear gate may open or close suddenly. Be careful to prevent anyones body or any objects from being hit against the rear gate or being caught in the rear gate.

. After opening the rear gate on a slope by using the power rear gate feature, the rear gate may close. Make sure that the rear gate has stopped completely

after opening it.

. Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety rea- sons and never allow an unat- tended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power rear gate.

. The driver should be aware of and pay careful attention to his/ her responsibilities.

. The power rear gate button should only be used to open and close the rear gate when the area around the rear gate is clearly visible and when you have checked that there is no danger of people being caught in the gate.

CAUTION

When closing the rear gate after opening it by using the memory function, make sure to use the power rear gate. If you close the rear gate manually with extra force, the power rear gate may be da- maged.

Keys and doors/Rear gate

CONTINUED

2-39

2

Black plate (144,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Rear gate

The power rear gate operates only when all of the following conditions are satisfied. . The vehicle is stopped completely. . The outside temperature is within a range from 228F to 1588F (from 308C to 708C). . The ignition switch is in the LOCK/ OFF or ACC position. Or, the ignition switch is in the ON position and the parking brake is applied (MT models)/the select lever is in the P position (CVT models).

NOTE . If the button is pressed repeatedly while the power rear gate is operating, the system may ignore the button operation in order to avoid being damaged. Do not press the button unnecessarily. . It is not possible to stop the rear gate temporarily while opening be- tween the completely closed position and approximately 12 in (30 cm) open. If you press one of the power rear gate buttons briefly during this range, the rear gate will be closed. . If the vehicle starts to move while the power rear gate is operating, the system sounds a buzzer and closes the rear gate automatically. At this time, if the system detects jamming, it will

deactivate the power rear gate and the rear gate will not be closed. If this occurs, close the rear gate via regular procedures. . If you try to open the rear gate using the power rear gate function immedi- ately after closing the rear gate using the power rear gate function, an elec- tronic chirp will sound and the rear gate will not open. Wait for a while before trying to open the rear gate via the power rear gate function. If you wish to open it right away, it can be opened manually.

! Operation by the button on the instrument panel

Power rear gate button

To open the rear gate: Press and hold the power rear gate button when the rear gate is closed. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. The rear gate will open automatically.

To stop the rear gate midway: Briefly press the power rear gate button while the rear gate is being opened. Then the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If the button is pressed again, the rear gate will close. If the button is briefly pressed while the gate is closed, the rear gate can be opened. However, the rear gate cannot be stopped again while it is

2-40

Black plate (145,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

opening.

To close the rear gate: Press and hold the power rear gate button. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If the button is briefly pressed again, the rear gate will open. However, you cannot stop the rear gate midway even if you press the button again.

! Operation by the button on the access key/transmitter

Power rear gate button (models with access key)

Power rear gate button (models with transmitter)

To open the rear gate: Press and hold the power rear gate button when the rear gate is closed. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. The rear gate will open automatically.

To stop the rear gate midway: Briefly press the power rear gate button while the rear gate is being opened. Then the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If the button is pressed again, the rear gate will close. If the button is briefly pressed while the gate is closed, the rear gate can be opened. However, the rear gate cannot be stopped again while it is opening.

To close the rear gate: Press and hold the power rear gate button. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If the button is briefly pressed again, the rear gate will open. However, you cannot stop the rear gate midway even if you press the button again.

! Operation by the buttons on the rear gate

Rear gate opener button

Keys and doors/Rear gate

CONTINUED

2-41

2

Black plate (146,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Rear gate

Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

To open the rear gate: Briefly press the rear gate opener button when the rear gate is closed. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. The rear gate will open automatically.

To stop the rear gate midway: Briefly press the opener button / power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate while the rear gate is being opened. Then the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If the button is pressed again, the rear gate will close. If the button is briefly pressed while the gate is closed, the rear gate can be opened. However, the rear gate cannot be stopped again while it is opening.

To close the rear gate: Briefly press the power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. The rear gate will close automatically. If the button is briefly pressed again, the rear gate will open. However, you cannot stop the rear gate midway even if you press the button again.

NOTE When the rear gate was fully open, the power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate will only function.

! Manual operation

The power rear gate can open and close manually. Refer to Manual rear gate F2- 38.

NOTE In the following cases, the power rear gate cannot be opened or closed manually. . The power rear gate is stopped midway. . The memory switch is ON and the power rear gate is stopped at the set height.

! Memory function

Memory switch (except Canada-spec. models)

Memory switch (Canada-spec. models)

2-42

Black plate (147,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Memory switch status 1) ON status 2) OFF status

Your desired rear gate height can be registered. Registration of the rear gate height: To register the rear gate height, perform the following procedures while the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position. 1. Press the memory switch to select the ON status.

Rear gate opener button

2. Press and hold the rear gate opener button located above the license plate. After the latch releases, let go of the button and raise the rear gate to the desired height manually.

Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

3. With the rear gate at the desired height, press and hold the power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate until an electronic chirp is heard and the hazard warning flashers flash three times. The electronic chirp and the flash- ing hazard warning flashers confirm the selected rear gate height has been regis- tered. 4. Close the rear gate manually (without using the power rear gate).

NOTE . To change the registered height, perform the registering procedure again. . It is possible to register the height

Keys and doors/Rear gate

CONTINUED

2-43

2

Black plate (148,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Rear gate

from approximately 12 in (30 cm) or more from the completely closed posi- tion. . Before closing the rear gate in step 4, it is possible to register the height many times through step 3. Therefore, the registered height can easily be fine- tuned.

Retrieval of the rear gate height: To open the rear gate and stop it at the registered height, perform the following procedure. 1. Press the memory switch to select the ON status. 2. Press and hold any of the power rear gate switches.

Even if any of the power rear gate switches are pressed and held while the memory switch is in the OFF status, you can stop it at the registered height by pressing the memory switch to select the ON status before the rear gate reaches the registered height.

NOTE . The rear gate will open to the position that is stored in the memory function even if the rear gate is opened by the reverse function. . If the rear gate is opened manually while the memory function is activated,

you cannot close it by pressing the power rear gate button on the rear gate. To close it, press the other power rear gate button or close it manually.

! Reverse function

WARNING

. Do not let parts of your body be caught intentionally to operate the reverse function. If the re- verse function does not operate for some reason, this may lead to serious injury or accidents.

. The reverse function may not operate if foreign objects are caught in the rear gate just before it closes completely. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other body parts.

. The reverse function may not operate depending on the object shape and the manner in which it was caught. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other body parts.

CAUTION

. If the reverse function is operated 3 times consecutively, automatic opening and closing of the power rear gate function will be can- celed and the rear gate can be opened and closed normally. Whether the rear gate opens or closes depends on the rear gate height when automatic operation is ceased. Be careful that the rear gate does not hit anyones head or face, etc. and that fingers and baggage, etc. are not caught in it.

. Take care not to damage the touch sensors. Otherwise, the reverse function may cease to operate.

If, while opening or closing using power rear gate, the rear gate catches persons or baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate will operate as follows.

When opening the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically close.

When closing the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically open.

2-44

Black plate (149,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

1) Touch sensor

Touch sensors are attached on the left and right edges of the rear gate. If the touch sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc. while closing by the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3 times and the rear gate will open auto- matically.

NOTE When the rear gate is opened using the reverse function, it will be opened fully or to the height registered in the memory function.

! Rear gate drop prevention function

If, while fully opened via the power rear gate function, the rear gate is lowered by the weight of snow and such, an electronic chirp will sound and the rear gate will close automatically.

NOTE . If there is snow on the rear gate, only use the power rear gate function after removing the snow. . If you close the rear gate manually just after the rear gate is fully opened using the power rear gate function, the rear gate drop prevention function will operate to close the rear gate automa- tically. In this case, this is not a malfunction.

Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

Never let anyones hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if any of the follow- ing conditions occur.

. The vehicle stops suddenly.

. The vehicle turns sharply.

. The vehicle is involved in an accident.

. Body parts protruding from the vehicle are struck by outside objects.

To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always con- form to the following instructions without exception.

. Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no ones hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moonroof.

. Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety rea- sons and never allow an unat- tended child to remain in the

Keys and doors/Moonroof

CONTINUED

2-45

2

Black plate (150,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Keys and doors/Moonroof

vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moon- roof.

. Never try to check the anti-en- trapment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold conditions have caused it to freeze shut.

. Do not touch the moving parts of the moonroof while the moonroof is operating.

. If the moonroof does not close, we recommend that you have the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

& Moonroof switch

1) OPEN/CLOSE switch 2) Open 3) Close

To open the moonroof: Press the rear side of the OPEN/CLOSE switch. The sun shade will also be opened together with the moonroof. The moonroof will stop at a position approximately 8 in (20 cm) away from the fully opened position. Slide the switch rearward again to open the moonroof completely.

To close the moonroof: Press the front side of the OPEN/CLOSE switch. To stop the moonroof at a selected mid- way position while opening or closing it, momentarily push the switch to the

OPEN side or CLOSE side.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to prevent drops of water from falling into the passenger compartment.

NOTE Driving with the moonroof fully open can cause an annoying sound to be generated at high speeds. If this oc- curs, use the moonroof at the initial stop position of 8 in (20 cm) away from the fully opened position.

& Anti-entrapment function When the moonroof senses a substantial enough object trapped between its glass and the vehicles roof during closure, it automatically moves back to the fully open position and stops there. The anti-entrap- ment function may also be activated by a strong shock on the moonroof even when there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function using fingers, hands or other parts of your body.

2-46

Black plate (151,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

NOTE For the sake of safety, it is recom- mended that you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened.

& Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed. If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves back.

Keys and doors/Moonroof 2-47

2

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22 Left Page

Black plate (5,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Ignition switch (models without push- button start system)......................................... 3-4 LOCK.................................................................. 3-4 ACC.................................................................... 3-5 ON...................................................................... 3-5 START ................................................................ 3-5 Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5 Ignition switch light (if equipped) ......................... 3-6

Push-button ignition switch (models with push-button start system) ............................... 3-6 Safety precautions .............................................. 3-6 Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-6 Switching power status ....................................... 3-7 When access key does not operate properly ........ 3-8

Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-8 Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-9

Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-9 Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle movement upon turning on the ignition switch............................................................... 3-9

Speedometer...................................................... 3-10 Odometer........................................................... 3-10 Double trip meter ............................................... 3-10 Tachometer ........................................................ 3-11 Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-12 ECO gauge (if equipped) .................................... 3-12

Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-13 Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-14 SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15 Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators......................................................... 3-16

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light .................................................. 3-16

Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant temperature high warning light......................... 3-17

Charge warning light.......................................... 3-18 Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-18 Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 3-18 Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-19 AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ........... 3-19 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models) ........................................................... 3-19

ABS warning light.............................................. 3-21 Brake system warning light................................ 3-21 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-22 Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-23

Door open warning light .................................... 3-23 All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models)........ 3-23 Power steering warning light.............................. 3-23 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-24

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-25 Warning chimes and warning light of the keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped) ........................................................ 3-25

Security indicator light....................................... 3-30 SI-DRIVE indicator light (if equipped).................. 3-31 Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT models) ........................................................... 3-31

Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-32 High beam indicator light ................................... 3-32 High beam assist indicator light (if equipped) ..... 3-32

Instruments and controls

3

Black plate (6,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls

Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-32 Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)......................................................... 3-32

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (if equipped)......................................................... 3-32

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/ Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light (if equipped) ............................................. 3-33

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-33 Headlight indicator light (if equipped) ................. 3-33 X-mode indicator light (if equipped) .................... 3-33 Hill descent control indicator light (if equipped)......................................................... 3-33

Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator/ Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator (if equipped)......................................................... 3-33

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) .......... 3-33 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ................ 3-34 RAB warning light (if equipped) .......................... 3-34 RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped).................. 3-34

Information display (Mexico-spec. models)...... 3-34 Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-34 Driving information display................................. 3-35 Clock ................................................................. 3-38

Multi information display (models with type B combination meter) ..................................... 3-39 Basic operation.................................................. 3-40 Welcome screen and Good-bye screen ............... 3-40 Warning screen .................................................. 3-41 Basic screens .................................................... 3-41 Menu screens .................................................... 3-42

Multi function display (if equipped).................. 3-44 Basic operation ................................................. 3-45 Welcome screen ................................................ 3-45 Ending screen ................................................... 3-46 Self-check screen .............................................. 3-46 Interruption screen ............................................ 3-48 Basic screens.................................................... 3-48 Selection screen ................................................ 3-56 Date and time settings ....................................... 3-59 Image quality and volume settings ..................... 3-66 Screen settings.................................................. 3-68 Maintenance settings ......................................... 3-76 Driving history registration................................. 3-79 Car settings....................................................... 3-80 Initialize............................................................. 3-90

Light control switch........................................... 3-93 Headlights ......................................................... 3-93 High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-95 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-98 Daytime running light system............................. 3-98

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) (if equipped) ........................................................ 3-99 SRH OFF switch ................................................ 3-99

Turn signal lever .............................................. 3-100 One-touch lane changer................................... 3-101

Illumination brightness control....................... 3-101 Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ............. 3-102

Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights) ............................................. 3-102

Black plate (7,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls

Fog light switch (if equipped) ......................... 3-102 Steering responsive fog lights system (if equipped)....................................................... 3-103

Wiper and washer ............................................ 3-104 Windshield wiper and washer switches............. 3-105 Rear window wiper and washer switch.............. 3-106

Mirrors............................................................... 3-107 Inside mirror .................................................... 3-107 Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)...... 3-108

Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink

(if equipped) .................................................. 3-109 Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-115

Defogger and deicer ........................................ 3-116 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ......................... 3-118 Horn.................................................................. 3-118 Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) ...................................................... 3-119

Black plate (156,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without pushbutton start system)

Ignition switch (models with- out push-button start sys- tem)

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steer- ing wheel, preventing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes a much great- er effort than usual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al- ways remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or others. Children could operate the power windows, the moon- roof or other controls or even make the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it banged against your knees or hands while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the ON posi- tion to the ACC or LOCK posi- tion, thereby stopping the engine. Also, if the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on it as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted turning of the ignition switch.

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE . Keep the ignition switch in the LOCK position when the engine is not running. . Using electrical accessories for a long time with the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position can cause the battery to go dead. . If the ignition switch will not move from the LOCK position to the ACC position, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you turn the ignition switch.

& LOCK The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key. If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel slightly to the right and left as you turn the key.

3-4

Black plate (157,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

The key can be turned from the ACC to LOCK position only when the select lever is in the P position (CVT models) and the key is pushed in while turning it (all models).

& ACC In this position the electrical accessories (audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can be used.

& ON This is the normal operating position after the engine is started.

& START The engine is started in this position. The starter cranks the engine to start it. When

the key is released (after the engine has started), the key automatically returns to the ON position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position while the engine is running.

If your registered key fails to start the engine, pull out the key once (the security indicator light will blink), and then insert the key in the ignition switch and turn it to the START position and again try to start the engine.

NOTE The engine may not start in the follow- ing cases:

. The key grip is touching another key or a metallic key holder.

. The key is near another key that contains an immobilizer transponder. . The key is near or touching another transmitter.

& Key reminder chime The reminder chime sounds when the drivers door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC position.

The chime stops under the following conditions. . when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position . when the key is removed from the ignition switch . when the drivers door is closed

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without pushbutton start system)

CONTINUED

3-5

3

Black plate (158,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Pushbutton ignition switch (models with pushbutton start system)

& Ignition switch light (if equipped)

For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the ignition switch light illumi- nates when the drivers door is opened or when the drivers door is unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for several tens of seconds and then gradually turns off under the following conditions. . when the drivers door is closed . when the doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter

The light turns off immediately under the following conditions. . when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position . when all doors and the rear gate are locked using the remote keyless entry transmitter

Push-button ignition switch (models with push-button start system)

& Safety precautions Refer to Safety precautions F2-10.

& Operating range for push- button start system

1) Antenna 2) Operating range

NOTE . If the access key is not detected within the operating range of the an- tennas inside the vehicle, the push- button ignition switch and the engine start cannot be operated.

. Even when the access key is outside the vehicle, if it is placed too close to the glass, it may be possible to switch the power or to start the engine. . Do not leave the access key in the following places. It may become im- possible to operate the push-button ignition switch and the engine start.

On the instrument panel On the floor Inside the glove box Inside the door trim pocket On the rear seat At the corner of the cargo area

. When operating the push-button ignition switch or starting the engine, if the access key battery is discharged, perform the procedure described in Access key if access key does not operate properly F9-17. In such a case, replace the battery immediately. Refer to Replacing battery of access key F11-45.

3-6

Black plate (159,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Switching power status

1) Operation indicator 2) Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the push-button ignition switch is pressed. 1. Carry the access key, and sit in the drivers seat. 2. Shift the select lever into the P position. 3. Press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal. Every time the button is pressed, the power is switched in the sequence of OFF, ACC, ON and OFF. When the engine is stopped and the push-button ignition switch is in ACC or ON, the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch illuminates in orange.

Power status Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off Power is turned off.

ACC Orange

The following systems can be

used: audio and ac- cessory power

outlet.

ON

Orange (while engine is

stopped) All electrical systems can be

used.Turned off (while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. When the push-button ignition switch is left in ON or ACC for a long time, it may result in vehicle battery discharge.

. Do not spill drinks or other liquids on the push-button igni- tion switch. It may cause a mal- function.

. Do not touch the push-button ignition switch with a hand soiled with oil or other contaminants. It may cause a malfunction.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop the opera t ion . Contac t a SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If the push-button ignition switch does not illuminate even when the instrument panel illumination is turned on, have the vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot sun for a long time, the surface of the push-button ignition switch may get hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTE . When operating the push-button ignition switch, firmly press it all the way. . If the push-button ignition switch is pressed quickly, the power may not turn on or off. . If the indicator light on the push- button ignition switch flashes in green when the push-button ignition switch is pressed, steering is locked. When this occurs, press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

Instruments and controls/Pushbutton ignition switch (models with pushbutton start system)

CONTINUED

3-7

3

Black plate (160,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher

! Battery drainage prevention func- tion

When the push-button ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON position for approximately 1 hour, the push-button ignition switch will be automatically switched to OFF to prevent the battery from going dead. This function is activated when the select lever is in the P position.

& When access key does not operate properly

Refer to Access key if access key does not operate properly F9-17.

Hazard warning flasher

1) Models with multi function display 2) Models without multi function display

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works regard- less of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning button on the instrument panel. All the turn signal lights and the turn signal indicator lights will flash. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.

NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.

3-8

Black plate (161,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Meters and gauges

NOTE

Some of the meters and gauges on the combination meter use liquid-crystal displays. You will find their indications hard to see if you wear polarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina- tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, various parts of the combi- nation meter will illuminate in the following sequence.

1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter needles, gauge needles and liquid crystal display illuminate. 2. Meter and gauge indications each show MAX position. 3. Meter and gauge indications each show MIN position. 4. Regular illumination (for driving) be- gins.

& Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle move- ment upon turning on the ignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate the movement of the meter needles and gauge needles that takes place when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. To change the setting, perform the following procedure.

! Type A combination meter

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF or ACC position.

1) Trip knob

2. Press the trip knob to show or on the trip meter display.

The display can be switched as shown in the following sequence by pressing the trip knob.

*: They cannot be displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

To change the current setting, press the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated : Deactivated

NOTE . Your vehicles initial movement setting of the meter/gauge needles has been set for activation at the time of shipment from the factory. . It is not possible to change the initial movement setting of the meter/gauge needles when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Change the setting when the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position.

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

CONTINUED

3-9

3

Black plate (162,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

! Type B combination meter

Perform the procedures described in Gauge Initial Movement F3-43.

& Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.

& Odometer

Odometer (type A)

Odometer (type B) 1) Trip knob

This meter displays the odometer when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds of illumination of the od- ometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn off. Also, if you open and close the drivers door within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn off.

& Double trip meter

Double trip meter (type A)

Double trip meter (type B) 1) Trip knob

This meter displays the two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the ON

3-10

Black plate (163,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

position. The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is possible to switch between the A trip meter and B trip meter indications while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/ trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn off. Also, if you open and close the drivers door within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn off.

The display can be switched as shown in the following sequence by pressing the trip knob.

*: They cannot be displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob and keep the knob pressed for more than 2 seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.

NOTE If the connection between the combina- tion meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data recorded on the trip meter will be lost.

& Tachometer The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine when the pointer of the tachometer is in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine

speed is reduced below the red zone.

NOTE To protect the engine/transmission while the select lever is in the P or N position (CVT models) or the shift lever is in the neutral position (MT models), the engine is controlled so that the engine speed may not become too high even if the accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

CONTINUED

3-11

3

Black plate (164,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

& Fuel gauge

Fuel gauge (type A)

Fuel gauge (type B) 1) Trip knob

The fuel gauge is displayed when the ignition is in the ON position, and it

shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge indication may change slightly during braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel level movement in the tank.

If you press the trip knob while the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. If, while the fuel gauge is indicating the amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the drivers door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off.

NOTE You will see the sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle.

& ECO gauge (if equipped)

The ECO gauge shows the difference between the current rate of fuel consump- tion and the average rate of fuel consump- tion since the trip meter was last reset.

If the needle of the gauge moves towards the right side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.

NOTE . The ECO gauge shows only an approximate indication of fuel effi- ciency. . After resetting the trip meter, the average rate of fuel consumption is not shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km). Before that time, the ECO gauge does not operate.

3-12

Black plate (165,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights illuminate when the ignition switch is initially turned to the ON position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. For the system check, several of the following lights illuminate and then turn off after several seconds or after the engine has started.

: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the driver fastens the seatbelt.)

: Front passengers seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the front seat passenger fastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator light

/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- function indicator light

: Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant temperature high warn- ing light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: Engine low oil level warning light*

: Windshield washer fluid warning light*

: AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models)

: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)

/ : ABS warning light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Low fuel warning light

: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light

: Door open warning light

: AWD warning light (CVT models)

: Power steering warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- tion indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica- tor light

: Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)

: Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)

: Headlight indicator light (if equipped)

: Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (if equipped)

: Steering Responsive Headlight warn- ing light/Steering Responsive Head- light OFF indicator light (if equipped)*

: High beam assist indicator light (if equipped)

: Access key warning light (if equipped)

: X-mode indicator light (if equipped)

: Hill descent control indicator light (if equipped)*

*: Applies to models with type A combina- tion meter.

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system. Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-13

3

Black plate (166,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& Seatbelt warning light and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the drivers and front passengers seat, as required by current safety standards. With the ignition switch turned to the ON position, this device reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat- belts by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the following illustration and sounding a chime.

Drivers warning light (type A)

Drivers warning light (type B)

Front passengers warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/ has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- vers seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also sound simultaneously.

NOTE . If the drivers and/or front passen- gers seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened 6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning device operates as follows according to the vehicle speed.

At speeds lower than approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between steady illumination and flashing at 15-second intervals. The chime will not sound. At speeds higher than approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light(s) is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

3-14

Black plate (167,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

operation that follows the 6-second warning after turning ON the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is turned ON next time, however, the complete sequence of the warning operation resumes. For further details about canceling the warning operation, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front passengers seat, the seatbelt warning device for the front passengers seat will be deactivated. The front passengers occupant detection system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passengers seat. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the device from functioning correctly or cause the device to fail. . Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback. . Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket. . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passengers seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback. . Do not use front seats with their back- ward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to Front seats F1-2.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front passengers seat does not function cor- rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the front passengers seat is empty or it is deactivated even when the front passen- ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions. . Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system and its child occupant, although we strongly recommend that all children sit in the rear seat properly restrained. . Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket. . Ensure that the backward-forward po- sition and seatback of front passengers seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning device for front passengers seat does not function cor- rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- tions described above, immediately con- tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- tion.

& SRS airbag system warning light

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system. Immediately take your vehi- cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn- ing light

. No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position

. Continuous illumination of the warning light

. Illumination of the warning light while driving

For more details about the SRS airbag system warning light, refer to SRS airbag system monitors F1-69.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-15

3

Black plate (168,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indica- tors

ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator

The front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag. The indicators are located next to the clock in the center portion of the dash- board. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- vanced frontal airbag system monitoring. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passengers frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain off. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is deactivated, the passengers frontal airbag ON indicator will remain off while the OFF indicator will illuminate. With the ignition switch turned to the ON position, if both the ON and OFF indica- tors remain illuminated or off simulta- neously even after the system check period, the system is malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- ately for an inspection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn- ing light/Malfunction in- dicator light

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi- nates while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle opera- tion without having the emission

control system checked and re- paired as necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your vehicles warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is a problem or potential problem somewhere in the emission con- trol system.

! If the light illuminates steadily

If the light illuminates steadily while driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, an emission control system malfunction has been detected. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- ately.

NOTE This light also illuminates when the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminating could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light

3-16

Black plate (169,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does not turn off, take your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking

If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has been de- tected which may damage the emission control system. To prevent serious damage to the emis- sion control system, you should do the following. . Reduce vehicle speed. . Avoid hard acceleration. . Avoid steep uphill grades. . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- ble. . If towing a trailer, stop doing so as soon as possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Coolant temperature low indicator light/Cool- ant temperature high warning light

CAUTION

. After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, if this indicator light/warning light be- haves in any of the following ways, the electrical system may be malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.

It remains blinking in RED.

It remains illuminated in RED for more than 2 seconds.

It remains blinking in RED and BLUE alternately.

. While driving, if this indicator light/warning light behaves in any of the following ways, take the specified appropriate mea- sure listed below.

Blinking or illuminated in RED: Safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and refer to the emergency steps to take in the case of engine

overheating. After that, have the system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer. Refer to Engine overheating F9- 12.

Blinking in RED and BLUE alternately: The electrical system may be malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- tion.

This coolant temperature low indicator light/coolant temperature high warning light has the following three functions. . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- cient warming up of the engine . Blinking in RED indicates that the engine is close to overheating . Illumination in RED indicates overheat- ing condition of the engine

For a system check, this indicator light/ warning light illuminates in RED for approximately 2 seconds when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ON position. After that, this indicator light/warning light changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light turns off when the engine is warmed up sufficiently.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-17

3

Black plate (170,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

If the engine coolant temperature in- creases over the specified range, the indicator light/warning light blinks in RED. At this time, the engine is close to overheating.

If the engine coolant temperature in- creases further, the indicator light/warning light illuminates in RED continuously. At this time, the engine may be overheating.

When the indicator light/warning light blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and refer to the emergency steps to take in the case of engine overheating. Refer to Engine overheating F9-12. After that, have the system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Also, if the indicator light/warning light often blinks in RED, the electrical system may be malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE If the engine is restarted after a certain driving condition, this indicator light/ warning light may illuminate in RED. However, this is not a malfunction if the indicator light/warning light turns off after a short time.

& Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the light remains illuminated, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Oil pressure warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working properly. If the light illuminates while driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine oil level. If the oil level is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at the proper level but the light remains i l luminated, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately. For details about checking the engine oil level or adding the engine oil, refer to Engine oil F11-10.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light illumi- nated. This may cause serious en- gine damage.

& Engine low oil level warning light

This light illuminates when the engine oil level decreases to the lower limit.

If the engine low oil level warning light illuminates while driving, park the vehicle in a safe and level location, and then check the engine oil level. When the engine oil level is not within the normal range, refill with engine oil. Refer to Engine oil F11-10. If the warning light does not turn off after refilling the engine oil, or the warning light illuminates even though the engine oil level is within the normal range, have the vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE . After replacing or adding the engine oil, if the engine oil level is within the normal range when restarting the en- gine on a level surface, the warning light will turn off.

3-18

Black plate (171,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

. The warning light may illuminate temporarily in the following conditions because a low oil level may be detected as a result of significant oil movement in the engine.

when the vehicle is considerably inclined on an uphill or steep slope when the vehicle has continu- ously accelerated and decelerated when the vehicle is continuously turned when the vehicle is driven on a road that alternates continuously between uphill and downhill

& Windshield washer fluid warning light

This light illuminates when the fluid level in the windshield washer fluid tank de- creases to the lower limit (approximately 1.1 US qt, 1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt).

& AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models)

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the transmis- sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im- mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

! Transmission control system warn- ing

If the AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes after the engine has started, it may indicate that the transmission control system is not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

& Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the low tire pressure warn- ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 seconds to check that the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning properly. If there is no problem and all tires are properly inflated, the light will turn off. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufac- turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-19

3

Black plate (172,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of re- placement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Should the warning light illuminate stea- dily after blinking for approximately one minute, have the system inspected by your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned ON or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approxi- mately one minute, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu- ally reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pres- sure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the Low tire pres- sure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approxi- mately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/ or system resetting.

If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one min- ute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked peri- odically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. After any change to tire pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- itoring system will not re-check tire inflation pressures until the vehicle is first driven more than 25 mph (40 km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- sures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- tion pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later. Therefore, be sure to install the specified size for the front and rear tires.

3-20

Black plate (173,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& ABS warning light

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions occur, we recommend that you have the ABS repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.

The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, but it does not turn off even when the vehicle speed ex- ceeds approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

The warning light illuminates during driving.

. When the warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the ABS function shuts down. However, the conventional brake system continues to oper- ate normally.

The ABS warning light illuminates to- gether with the brake system warning light

if the EBD system malfunctions. For further details of the EBD system mal- function warning, refer to Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning F3-22.

NOTE If the warning light behavior is as described in the following conditions, the ABS may be considered normal. . The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and turns off approxi- mately 2 seconds after the engine has started. . The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turns off immediately, remaining off. . The warning light remains illumi- nated after the engine has been started, but it turns off when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). . The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediately and remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may illumi- nate. This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will turn off.

& Brake system warning light

The light illuminates with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the ON position. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains illuminated, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating prop- erly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for re- pair.

The brake system warning light has the following functions.

! Brake fluid level warning

This light illuminates when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the MIN level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-21

3

Black plate (174,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

switch in the ON position and with the parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should illuminate while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in ON), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning

The brake system warning light also illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the EBD system. In that event, it illuminates together with the ABS warning light. The EBD system may be malfunctioning if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driving. Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- tional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied harder than usual and the vehi- cles motion may therefore become some- what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously, take the following steps. 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat location. 2. Shut down the engine, apply the parking brake and then restart it. 3. Release the parking brake. Even if both warning lights turn off, the EBD system may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected. 4. If both warning lights illuminate again and remain illuminated after the engine has been restarted, shut down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and check the brake fluid level. 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark, the EBD system may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected. 6. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

! Vacuum pump system warning (turbo models)

This light illuminates when a malfunction is detected in the vacuum pump system.

NOTE The vacuum pump system assists the boost pressure when driving at high altitudes while the engine is cold.

& Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light illuminates when the tank is nearly empty, at approxi- mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when- ever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine.

NOTE This light does not turn off unless the tank is replenished up to an internal fuel quantity of approximately 4.5 US gal (17 liters, 3.7 Imp gal).

3-22

Black plate (175,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light

! Hill start assist warning light

While the engine is running, if there are any malfunctions in the Hill start assist system, the warning light will illuminate.

WARNING

When the Hill start assist warning light illuminates, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized SUBARU dealer.

! Hill start assist OFF indicator light

While the Hill start assist system is deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF indicator light illuminates continuously to inform the driver that the Hill start assist system is not operational.

& Door open warning light

The warning light illuminates if any door or the rear gate is not fully closed. This function is effective even if the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, or the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

Always make sure this light is not illumi- nated before you start to drive.

& All-Wheel Drive warn- ing light (CVT models)

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of differing diameters fitted on the wheels or with an excessively low air pressure in any of the tires.

WARNING

If the AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a safe location then check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost air pressure for some other reason. Continuing to drive with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage.

& Power steering warn- ing light

This warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and turns off after the engine has started. This indicates that the warn- ing system is working properly.

While the engine is running, this warning light illuminates when a malfunction has been detected in the electric power steer- ing system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immedi- ately.

NOTE If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the con- trol computer and drive motor, from overheating. . The steering wheel is operated fre- quently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turn- ing the steering wheel during parallel parking. . The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-23

3

Black plate (176,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

At this time, there will be more resis- tance when steering. However this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering wheel is not operated for a while and the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power steering is operated in a non-standard way which causes power assist limitation to occur too fre- quently, that may result in a malfunc- tion of the power steering control system.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol operation indicator light

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem provides its ABS control through the electrical circuit of the ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to

provide ABS control. As a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system also becomes inoperative, causing the warning light to illuminate. Although both the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and ABS are inop- erative in this case, the ordinary functions of the brake system are still available. You will be safe while driving with this condition, but drive carefully and have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system itself mal- functions, the warning light only illumi- nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) remains fully opera- tional. . The warning light illuminates when the electronic control system of the ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunctions.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably inoperative under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- ately. . The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. . The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.

NOTE If the warning light behavior is as described in the following examples, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal. . The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and turns off approxi- mately 2 seconds after the engine has started. . The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turns off immediately, remaining off. . The warning light illuminates after the engine has started and turns off while the vehicle is subsequently being driven. . The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediately and remains off. . The warning light illuminates when the engine has stalled and continues to illuminate after the engine has been restarted. However, it will turn off once the vehicle starts moving.

3-24

Black plate (177,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- tion indicator light

The indicator light flashes during activa- tion of the skid suppression function and during activation of the traction control function.

NOTE . The light may remain illuminated for a short period of time after the engine has been started, especially in cold weather. This does not indicate the existence of a problem. The light should turn off as soon as the engine has warmed up. . The indicator light illuminates when the engine has developed a problem and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under the follow- ing condition. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . The light does not turn off even after the lapse of several minutes (the engine has warmed up) after the engine has started.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

The light illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- ately. . The light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. . The light does not turn off even once several seconds have elapsed after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position.

& Warning chimes and warning light of the keyless access with push-button start sys- tem (if equipped)

Access key warning light (type A)

Access key warning light (type B)

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-25

3

Black plate (178,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

The keyless access with push-button start system sounds a warning chime and flashes the access key warning light on the combination meter in order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft. When the warning chime sounds and/or the warning light flashes, take the appro- priate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indi- cator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in green when starting the engine. This indicates the status that the steering wheel is not released and could result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine again after the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green, if the operation indicator is still flashing in green, there could be a steering lock malfunct ion. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos- sible.

. When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in orange, contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE . Even when the access key is within the operating ranges inside the vehicle, the access key warning for engine start may be provided depending on the status of the access key and the environmental conditions. . When the access key is taken out of the vehicle through an open window, the access key takeout warning or passenger access key takeout warning will not be provided.

! List of warnings

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings occurs even if the access key warn- ing light does not illuminate, take the appropriate action.

3-26

Black plate (179,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Inside warning chime

Outside warning chime

Access key warning light on

meter

Operation indica- tor on push-button ignition switch

Status Action

Ding, ding ...

(intermittent)

The drivers door was opened while the push-button ignition switch is ACC and the select lever is in the P position.

Switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF, or close the drivers door. *When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF.

The push-button ignition switch was switched to OFF while the drivers door is open.

Close the drivers door.

Ding Short beep (2 seconds)

Lockout warning: An attempt was made to lock all doors while the access key is left inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key from the vehicle, and lock the doors. *The doors cannot be locked while the access key is inside the vehicle. *A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will be unlocked.

Short beep (2 seconds)

Access key lock-in warning: The door lock sensor was touched while the push-button ignition switch is OFF and the access key is inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key from the vehicle, and lock the doors. *If the access key is inside the vehicle, the doors cannot be locked.

Beep, beep ... (5 beeps)

Door ajar warning: The door lock sensor is touched while the push-button ignition switch is in the OFF position and one of the doors including the rear gate is opened.

Close the doors securely and lock them. *If one of the doors including the rear gate is opened, the doors cannot be locked.

Ding Long beep (60 seconds max.)

Power warning: The door lock sensor was touched while carrying the access key and the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF and the select lever is in the P position.

Return the access key inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF. *If the push-button ignition switch is not switched to OFF, the doors cannot be locked.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-27

3

Black plate (180,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Inside warning chime

Outside warning chime

Access key warning light on

meter

Operation indica- tor on push-button ignition switch

Status Action

Ding, ding ... (7 seconds)

(Flashes 1 sec. intermittent)

Access key warning: The vehicle was driven while the access key is not inside the vehi- cle.

Carry the access key, and drive the vehicle.

Ding (Flashes 1 sec. intermittent)

Access key warning for engine start: The push-button ignition switch was pressed while the access key is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key, and press the push-button ignition switch.

Ding Beep, beep, beep (3 beeps) (Flashes 1 sec.

intermittent)

Access key takeout warning: The driver exited the vehicle with the access key and closed the drivers door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF and the select lever is in the P position.

Switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding Beep, beep, beep (3 beeps) (Flashes 1 sec.

intermittent)

Passenger access key takeout warning: A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with the access key and closed a door other than the drivers door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF.

Return the access key to inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF.

Long beep (continuous)

Long beep (continuous) (Flashes 1 sec.

intermittent)

Access key takeout without P position warning: The driver exited the vehicle with the access key and closed the drivers door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF and the select lever is in a position other than the P posi- tion.

Shift the select lever to the P position, switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF and exit the vehicle.

3-28

Black plate (181,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Inside warning chime

Outside warning chime

Access key warning light on

meter

Operation indica- tor on push-button ignition switch

Status Action

Long beep (continuous)

Select lever position warning: The engine is turned off by press- ing the push-button ignition switch and the select lever is in a position other than the P position.

Start the engine, shift the select lever to the P position, switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF and exit the vehicle.

Long beep (continuous)

Select lever position warning: The drivers door was opened while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF and the select lever is in a position other than the P position.

Shift the select lever to the P position, switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF and exit the vehicle.

Ding The battery of the access key is low.

Replace the battery of the access key.

Ding Flashes in green (15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning: The engine start procedure was performed, but the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right and left lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the push- button ignition switch.

Ding Flashes in orange System malfunction warning: A malfunction was detected in the power system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme- diately and have the vehicle in- spected.

NOTE An electronic chirp will sound while the select lever is in the R position. In this case, the select lever position warning chime will not sound.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-29

3

Black plate (182,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& Security indicator light

This indicator light shows the status of the alarm system. It also indicates operation of the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operational status of the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to Alarm system F2- 25.

! Immobilizer system

The security indicator light starts blinking in the following conditions.

For models with keyless access with push-button start system: . Immediately after the push-button igni- tion switch is turned to the OFF position. . Immediately after the drivers door is opened or closed when all of the following conditions are met.

The push-button ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. The access key is outside the vehicle. The engine is not running.

In the event that the push-button ignition switch is pressed to turn it on or to start the engine carrying an unauthorized key (for example, the key is unregistered or the ID code does not match), the power is

not switched to ON and the security indicator light continues blinking. For models without keyless access with push-button start system: . Approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position. . Immediately after the key is pulled out.

If the indicator light does not blink in the above conditions, it may indicate that immobilizer system may be malfunction- ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for example, an unauthorized duplicate) is used to start the engine, the security indicator light illuminates. For details about the immobilizer system, refer to Immobilizer F2-3.

NOTE . The security indicator light remains off in the following conditions. It means that the matching of the ID code is completed and the immobilizer system is deactivated, and it does not indicate a malfunction.

Models with keyless access with push-button start system: while the engine is running the push-button ignition switch has been turned to the ON or ACC position and the drivers door has not been opened or closed

Models without keyless access with push-button start system: while the engine is running for approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position when the ignition switch is in the ON position

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such as if the security indicator light flashes irregularly, it will not affect the func- tionality of the immobilizer system.

3-30

Black plate (183,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& SI-DRIVE indicator light (if equipped)

SI-DRIVE indicator light (type A) 1) Sport (S) mode 2) Intelligent (I) mode 3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode

SI-DRIVE indicator light (type B) 1) Sport (S) mode 2) Intelligent (I) mode 3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode

This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE mode. For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to SI- DRIVE F7-32.

& Select lever/gear position in- dicator (CVT models)

Select lever/gear position indicator (type A) 1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Select lever/gear position indicator

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-31

3

Black plate (184,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Select lever/gear position indicator (type B) 1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the select lever.

For models with manual mode, when the manual mode is selected, the gear posi- tion indicator (which shows the current gear selection) and the upshift/downshift indicator light up. Refer to Continuously variable transmission F7-24.

For models with SI-DRIVE, the upshift/ downshift indicators are switched off while the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected.

& Turn signal indicator lights

These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal. If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to Replacing bulbs F11-39.

& High beam indicator light

This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode. This indicator light also illuminates when the headlight flasher is operated.

& High beam assist indi- cator light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the high beam assist function is activated. For details about the high beam assist function, refer to High beam assist function F3-95.

& Cruise control indica- tor light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the cruise control main button is pressed to activate the cruise control function. For details, refer to To set cruise control F7-53.

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ malfunction indicator light illumi- nates, the cruise control indicator light flashes at the same time. At this time, avoid driving at high speed and have your vehicle in- spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Cruise control set in- dicator light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when vehicle speed has been set to use the cruise control function. Refer to To set cruise control F7-53.

& Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the automatic headlight beam leveler does not operate normally. If this light illuminates while driving or does not turn off approximately 3 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the ON position, have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer.

3-32

Black plate (185,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/ Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the Steering Responsive Headlight OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the Steering Re- sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes when a malfunction occurs in the Steering Responsive Headlight. Refer to Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) F3-99.

& Front fog light indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates while the front fog lights are illuminated.

& Headlight indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates under the following conditions. . when the light switch is turned to the or position . when the light control switch is in the AUTO position and the headlights illumi- nate automatically

& X-mode indicator light (if equipped)

This light illuminates while the X-mode is activated. It will turn off when the X-mode is deactivated. Refer to To activate/ deactivate the X-mode F7-43.

& Hill descent control indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates while the hill descent control function is in standby. It will flash while the hill descent control function is operating. It will turn off when the hill descent control function is not available. Refer to Hill descent control function F7-44.

& Steering responsive fog lights warning indi- cator/Steering respon- sive fog lights OFF in- dicator (if equipped)

NOTE For details about the steering respon- sive fog lights system, refer to Steer- ing responsive fog lights system F3- 103.

! Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator

This indicator starts blinking when the steering responsive fog lights system malfunctions. When this indicator is blink- ing while the system is activated, contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator

This indicator appears when the steering responsive fog lights system is deacti- vated. This indicator disappears when the system is activated.

& BSD/RCTA warning in- dicator (if equipped)

This warning indicator appears when the BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. For models with type A combination meter, the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be shown on the combination meter. For models with type B combination meter, the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be shown on the multi information display of the combination meter.

When this indicator appears, have your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CONTINUED

3-33

3

Black plate (186,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexicospec. models)

& BSD/RCTA OFF indica- tor (if equipped)

The indicator appears when the BSD/ RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the BSD/RCTA. For models with type A combination meter, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on the combination meter. For models with type B combination meter, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on the multi information display of the combination meter.

For details, refer to BSD/RCTA F7-58.

& RAB warning light (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse Automatic Braking System malfunctions. Refer to Reverse Automatic Braking System F7-66.

& RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Re- verse Automatic Braking System is turned OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic Braking System is suspended temporarily. Refer to Reverse Automatic Braking System F7-66.

Information display (Mexico- spec. models)

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a color multi function display, refer to Multi function display F3-44.

1) Outside temperature indicator 2) Driving information display 3) Clock

With the ignition switch in the ACC position, the clock appears on the display.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, the outside temperature indica- tor, driving information display and clock all appear on the display.

& Outside temperature indica- tor

This indicator displays the outside tem- perature between 408F (408C) and 1228F (508C).

NOTE The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. Therefore, the temperature in- dication may differ from the actual outside air temperature.

3-34

Black plate (187,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Road surface freeze warning indi- cation

When the outside temperature drops to 378F (38C) or lower, the temperature indication flashes to show that the road surface may be frozen. If the outside temperature drops to 378F (38C) or lower while the display is giving an indication other than the outside temperature, the display switches to the outside temperature indication and flashes for 5 seconds before returning to its original indication. If the display is already indicating an outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the indication does not flash.

NOTE The outside temperature indication may differ from the actual outside temperature. The road surface freeze warning indication should be treated only as a guide. Be sure to check the condition of the road surface before driving.

& Driving information display

For type A combination meter 1) Information display selection knob

With the ignition switch in the ON position, each successive press of the information display selection knob switches the display in the following sequence.

! Driving range on remaining fuel

The driving range indicates the distance that can be driven taking into account the amount of fuel remaining in the tank and

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexicospec. models)

CONTINUED

3-35

3

Black plate (188,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexicospec. models)

the average rate of fuel consumption. When the low fuel warning light illumi- nates, the driving range display flashes for 5 seconds. (The display first switches to the driving range value if a different value was previously displayed.)

If the driving range is shown as , there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi- ately.

NOTE The driving range on remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on remaining fuel, so you must immedi- ately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

! Average fuel consumption

This display shows the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset.

For type A combination meter 1) Trip knob

Pressing the trip knob toggles the display between the average fuel consumption corresponding to the A trip meter display and the average fuel consumption corre- sponding to the B trip meter display. When either of the trip meter displays is reset, the corresponding average fuel consumption value is also reset.

NOTE . The indicated values vary in accor- dance with changes in the vehicles running conditions. Also, the indicated values may differ slightly from the actual values and should thus be treated only as a guide. . When either trip meter display is reset, the average fuel consumption corresponding to that trip meter dis- play is not shown until the vehicle has subsequently covered a distance of 1 mile (or 1 km).

3-36

Black plate (189,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Current fuel consumption

This indication shows the rate of fuel consumption at the present moment.

! Journey time

The journey time shows the time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the ON position.

The journey time indication flashes each time a complete hour has elapsed. If the

display is giving a reading other than the journey time, the display switches to the journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and returns to its original reading each time a complete hour has elapsed.

NOTE The journey time is reset when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/ OFF position. It is also reset if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/ OFF or ACC position prior to restarting of the engine.

! Average vehicle speed

This display shows the average vehicle speed since the trip meter was last reset.

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexicospec. models)

CONTINUED

3-37

3

Black plate (190,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexicospec. models)

For type A combination meter 1) Trip knob

Pressing the trip knob toggles the display between the average vehicle speed cor- responding to the A trip meter display and the average vehicle speed corresponding to the B trip meter display. When either of the trip meter displays is reset, the corresponding average vehicle speed value is also reset.

NOTE When either trip meter display is reset, the average vehicle speed correspond- ing to that trip meter display is not shown until the vehicle has subse- quently covered a distance of 1 mile (or 1 km).

! X-mode indicator (if equipped)

This indicator will be shown while the X- mode is activated. It will turn off when the X-mode is deactivated.

! Turn off display of driving informa- tion display

The driving information display can be turned off. To turn off the display, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position and press the + button adjacent to the clock display for approximately 5 seconds. Then, the driving information display and the clock display will blink for 3 seconds to notify you that the driving information display has been turned off. To restore the driving information display, once again press the + button for approximately 5 seconds.

NOTE . The initial display setting of the driving information display has been set to operational at the time of ship- ment from the factory. . The average fuel consumption and average vehicle speed are calculated even while the driving information dis- play is not displayed. . Even if you turn off the driving

information display, the display will automatically turn on when the battery voltage is disconnected and then re- connected for battery replacement or fuse replacement.

& Clock If your vehicle is equipped with the genuine SUBARU navigation system, the clock of navigation system must be set separately.

To adjust the time shown by the clock, press the + button or button. If you press the + button, the indicated time will change in one-minute increments. If you press the button, the indicated time will change in one-minute decrements. If you keep the button pressed, the rate at which the indicated time changes will speed up.

3-38

Black plate (191,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour clock displays. Perform the following procedure to switch the display format. 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position. 2. Press and hold the button that is located near the clock display for approxi- mately 5 seconds. The clock display will then start to flash. 3. While the clock display is flashing, press and hold the + button for approxi- mately 2 seconds. The clock format will then change. 4. The clock display will continue to flash for approximately 3 seconds to inform you that the clock display has been changed. If you want to change the clock display again, press and hold the + button for approximately 2 seconds while the clock display is flashing.

Multi information display (models with type B combi- nation meter)

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to safe driving when operating the multi information display while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the multi information display interferes with your ability to con- centrate on driving, stop the vehicle before performing operations on the screen. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so may cause you to look away from the road and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the multi information display. Also, a warning message will appear on the display if a malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition, several settings for the displayed content can be performed.

Multi information display 1) Fuel gauge (refer to Fuel gauge F3-

12.) 2) Warning screen (refer to Warning

screen F3-41.)/Basic screen (refer to Basic screens F3-41.)

3) Cruise control information display 4) Warning indicator

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

CONTINUED

3-39

3

Black plate (192,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

5) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer to Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT models) F3-31.)

6) Odometer (refer to Odometer F3-10.)/ double trip meter (refer to Double trip meter F3-10.)

Control switch 1) Up (select) 2) Set (enter) 3) Down (select)

& Basic operation By operating or of the control switch, the screens and selection items can be switched. When the /SET switch is pulled toward you, the item can be selected and set.

If there are some useful messages, such as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current screen, and appear on the display accom- panied by a beep. If such a screen is displayed, take proper action according to the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the original screen after a few seconds. While the information reminder is shown on the display, it may be possible to display the warning screen again. To recall the message marked with on the display, pull the /SET switch on the steering wheel toward you.

& Welcome screen and Good- bye screen

When the drivers door is opened and closed after unlocking the door, the welcome screen will appear on the multi information display for approximately 20 seconds. When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position, the multi informa- tion display gradually turns off (Good-bye screen).

NOTE . The basic screen will be shown when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position while the welcome screen is displayed.

. Once the welcome screen appears, it takes a certain period of time to display it again. . If the ignition switch is operated after unlocking the drivers door, the welcome screen will not appear even when the drivers door is opened and closed. . The welcome screen will disappear when you lock the drivers door by using the remote keyless entry system (all models) or the keyless access function (if equipped) while the wel- come screen is displayed. . If any of the doors (including the rear gate) is opened while the welcome screen is displayed, the door ajar warning will appear. . The welcome screen can be set to on or off. For details, refer to Welcome Good-bye Screen F3-43.

3-40

Black plate (193,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Warning screen

Example of warning

If there is a warning message or a maintenance notification, it will appear for approximately 3 seconds. Take the appro- priate actions based on the messages indicated.

& Basic screens By operating the or switch on the steering wheel, you can change the screen that is always displayed.

Default screen:

Digital speedometer:

SI-DRIVE mode screen (if equipped):

This screen indicates the current SI-DRIVE mode with its throttle angle.

Journey time screen:

This screen displays the journey time (the time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the ON position).

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

CONTINUED

3-41

3

Black plate (194,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

Menu screen entering screen:

While this screen is selected, pull the / SET switch to enter the menu screen.

& Menu screens Pull the /SET switch to enter the menu screens when all of the following condi- tions are satisfied. . The vehicle has been completely stopped. . The select lever is in the P position. . The menu screen entering screen is selected. . The information reminder is off.

The menu list is as follows.

First menu Second menu

Screen Settings Welcome Good-bye Screen

Gauge Initial Movement

Languages

Go Back

EyeSight (models with EyeSight system) Warning Volume

Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function

Go Back

BSD/RCTA (if equipped) Warning Volume

RAB (if equipped) Warning Volume

Sonar Audible Alarm

Default Settings

3-42

Black plate (195,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

By operating the or switch on the steering wheel, you can select the menu. Pull the /SET switch to enter the selected menu.

NOTE If you enter the Go Back menu, the system will return to the previous screen.

! Screen Settings

After entering the Screen Settings menu, select one of the following menus.

! Welcome Good-bye Screen

The welcome screen/good-bye screens can be activated or deactivated. Select On to activate the screens. Select Off to deactivate the screens.

! Gauge Initial Movement

The movement of the meter needles and gauge needles that occurs when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position can be activated or deactivated. Select On to activate. Select Off to deactivate.

! Languages

Operate the or switch on the steering wheel to display the preferred language. Then pull the /SET switch to select the displayed language.

! EyeSight (models with EyeSight system)

NOTE For models with the EyeSight system, refer to the Owners Manual supple- ment for the EyeSight system.

After entering the EyeSight menu, select one of the following menus.

! Warning Volume

The volume of the warning buzzer that sounds when the EyeSight system is in use can be set in 3 stages (Max, Mid and Min).

! Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound

When adaptive cruise control is used, the buzzer that sounds if a vehicle is detected in front or if detection is not possible can be activated or deactivated. Select On to activate the buzzer. Select Off to deac- tivate the buzzer.

! Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function

When the lead vehicle moving monitor function is in operation, the buzzer that sounds if a vehicle in front has started can be activated or deactivated. Select On to activate the buzzer. Select Off to deac- tivate the buzzer.

! BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

After entering the BSD/RCTA menu, select the Warning Volume menu. You can set the volume of the warning buzzer for RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). You can select Max, Mid, Min or Off.

! RAB (if equipped)

NOTE For models with the RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking) system, refer to Reverse Automatic Braking System F7-66.

After entering the RAB menu, select one of the following menus.

! Warning Volume

The volume of the warning sound that is activated when the RAB (Reverse Auto- matic Braking) system is in operation can be set in 3 stages (Max, Mid and Min).

! Sonar Audible Alarm

The RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking) system is equipped with a function that emits a warning sound when the system operates. The function can be activated or deactivated. Select On to set the warn- ing sound to active. Select Off to set the warning sound to inactive.

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

CONTINUED

3-43

3

Black plate (196,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Default Settings

Select Yes to use the menu screen to restore customized settings to the factory default settings. Select No to return to the previous screen without restoring the factory default settings.

Multi function display (if equipped)

NOTE . If your vehicle is equipped with an information display (monochrome), re- fer to Information display (Mexico- spec. models) F3-34. . Illustrations show the display for U.S.-spec. models as an example. For models other than U.S.-spec. models, elements in the illustrations (such as the display indication and measure- ment unit) may be different than the ones for U.S.-spec. models. . When the vehicle is in motion, certain functions and selections may not be available.

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to safe driving when operating the multi function display while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the multi function display is disturbing your awareness and abil- ity to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place before performing operations on the screen. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing

so may cause you to look away from the road and could result in an accident.

The multi function display has the follow- ing functions.

Description Page

Displays useful messages, such as warning information, etc.

3-48

Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel consumption screen, etc.) 3-48

Sets and adjusts maintenance notification 3-76

Registers driving history 3-79

Sets and customizes car op- eration 3-80

Reverse Automatic Braking system display (if equipped) 7-66

Also, the multi function display can also be used to set and initialize the multi function display itself.

3-44

Black plate (197,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Multi function display 1) Outside temperature indicator 2) Information reminder (models with type A

combination meter) 3) Top display (For the display setting, refer

to Top display setting F3-68.) 4) Clock 5) Driving information display (For the dis-

played contents, refer to Basic screens F3-48.)

& Basic operation

Control switch 1) Up (select) 2) ENTER (push) 3) Down (select)

By operating or of the control switch, the screens and selection items can be switched. When the button is pushed, the item can be selected and set.

& Welcome screen When the door is unlocked and the drivers door is closed, the welcome screen will appear for a short time.

NOTE . The welcome screen will disappear when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position while the welcome screen is displayed. . If any of the doors (including the rear gate) is opened while the welcome screen is displayed, the door ajar warning will appear. . The welcome screen can be set to on or off. For details, refer to Bypass screen setting F3-74. . For a certain period of time after the welcome screen has once appeared, it may not appear again even when the drivers door is opened again. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-45

3

Black plate (198,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

& Ending screen If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position, one of the follow- ing screens will be displayed as the ending screen before the screen turns off. . If Eco Summary is set to Off in the Bypass screen setting: The Goodbye screen will be displayed. . If Eco Summary is set to On in the Bypass screen setting: The Fuel con- sumption results screen will be displayed.

For details about the bypass screen setting, refer to Bypass screen setting F3-74.

Goodbye screen Fuel consumption results screen 1) The average fuel consumption for the

entire driving distance, from when the ignition switch was turned to the ON position to when it was turned to the LOCK/OFF position.

2) The average fuel consumption for the driving interval displayed on the trip meter at the point when the ignition switch was turned to the LOCK/OFF position.

& Self-check screen When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the vehicle self-check will be performed. The screens corresponding to the following items will appear one after another for several seconds each.

3-46

Black plate (199,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Type A combination meter 1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine

oil replacement. 2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter

replacement. 3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation. 4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the

interval of inspection and maintenance.

Type B combination meter 1) Windshield washer fluid: Checks the

level of windshield washer fluid. 2) Brake fluid: Checks the level of brake

fluid. 3) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine

oil replacement. 4) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter

replacement. 5) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation. 6) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the

interval of inspection and maintenance.

When the checks are performed, the color of the icon corresponding to the checked item will turn green. If there is no warning message, the self- check will complete without notification.

Example of notification

If there is a warning message or a maintenance notification, the color of the icon corresponding to the item will turn yellow and the warning message or the maintenance notification will be displayed. Take the appropriate actions based on the messages indicated.

NOTE . The self-check screen can be set to on or off. For details, refer to On/Off setting F3-77. . After performing the maintenance, change the setting of the correspond- ing maintenance item. For details, refer to Maintenance settings F3-76. . The maintenance notification screen will be displayed under either of the

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-47

3

Black plate (200,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

following conditions. The period of time remaining until the registered notification date is 15 days or less. The total driving distance remain- ing until the registered notification distance is approximately 311 miles (500 km) or less.

. The maintenance notification screen will be displayed until either of the following conditions is satisfied.

The period of time passed after the registered notification date is 15 days or more. The total distance driven after the registered notification distance is approximately 311 miles (500 km) or more.

& Interruption screen

Warning information (display example)

Useful messages, such as reminder in- formation, vehicle information, warning information, etc. may interrupt the current screen and appear on the display accom- panied by a beep. Take proper action according to the message.

The warning screen will return to the original screen after a few seconds. If the warning screen can be displayed again, an information reminder will appear on the upper left part of the display. To recall the message marked with on the display, push the button.

& Basic screens These are the basic screens of the multi function display.

Item Page

Information bar 3-49

Fuel consumption screen 3-50

ECO gauge screen 3-50

ECO history screen 3-51

Vehicle activation status screen 3-51

EyeSight screen (models with the EyeSight system) 3-52

Boost pressure and Accel- erator opening ratio screen (turbo models)

3-53

Triple meter screen 3-53

Guidance screen 3-54

Clock/calendar screen 3-54

By operating or of the control switch, you can switch the screen that is always displayed. Also, when the button is pushed and held, the selection screen can be displayed. For details about the selection screen, refer to Selection screen F3-56.

3-48

Black plate (201,1)

Model "A8220BE-C" EDITED: 2018/ 3/ 29

! Information bar

1) Information bar 2) Outside temperature indicator 3) Information reminder (models with type A

combination meter) 4) Top display 5) Clock

While the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the outside temperature indicator, clock, etc. will be shown on the information bar.

! Outside temperature indicator

This displays the outside temperature between 408F (408C) and 1228F (508C).

Icy road surface warning screen

When the outside temperature becomes 378F (38C) or less, the icy road surface warning screen interrupts to inform the driver that the road surface may be frozen.

NOTE . The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. Therefore, the temperature in- dication may differ from the actual outside air temperature. . The icy road surface warning screen should be treated only as a guide. Be sure to check the condition of the road surface before driving. . Once the icy road surface warning screen is displayed, it will not be displayed again unless the outside

temperature increases to 418F (58C) or higher.

! Information reminder

The screen returns to the original screen several seconds after the interruption screen has been displayed. If the inter- ruption screen can be displayed once more even after the original screen has appeared, an information reminder should be displayed. For details about the inter- ruption screen, refer to Interruption screen F3-48.

! Top display

One of the following items can be dis- played on the top display. . Average fuel consumption correspond- ing to the driving distance of each trip meter . Current fuel consumption (This may not be displayed when driving at a low speed.) . Driving range on remaining fuel

For details about the setting of the top display, refer to Top display setting F3- 68.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-49

3

Black plate (202,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

NOTE The driving range on the remaining fuel is calculated using the average fuel consumption of the last 19 miles (30 km) driven. This value may be different from the values calculated using the average fuel consumption correspond- ing to the driving distance of each trip meter or the current fuel consumption.

! Clock

The clock can be displayed in either 12- hour display or 24-hour display. For details about the setting, refer to Current date and time setting F3-59.

NOTE If the vehicle battery is disconnected, the clock shown in the information bar will be reset. Set the time again after the vehicle battery is connected. For details about the setting, refer to Top display setting F3-68.

! Fuel consumption screen

1) Average fuel consumption corresponding to the driving distance of each trip meter

2) Current fuel consumption 3) Driving range on remaining fuel

The displayed location can be custo- mized. For details, refer to Fuel consump- tion screen setting F3-69.

! ECO gauge screen

1) Average fuel consumption corresponding to the driving distance of each trip meter

2) ECO gauge

The gauge pointer shows the difference between the current fuel consumption and the average fuel consumption that is displayed on the center part of the screen. If the gauge pointer moves toward the green side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.

3-50

Black plate (203,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! ECO history screen

1) Average fuel consumption per unit time (bar graph)

2) Average fuel consumption corresponding to the driving distance of each trip meter (red line)

This screen displays the fuel economy history for the vehicle using a bar graph.

The horizontal scale represents the past time range and the vertical scale repre- sents the fuel consumption. The green bars show driving with good fuel economy and the yellow bars show driving with poor fuel economy.

The time range of the history can be set. The width of the bar graph is adjusted as follows depending on the set time range.

Time range Width of bar graph

30 minutes 1 minute

60 minutes 2 minutes

120 minutes 4 minutes

For details about the setting, refer to Economy history setting F3-70.

! Vehicle activation status screen

When the vehicle stops 1) Steering axle

When the vehicle is being driven regularly 1) Power train (illuminated in blue)

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem is being activated: the tires illuminate in yellow. 1) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control

system activation

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-51

3

Black plate (204,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem has been activated: the tires remain illuminated in yellow while the Vehicle Dynamics Control System is activated. 1) Activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System) 2) Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper-

ating indicator (flashing in yellow) 3) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control

system activation

When the X-mode is selected (if equipped) 1) Hill descent control indicator

This screen displays the following vehicle information. . steering angle and driving wheel status . activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) . activation status of the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system . activation status of the X-mode (if equipped)

While driving, the vehicle wheels are illuminated in blue and the driving direc- tion is represented using an animation of the traffic lane.

If the ABS is activated, all of the vehicles wheels will be illuminated in yellow and

the length of operation in seconds and the number of activations will be displayed in the bar indicator, located on the lowermost part of the display.

If the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is activated, the activated vehicle wheels will be illuminated in yellow and the operating indicator will appear on the upper right part of the display. Also, the length of operation in seconds and the number of activations will be displayed in the bar indicator.

! EyeSight screen (models with EyeSight system)

1) Current vehicle speed 2) Set vehicle speed 3) Preceding vehicle 4) Your vehicle

3-52

Black plate (205,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

This screen displays the status of the EyeSight system.

! Boost pressure and Accelerator opening ratio screen (turbo mod- els)

1) Boost pressure (digital format) 2) Boost pressure (analog format) 3) Accelerator opening ratio (digital format) 4) Accelerator opening ratio (analog format) 5) Peak value of boost pressure (digital

format) 6) Peak value of boost pressure (analog

format)

This screen displays the boost pressure, the accelerator opening ratio and the peak value of the boost pressure in both the digital and analog formats.

Also, the peak value of the boost pressure

is stored if the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK/OFF position. To reset the peak value, perform the following procedure.

Resetting procedure of boost pressure peak value 1. Push the button while the Boost pressure and Accelerator opening ratio screen is displayed. Then the following confirmation screen will appear.

2. Select Yes by operating the switch, and confirm the resetting by pushing the button.

If you select No, the current peak value is still kept.

! Triple meter screen

Triple meter screen (display example)

This screen displays up to three optional pieces of information that can be selected from the following items. The items shown in the triple meter screen can be changed. For details, refer to Triple meter setting F3-72.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-53

3

Black plate (206,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

Item Details

Average vehicle speed (Average vehicle speed for the entire driving time from when the trip meter was reset)

Lifetime fuel consumption

Engine oil temperature

Accelerator opening ratio

Boost pressure (turbo models only)

Journey time (the time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the ON position)

Journey distance (the distance that has been driven since the ignition switch was turned to the ON position)

Average fuel consumption for the entire driving distance from when the ignition switch was turned to the ON position

! Guidance screen

When the button is pushed and held, the selection screen can be displayed. The displayed contents can be set or customized from the selection screen. For details, refer to Selection screen F3-56.

! Clock/calendar screen

Clock (Type A)

Clock (Type B)

3-54

Black plate (207,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Calendar 1) Todays date 2) Birthday/Anniversary

In addition to the clock/calendar, the out- side temperature and average fuel con- sumption can also be displayed. You can select clock (Type A), clock (Type B) or calendar. The clock/calendar can also be set so that it is not displayed. For details, refer to Clock/calendar screen setting F3-73.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-55

3

Black plate (208,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

& Selection screen When the button is pushed and held, the setting screen for each menu can be displayed. Select the preferred menu by operating the or switch.

Top menu Menu option Description Page

Time/Date Time/Date Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 3-59

Birthday Set a birthday. 3-60

Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 3-62

Daylight Saving Time Turn the daylight saving time on or off 3-65

Go Back Return to the top menu.

Display Contrast Adjust the contrast. +5 5 3-66

Screen Off Turn the screen on or off. On or Off 3-66

Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 3-67

Go Back Return to the top menu.

Screen Setting Top Display Set and customize the top display information

contents. Avg Cons, Inst Cons, Range or Off 3-68

Cons Customize the fuel consumption information display. 3-69

Eco History Set and customize the time of logging fuel consumption history. 30 min, 60 min or 120 min 3-70

Triple Meter Set and customize the triple meter. 3-72

Clock Select the clock format. Type A, Type B, Calendar or Off 3-73

Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 3-74

Languages Select the display language. English or French or Spanish (U.S.-spec. models only) 3-75

Go Back Return to the top menu.

3-56

Black plate (209,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Top menu Menu option Description Page

Maintenance Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-76

Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-77

Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-77

Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-77

On/Off Turn on or off the self-check screen that is activated when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

On or Off 3-77

Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-78

Go Back Return to the top menu.

Driving History Set Register and overwrite the driving record. 3-79

Go Back Return to the top menu.

Car Setting Keyless Buzzer Volume Set the audible signal volume. 0 (OFF) to 7 3-81

Hazard Warning Flasher Set the hazard warning flasher. On or Off 3-82

Defogger Set and customize the operation of the defogger. 15 minutes or Continuous 3-83

Interior Light Set and customize the interior light off delay timer. 10, 20, 30 seconds or Off 3-84

Auto Light Sensor (if equipped) Set and customize the sensitivity of the auto light sensor. Low, Mid, High or Max 3-85

Keyless Access Setting (if equipped) Set and customize the keyless access function.

Drivers Door Unlock 3-86

Rear Gate Unlock 3-88

Welcome Lighting Set the leaving time and approaching time. 30, 60, 90 seconds or Off 3-89

Go Back Return to top menu.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-57

3

Black plate (210,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

Top menu Menu option Description Page

Initialize Reset to Defaults Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-90

Lifetime Fuel Consumption Reset Clear logged lifetime fuel consumption data. Yes or No 3-91

Go Back Return to the top menu.

Go Back Return to the top menu.

3-58

Black plate (211,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Date and time settings The items in the date and time settings can be set. To change the items, operate the or switch.

NOTE . The Time/Date item must be set to display the Birthday, Anniversary and notifications for vehicle mainte- nance. . The Birthday and Anniversary items can be entered after the Time/ Date item has been set. . Dates that do not exist in the Gregorian calendar cannot be set (for example, April 31). . If your vehicle is equipped with genuine SUBARU navigation system, the clock of navigation system must be set separately.

! Preparation for date setting

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Push and hold the button to show the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed, operate the or switch to show the Time/Date item. Then, push the button.

! Current date and time setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for date setting F3- 59.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Time/Date item. Then push the button.

3. Select the item to set by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-59

3

Black plate (212,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

4. Select a number by operating the or switch. Then push the button. When 12 h is selected, the clock will be set to a 12-hour display. When 24 h is selected, the clock will be set to a 24-hour display.

5. After entering the date and time, select Set by operating the switch and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

! Birthday setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for date setting F3- 59.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Birthday item. Then push the

button.

3. Select an entry in the list to set by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

3-60

Black plate (213,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

4. The selected item will be shown. Push the button to set the selected item.

5. Select numbers by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

6. After entering the date by repeating step 5, you can enter the name.

7. Select characters by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

You can select characters of the

English alphabet (upper case charac- ters and lower case characters are available), eleven symbols or blank spaces. The word being edited will be displayed with an underline.

8. After entering the name by repeating step 7, select Set by operating the switch and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-61

3

Black plate (214,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

9. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

If a birthday is approaching, the following screen will be displayed accompanied by a beep when the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position. This function can be set to on or off. For details, refer to Bypass screen setting F3-74.

From 1 to 7 days prior to the birthday

On a birthday (displayed in red)

NOTE If _ _ is selected for either the Month or Day item instead of numbers, the birthday notification will

be deactivated.

! Anniversary setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for date setting F3- 59.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Anniversary item. Then push the button.

3-62

Black plate (215,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

3. Select an entry in the list to set by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

4. The selected item will be shown. Push the button to set the selected item.

5. Select numbers by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

6. After entering the date by repeating step 5, you can enter the name.

7. Select characters by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

You can select characters of the English alphabet (upper case charac- ters and lower case characters are available), eleven symbols or blank spaces. The word being edited will be displayed with an underline.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-63

3

Black plate (216,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

8. After entering the name by repeating step 7, select Set by operating the switch and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

9. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

If an anniversary is approaching, the following screen will be displayed accom- panied by a beep when the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position. This function can be set to on or off. For details, refer to Bypass screen setting F3-74.

From 1 to 7 days prior to the anniversary

On an anniversary (displayed in orange)

NOTE If _ _ is selected for either the Month or Day item instead of numbers, the anniversary notification will be deactivated.

! Clearing birthday or anniversary

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for date setting F3-59 and display Birthday or Anniversary on the screen. 2. Select the preferred birthday/anniver- sary. 3. When _ _ is selected for either the Month or Day item instead of numbers, the setting of Birthday or Anniversary will be cleared.

3-64

Black plate (217,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Daylight saving time setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for date setting F3- 59.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Daylight Saving Time item. Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the selection mode.

4. Select On or Off by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-65

3

Black plate (218,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

& Image quality and volume settings

The image quality and volume settings can be adjusted. To change the items, operate the or switch.

! Preparation for image quality and volume settings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Push and hold the button to show the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed, operate the or switch to show the Display item. Then, push the button.

! Contrast setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for image quality and volume settings F3-66.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Contrast item. Then push the

button.

3. Select a contrast level by operating the or switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

! Screen OFF setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for image quality and volume settings F3-66.

3-66

Black plate (219,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

2. Operate the or switch to select the Screen Off item. Then push the button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. The screen is turned off.

Restoring the screen When the , or button is pushed after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the screen will be restored. The screen will be restored with the basic screen that was displayed when the screen was turned off. While the screen is off, a warning message will be displayed if necessary, but other screens will not be displayed.

! Beep volume setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for image quality and volume settings F3-66.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Beep item. Then push the button.

3. Push the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-67

3

Black plate (220,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

4. Select an item by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

& Screen settings The items in screen settings can be set. To change the items, operate the or switch, and then push the button.

! Preparation for screen settings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Push and hold the button to show the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed, operate the or switch to show the Screen Setting item. Then, push the button.

! Top display setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for screen settings F3-68.

3-68

Black plate (221,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

2. Operate the or switch to select the Top Display item. Then push the button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select an item by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

! Fuel consumption screen setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for screen settings F3-68.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-69

3

Black plate (222,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

2. Operate the or switch to select the Cons item. Then push the button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select the displayed configuration by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

! Economy history setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for screen settings F3-68.

3-70

Black plate (223,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

2. Operate the or switch to select the Eco History item. Then push the button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select the time of the logged fuel consumption history by operating the or switch, and then push the

button.

5. Select Go Back by operating the switch.

6. Select Set by operating the switch and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

7. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-71

3

Black plate (224,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Triple meter setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for screen settings F3-68.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Triple Meter item. Then push the button.

3. Select the setting location (left, center or right) by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

NOTE The same item cannot be selected for the left, center or right location.

4. Select the preferred item by operating the or switch. Then push the button. If you also want to change the setting for another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Select Set by operating the

3-72

Black plate (225,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

! Clock/calendar screen setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for screen settings F3-68.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Clock item. Then push the button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select Type A clock, Type B clock, Calendar or Off by operating the switch. Then push the button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-73

3

Black plate (226,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

! Bypass screen setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for screen settings F3-68.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Bypass Screen item. Then push the button.

3. Select the item to set by operating the or switches. Then push the button.

4. Select On or Off by operating the or switch. Then push the button. If you want to change setting for another item, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Select Set by operating the or

3-74

Black plate (227,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

! Language setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for screen settings F3-68.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Languages item. Then push the button.

3. The current language setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the language selection mode.

4. Select the preferred language by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-75

3

Black plate (228,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

& Maintenance settings The items in the maintenance settings can be set. To change the items, operate the or switch.

! Preparation for maintenance set- tings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Push and hold the button to show the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed, operate the or switch to show the Maintenance item. Then, push the button.

! Engine oil setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for maintenance set- tings F3-76.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Engine Oil item. Then push the button.

3. Select the setting location (month, day, year or distance) by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

3-76

Black plate (229,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

4. Select a number by operating the or switch. Then push the button. If you also want to change the setting for another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Select Set by operating the or switch and confirm the setting by

pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

NOTE . The notification will be displayed with information of both date and distance or either date or distance in accordance with the setting . When _ _ is selected for either the Month, Day, Year or Distance item instead of numbers, the set noti- fication will be deactivated. . If the notification continues for 15 days or more, the system will display _ _ on the screen. . When the distance announcement reaches 0 km, the display will show 0000 for the next 311 miles (500 km).

After exceeding 311 miles (500 km), _ _ _ _ will be displayed.

! Oil filter setting

The setting procedure is the same as Engine oil setting F3-76, but select the Oil Filter item in step 2.

! Tires setting

The setting procedure is the same as Engine oil setting F3-76, but select the Tires item in step 2.

! Maintenance schedule setting

The setting procedure is the same as Engine oil setting F3-76, but select the Maintenance Schedule item in step 2.

! On/Off setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for maintenance set- tings F3-76.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-77

3

Black plate (230,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

2. Operate the or switch to select the On/Off item. Then push the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the selection mode.

4. Select On or Off by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

! Clear setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for maintenance set- tings F3-76.

3-78

Black plate (231,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

2. Operate the or switch to select the Clear All Settings item. Then push the button.

3. The system will prompt a Yes/No dialogue (No is selected first). To clear all maintenance settings, select Yes by

operating the switch.

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the button.

5. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

& Driving history registration The items in the driving history can be registered. To change the items, operate the or switch, and then push the

button.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Push and hold the button to show the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed, operate the or switch to show the Driving History item. Then, push the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-79

3

Black plate (232,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

4. Push the button once more to enter the setting mode.

5. The system will notify you of the place to be selected for approximately 2 sec- onds.

6. Select one of the registration lines by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

7. To overwrite the previous registration, push the button. When registration is performed the first time, it is registered

directly without a notification.

8. The system will notify you that the registration is complete.

NOTE The driving history can be registered for the trip meter A or B.

& Car settings The items in the car settings can be set. To change the items, operate the or switch, and then push the button.

NOTE When the vehicle is in motion, the selectable items will be limited.

3-80

Black plate (233,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Preparation for car settings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Push and hold the button to show the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed, operate the or switch to show the Car Setting item. Then, push the button.

! Keyless buzzer volume setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for car settingsF3-81.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Keyless Buzzer Volume item. Then push the button.

3. Select a volume level by operating the or switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

4. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following notification will be displayed. In this case, perform the setting procedure again.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-81

3

Black plate (234,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Hazard warning flasher setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for car settingsF3-81.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Hazard Warning Flasher item. Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the selection mode.

4. Select On or Off by operating the or switch. Then push the button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete. If the setting is not available, the following notification will be displayed. In this case, perform the setting procedure again.

3-82

Black plate (235,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Defogger setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for car settingsF3-81.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Defogger item. Then push the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the selection mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat- ing the or switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-83

3

Black plate (236,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

If the setting is not available, the following notification will be displayed. In this case, perform the setting procedure again.

! Interior light off delay timer setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for car settingsF3-81.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Interior Light item. Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the selection mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat- ing the or switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

3-84

Black plate (237,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete. If the setting is not available, the following notification will be displayed. In this case, perform the setting procedure again.

! Auto light sensor sensitivity setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for car settingsF3-81.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Auto Light Sensor item. Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the selection mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat- ing the or switch. Then push the

button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-85

3

Black plate (238,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete. If the setting is not available, the following notification will be displayed. In this case, perform the setting procedure again.

! Keyless access setting (models with keyless access with push- button start system)

! Preparation for keyless access settings

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for car settingsF3-81.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Keyless Access Setting item. Then push the button.

! Drivers door unlock setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for keyless access settings F3-86.

3-86

Black plate (239,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

2. Operate the or switch to select the Drivers Door Unlock item. Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the selection mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat- ing the or switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete. If the setting is not available, the following notification will be displayed. In this case, perform the setting procedure again.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-87

3

Black plate (240,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Rear gate unlock setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for keyless access settings F3-86.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Rear Gate Unlock item. Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the selection mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat- ing the or switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the setting is complete. If the setting is not available, the following

3-88

Black plate (241,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

notification will be displayed. In this case, perform the setting procedure again.

! Welcome lighting setting

The leaving time and approaching time settings can be adjusted.

! Leaving time setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for car settingsF3-81.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Welcome Lighting item, and then push the button.

3. Select the Leaving time set by operating the or switch, and then push the button.

4. The current setting will be displayed. Push the button to enter the selection mode.

5. Select the preferred setting by operat- ing the or switch, and then push the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-89

3

Black plate (242,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

6. Select Set by operating the switch, and confirm the setting by pushing the button.

7. The system will notify you that the setting is complete. If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case, perform the setting procedure again.

! Approaching time setting

The setting procedure is the same as Leaving time setting F3-89, but select the Approaching time set item in step 3.

& Initialize Items that have been set to your pre- ference can be initialized. To select an initialization menu, operate the or switch as follows.

! Preparation for initialization

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Push and hold the button to show the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed, operate the or switch to show the Initialize item. Then, push the button.

! Reset to factory default settings

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for initialization F3- 90.

3-90

Black plate (243,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

2. Operate the or switch to select the Reset to Defaults item. Then push the button.

3. The system will prompt a Yes/No dialogue (No is selected first). To return to the factory default settings, select Yes

by operating the switch.

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the button.

5. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

! Lifetime fuel consumption resetting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord- ing to Preparation for initialization F3- 90.

2. Operate the or switch to select the Lifetime Fuel Consumption Resetting item. Then push the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

CONTINUED

3-91

3

Black plate (244,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

3. The system will prompt a Yes/No dialogue (No is selected first). To reset the lifetime fuel consumption, select Yes by operating the switch.

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the button.

5. Reconfirmation will be displayed. If you are sure you want to proceed, select Yes by operating the switch.

6. Confirm the setting again by pushing the button.

7. The system will notify you that the setting is complete.

3-92

Black plate (245,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Light control switch

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause the battery to discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the lights are turned off. If the vehicle is left unattended for a long time with the lights illuminated, the battery may be discharged.

Models with keyless access with push-button start system: The light control switch operates when the push-button ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the push-button ignition switch is turned off.

Models without keyless access with push-button start system: The light control switch operates when the key is inserted in the ignition switch. Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

NOTE The light control switch can be oper- ated (except auto on/off headlights), even under the following conditions. . when the key is not inserted into the ignition switch (models without key- less access with push-button start system) . when the push-button ignition switch is turned off (models with key- less access with push-button start system)

If the drivers door is opened while the headlights are illuminated under such conditions, the chirp sound will inform the driver that the lights are illumi- nated.

& Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal lever.

position Instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

position Instrument panel illumination, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

CONTINUED

3-93

3

Black plate (246,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

position: auto on/off headlights (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side mar- ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the level of the ambient light.

position The headlights are all off.

NOTE The sensitivity of the auto on/off head- lights can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for models with a multi function display, the setting can be changed using the display. For details, refer to Auto light sensor sensitivity setting F3-85.

! Welcome lighting function (if equipped)

The welcome lighting function turns on the low beam headlights for smooth ap- proaching to or exiting from the vehicle at night or in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the following conditions are met. . The light control switch is in the

AUTO position . It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/ off headlights

When approaching: While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will automatically illuminate when unlocking the doors (including the rear gate) by using the remote keyless entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain illuminated for 30 seconds*1 and then turn off. However, if any of the following operations is performed, the low beam headlights will turn off. . The doors are locked. . The light control switch is turned to a position other than AUTO. . The ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

When exiting: While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will remain illuminated even when either of the following operations is performed. . The push-button ignition switch is turned to the OFF status (models with keyless access with push-button start system) . The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without keyless access with push-button start system)

The low beam headlights will turn off under any of the following conditions. . 3 minutes have passed since the low beam headlights were illuminated by the welcome lighting function. . 30 seconds have passed since the door is opened and closed.*1

. The light control switch is turned to a position other than AUTO. . The locking procedure is performed twice. When performing the unlocking procedure after performing the locking procedure, perform the locking procedure twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which the low beam headlights remain on by the welcome lighting function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

3-94

Black plate (247,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Sensor for the auto on/off head- lights (if equipped)

The sensor is on the instrument panel as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the sensor, the sensor may not detect the level of the ambient light cor- rectly and the auto on/off headlights may not operate properly.

& High/low beam change (dimmer)

To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever forward. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light on the combina- tion meter is also on. To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the center position.

! High beam assist function (if equipped)

NOTE . The high beam assist function uti- lizes the stereo camera installed at the position of the front map lights. . For details on how to handle the stereo camera, refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight

system.

The high beam assist function automati- cally changes the headlight from high beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are met, the headlight will change to high beam. . When the vehicle speed increases to or above 20 mph (32 km/h). . There is no preceding or oncoming vehicle. . The forward area of the vehicle is dark. . The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions is met, the headlight will change to low beam. . When the vehicle speed decreases to or below 10 mph (16 km/h). . When the forward area of the vehicle is bright. . When there is a preceding or oncoming vehicle. . When the EyeSight system is malfunc- tioning or is temporarily stopped.

NOTE The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as operational. This setting can be changed to OFF (non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

CONTINUED

3-95

3

Black plate (248,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

! How to use the high beam assist function

The high beam assist function will be activated when all the following conditions are met. . The light control switch is in the AUTO position and the low beam head- lights are on automatically. . The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

High beam assist indicator

When the high beam assist function is activated, the high beam assist indicator on the combination meter will illuminate.

NOTE If the high beam assist function is malfunctioning or is temporarily stopped, the headlight will be fixed at low beam. For details, refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

! How to temporarily lower the sensitivity of the high beam assist function

The sensitivity of the high beam assist function can be lowered by performing the following operations. 1. Before turning the ignition switch to the ON position, set the light control switch to the AUTO position and push the signal lever forward (high beam position). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and within approximately 15 seconds, press the (following dis- tance setting) switch more than 10 times consecutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam assist function is lowered, the high beam assist indicator light on the combina- tion meter will flash.

NOTE . The sensitivity of the high beam assist function cannot be lowered in the following conditions.

Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Control is in operation The EyeSight warning indicator (yellow) is illuminated

. The sensitivity of the high beam assist function returns to normal level the next time the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position and the engine is restarted.

! How to change the headlight mode manually

Change to the low beam: When you return the turn signal lever to the center position, the high beam assist function will turn off and the high beam assist indicator will turn off.

Change to the high beam: When you turn the light control switch to the position, the headlight mode will be changed to the high beam. At this time, the high beam assist function will turn off, the high beam assist indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator light will turn on.

3-96

Black plate (249,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

NOTE . After manually changing the head- light mode to the high beam, if you turn on the high beam assist function, return the light control switch to the AUTO position. . When manually changing the head- light mode to the high beam, if you turn the light control switch to the position, the instrument panel illumina- tion, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights will be on.

! Tips for the high beam assist system

. The high beam assist function recog- nizes the condition surrounding the vehi- cle based on the brightness of illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the headlight mode may switch in some situations that do not match to the drivers sense. . A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be detected. . Under the following situations, the brightness of ambient illumination may not be detected correctly and the high beam assist function may not work prop- erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam may disturb the driving of an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low

beam mode may continue although there are no oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead. In the such cases, change the headlight mode manually.

In bad weather (fog, snow, sand storm, heavy rain, etc.) When the windshield glass is dirty or fogged When the windshield is cracked or damaged When the stereo camera is de- formed or the stereo camera lenses are dirty If there are lights similar to the headlights or the tail lights in the surrounding area When an oncoming vehicle or ve- hicle ahead is driven without its head- lights and tail lights on If the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the light beams are not aimed correctly When a rapid change of brightness continues while driving When driving on a road with many ups and downs or uneven surfaces When driving on a road with many curves When there are some objects that reflect light strongly, such as a road sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead

When the rear part of the vehicle ahead, such as a container, reflects light strongly When the headlights of your vehicle are damaged or dirty When your vehicle is tilted, such as in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is being towed Immediately after the engine has started

. In the following conditions, the head- light mode will not be automatically chan- ged from the high beam to the low beam.

When your vehicle passes an on- coming vehicle suddenly in a blind curve When another vehicle passes in front of your vehicle When an oncoming vehicle or ve- hicle ahead comes in and out of view because of continuous curves, median strips, roadside trees, etc.

. If the stereo camera detects the light of the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle, the headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam automatically. . The headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam, or the low beam mode may continue, when affected by a street light, traffic signal, illumination of an advertisement board, or a reflective object such as a road sign and signboard.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

CONTINUED

3-97

3

Black plate (250,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

. The timing of the change of headlight mode may differ due to the following factors.

Color or brightness of the head- lights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead The headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle ahead are covered with mud, snow, etc. Movement and direction of an on- coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead When the headlights of an oncom- ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead illuminate on only one side When the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is a motorcycle Conditions of a road (slope, curve, road surface, etc.) Number of passengers and weight of loaded cargo Limitation of the detection ability of the stereo camera

& Headlight flasher

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a few seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever. The headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the (off) position.

When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light on the combination meter also illuminates.

& Daytime running light system

WARNING

The brightness of the illumination of the high beam headlights is reduced by the daytime running light system. The light switch must always be turned to the position when it is dark outside.

The high beam headlights will automati- cally illuminate at reduced brightness when the following conditions are fulfilled. . The engine is running. . The parking brake is fully released. . The light control switch is in the AUTO (if equipped), or off position. . For CVT models, the select lever is in a position other than the P position.

NOTE . When the hazard warning flasher is on, the daytime running lights will not operate. . When the turn signal is activated, the daytime running light will not operate for the side on which the turn signal is flashing. . When the light switch is in the position, the instrument panel illumina- tion, front side marker lights, tail lights

3-98

Black plate (251,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

and license plate lights are also illumi- nated. . For models with the auto on/off headlights, while the light control switch is in the AUTO position and the system is activated to the auto-on mode depending on the ambient light level, the high beam headlights that have illuminated at reduced brightness turn off, and the low beam headlights turn on alternatively. At this time, the instrument panel illumination, front side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are also illuminated.

! Models with LED headlights

For models with LED headlights, the parking lights are illuminated by the day- time running light system.

Steering Responsive Head- light (SRH) (if equipped)

1) The target area of illumination when SRH is activated

2) The target area of illumination when SRH is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically moves the headlight beam to the left or right in accordance with the steering angle and vehicle speed. This function helps to improve the visibility at night by illuminat- ing the road ahead at corners and inter- sections.

NOTE SRH only activates when the vehicle is traveling forward at the speed of ap- proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and over.

& SRH OFF switch

You can turn the SRH function on or off by pressing the SRH OFF switch.

Type A combination meter

Instruments and controls/Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

CONTINUED

3-99

3

Black plate (252,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever

Type B combination meter 1) SRH OFF indicator 2) Warning screen

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina- tion meter turns off when SRH is turned on.

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina- tion meter illuminates when SRH is turned off.

For models with type A combination meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF indicator on the combination meter blinks when the ignition switch is in the ON position. It indicates that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection. For models with type B combination meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, a mes- sage appears on the warning screen when the ignition switch is in the ON position. It indicates that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec- tion.

NOTE . If you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position with SRH turned off and then start the engine again, SRH will automatically turn on. . When you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, the SRH OFF indi- cator will illuminate and turn off after several seconds.

Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal lever up. To activate the left turn signal, push the turn signal lever down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. If the lever does not return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The turn signal indicator lights will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever will return automatically to the neutral position when you release it.

3-100

Black plate (253,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& One-touch lane changer To flash the turn signal and turn signal indicator light three times, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and immediately release it.

The operational/non-operational setting of the one-touch lane changer can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

Illumination brightness con- trol

The illumination brightness of the instru- ment panel dims under the following conditions. . when the light switch is in the or position . when the light control switch is in the AUTO position and the headlights illumi- nate automatically (models with auto on/ off headlights: Refer to Headlights F3- 93.)

You can also adjust the illumination bright- ness for better visibility in the following ways.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

For models with the multi function display, the display automatically adjusts its bright- ness together with the brightness level of the instrument panel. To adjust the dis- plays contrast, refer to Contrast setting F3-66.

NOTE . When the control dial is turned fully upward, the illumination brightness becomes the maximum and the auto- matic dimming function does not work at all. . The brightness setting is not can- celed even when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position.

Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control 3-101

3

Black plate (254,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler

Headlight beam leveler (if equipped)

& Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)

The LED headlights generate more light than conventional halogen headlights. Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle may experience too much glare if your headlight beam height adjustment is high when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load. The automatic headlight beam leveler adjusts the headlight beam height auto- matically and optimally according to the load being carried by the vehicle.

Fog light switch (if equipped)

1) Headlight switch 2) Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch is placed in the position while the headlights are in the following condition. . while the headlight switch is in the position . for models with the auto on/off head- lights, while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the headlights turn on automatically

To turn off the front fog lights, turn the switch back down to the position.

Front fog light indicator (type A)

Front fog light indicator (type B)

The indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate when the front fog lights are illuminated.

3-102

Black plate (255,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Steering responsive fog lights system (if equipped)

The steering responsive fog lights system automatically turns the front fog light on and off based on the steering angle and vehicle speed when entering a curve or driving on curved roads. The system is intended to help prevent accidents by enabling better visibility of curves ahead and early recognition of any disabled vehicles or other obstacles.

The front fog light on the inside of a curve will turn on if all of the following conditions are met. . The light control switch is in the position, or the light control switch is in the AUTO position and the low beam head- lights are turned on automatically . The fog light switch is in the position . The low beam mode is selected . The select lever is in the D position or the manual mode is selected . The steering responsive fog lights system has not been deactivated . The operating conditions such as the steering angle and vehicle speed are met

The front fog lights on both sides will turn on as usual if all of the following conditions are met.

. The light control switch is in either of the following positions.

in the position in the AUTO position and the low beam headlights turn on automatically

. The fog light switch is in the position . The low beam mode is selected

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch

Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch

Press this switch to deactivate the steer- ing responsive fog lights system. Press the switch again to activate the system.

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indica- tor

This indicator on the combination meter illuminates when the steering responsive fog lights system is deactivated. This indicator turns off when the system is activated.

Instruments and controls/Fog light switch 3-103

3

Black plate (256,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the wind- shield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con- tinuously for more than 10 sec- onds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and might cause the wiper motor to fail. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window, always use the wind- shield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to the window glass could cause not only the wiper blades to be damaged but also might cause the wiper motor to fail. If the wiper blades are frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear win- dow defogger before turning on the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera- tion because of ice or some other obstruction on the window, this might cause the wiper motor to fail even if the wiper switch is turned off. I f this occurs, promptly stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF po- sition and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper op- eration.

. Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent. Refer to Windshield washer fluid F11-30.

Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing tempera- tures, use non-freezing type wi- per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.

NOTE . The windshield wiper motor is pro- tected against overloads by a circuit breaker. If the motor operates continu- ously under an unusually heavy load, the circuit breaker may trip to stop the motor temporarily. If this happens, park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the wiper switch, and wait for approxi- mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker will reset itself, and the wipers will again operate normally. . Clean your wiper blades and win- dow glass periodically with a washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations of road salt or road film. Operate the windshield washer for at least 1 second so that

3-104

Black plate (257,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window. . Grease, wax, insects or other mate- rial on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove those streaks after operating the washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer sur- face of the windshield or rear window and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper blades with clean water. The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with water. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, replace the wiper blades with new ones. For replacement instructions, refer to Replacement of wiper blades F11-32.

& Windshield wiper and washer switches

The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

! Windshield wipers

: Mist (for a single wipe)

: Off

: Intermittent

: Low speed

: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the lever up. The wipers operate until you release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control

When the wiper switch is in the position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- ing interval of the wiper. The operating interval can be adjusted in several steps from the shortest interval to the longest.

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

CONTINUED

3-105

3

Black plate (258,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

! Windshield washer

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper control lever toward you. The washer fluid sprays until you release the lever. The wipers operate while you pull the lever.

NOTE

Windshield washer fluid warning light (type A)

Windshield washer fluid warning light (type B)

The windshield washer fluid warning light illuminates when the washer fluid level in the tank has dropped to the lower limit. If the warning light illumi- nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the refilling procedure, refer to Wind- shield washer fluid F11-30.

& Rear window wiper and washer switch

: Washer (accompanied by wiper op- eration)

: Continuous

: Intermittent

: Off

: Washer (accompanied by wiper op- eration)

3-106

Black plate (259,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob switch upward. To turn the wiper off, return the knob switch to the position.

With the switch turned to the posi- tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit- tently at intervals corresponding to the vehicle speed. In this position, when you move the select lever to the R position (CVT models) or the shift lever to the reverse position (MT models), the rear wiper will switch to continuous operation. When you move the select lever/shift lever from the R (reverse) position to another position, the rear wiper will return to intermittent operation.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs the rear wiper operation on the rear gate. Doing so may damage the rear wiper when it operates.

NOTE Even if the rear wiper switch is in the position, while the shift lever/ select lever is in the R position with the windshield wiper operating con- tinuously, the rear wiper will operate

intermittently.

! Washer

To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating, turn the knob switch upward to the position. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob. To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch downward to the position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving.

& Inside mirror

The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you for the night position. Push it away for the day position. The night position reduces glare from head- lights.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

CONTINUED

3-107

3

Black plate (260,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

& Auto-dimming mirror/com- pass (if equipped)

1) Display 2) Switch

Congratulations! Your new automobile is equipped with an automatic dimming mirror manufactured by Gentex Corpora- tion. During nighttime driving, the auto- dimming feature senses distracting glare from vehicle headlights behind you and automatically dims to eliminate the glare and preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea- ture

Press the switch to turn the auto- dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switchs green LED indicator is on. The auto- dimming feature will default to on with each ignition cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds or until the display turns on/off. The compass feature will default to on with each ignition cycle. 2. If the display reads C, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

Compass calibration zones

3. To adjust for compass zone variance: (1) Find your current location and zone number on the map. (2) Press and hold the switch for more than 6 seconds or until a zone number appears in the display. (3) Once the zone number appears in the display, toggle the switch again until your current location zone number appears. After you stop press- ing the switch, your new zone number will be saved. Within a few seconds, the display will show a compass direction.

4. If the vehicles magnetics have chan- ged or if the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass. Press and hold the switch for more than 9 seconds or until a C appears in the display. Once a C appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is cali- brated.

3-108

Black plate (261,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Auto-dimming mirror/com- pass with HomeLink (if equipped)

1) Display 2) HomeLink Buttons 3) Switch

Congratulations! Your new automobile is equipped with an automatic dimming mirror manufactured by Gentex Corpora- tion. During nighttime driving, the auto- dimming feature senses distracting glare from vehicle headlights behind you and automatically dims to eliminate the glare and preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea- ture

Press the switch to turn the auto- dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switchs green LED indicator is on. The auto- dimming feature will default to on with each ignition cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds or until the display turns on/off. The compass feature will default to on with each ignition cycle. 2. If the display reads C, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

Compass calibration zones

3. To adjust for compass zone variance: (1) Find your current location and zone number on the map. (2) Press and hold the switch for more than 6 seconds or until a zone number appears in the display. (3) Once the zone number appears in the display, toggle the switch again until your current location zone number appears. After you stop press- ing the switch, your new zone number will be saved. Within a few seconds, the display will show a compass direction.

4. If the vehicles magnetics have chan- ged or if the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass. Press and hold the switch for more than 9 seconds or

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

CONTINUED

3-109

3

Black plate (262,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

until a C appears in the display. Once a C appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is cali- brated.

! HomeLink Wireless Control Sys- tem

The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency re- motes used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink web- site. Additional information and program- ming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage.

. When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park

outside of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any gar- age door opener model manufac- tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety stan- dards.

. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate train- ing.

. Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the ON or ACC position for pro- gramming and/or operation of HomeLink.

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar- age door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink program- ming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to Erasing HomeLink But- tons F3-113.

! Programming a New HomeLink Button

1) Indicator Light 2) HomeLink Buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink button that you would like to program. The HomeLink indicator light will flash orange slowly (if not, refer to Erasing HomeLink Buttons F3-113).

3-110

Black plate (263,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

1) Garage door opener remote

2. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button that you would like to program.

NOTE Some hand-held remotes (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches (15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process.

3. While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and hold the hand- held remote button. Continue pressing the hand-held remote button until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE Some devices may require you to replace this Programming a New HomeLink Button step 3 with proce- dures noted in the Gate Operator / Canadian Programming section. Refer to Gate Operator / Canadian Program- ming F3-113.

1) Indicator Light

4. Press the HomeLink button that you would like to program and observe the indicator light.

. If the indicator light remains con- stant green, your device should oper- ate when the HomeLink button is pressed. At this point, if your device operates, programming is complete. . If the indicator light rapidly flashes green, firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button up to three times to complete the programming process. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. If the device does not operate, continue with the next step of the programming instructions.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

CONTINUED

3-111

3

Black plate (264,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

1) Learn button

5. At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc...) locate the Learn, Smart, or Program button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor- head unit (see the devices manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps.

6. Firmly press and release the Learn, Smart, or Program button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button up to three times. At this point programming is complete and your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

1) Status Indicators

8. If status indicator arrows appear next to the indicator light, please refer to Garage Door Two-Way Communication F3-113.

In the event that there are still program- ming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink web- site.

3-112

Black plate (265,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- gramming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmis- sion, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are de- signed to time-out in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device times out, indicating that it has finished transmit- ting.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the program- ming procedures, replace Programming a New HomeLink Button step 3 with the following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and release (cy- cle) your devices hand-held remote every two seconds until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand- held remote button.

NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the cycling pro- cess to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with Programming a New HomeLink Button step 4 to complete.

! Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, secur- ity system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand- held remote of the device may also be used at any time.

! Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed as outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED indicator will change from continuously lit to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. HomeLink is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with Programming a New HomeLink Button - step 1.

! Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button

To program a previously trained button, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly flash orange after 20 seconds. The HomeLink button can be released at this point. Proceed with Programming a New HomeLink Button - step 3. 3. If you do not complete the program- ming of a new device to the button, it will revert to the previously stored program- ming.

! Garage Door Two-Way Commu- nication

HomeLink has the capability of commu- nicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink can receive and display clos- ing or opening status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink can also recall and display the last recorded status commu- nicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being closed or opened.

HomeLink has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

CONTINUED

3-113

3

Black plate (266,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

Range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.

! Programming Two-Way Commu- nication

1) Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a new HomeLink button, both of HomeLinks garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status indicators flashed, two-way communica- tion programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not flash, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

! Using Two-Way Communication

1) Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink by simulta- neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and 2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display the last recorded status for three seconds.

1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blink- ing Orange)

2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green)

3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink- ing Orange)

4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green)

If two-way communication programming is successful, HomeLink will display the status of your garage door opener with arrow indicators.

! Certification

In the event that there are still program- ming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

3-114

Black plate (267,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE . This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interfer- ence that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. . This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operat- ing instructions for satisfying RF ex- posure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operat- ing in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

. The term IC: before the certifica- tion/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi- cations were met.

HomeLink and the HomeLink House

logo are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the convex mirror to judge the distance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to determine the actual size and dis- tance of objects that you view in convex mirror.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

CONTINUED

3-115

3

Black plate (268,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer

! Remote control mirror switch

: Select side to adjust : Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. 1. Turn the control switch to the side that you want to adjust. L is for the left mirror, R is for the right mirror. 2. Move the control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror. 3. Return the control switch to the neutral position to prevent unintentional opera- tion.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- ally.

Defogger and deicer

1) Rear window defogger 2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped) 3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The defogger and deicer system is acti-

vated only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Climate control system type A and type B

Climate control system type C and type D

To activate the defogger and deicer system, press the control switch that is

3-116

Black plate (269,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

located on the climate control panel. The rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and windshield wiper deicer are activated simultaneously. The indicator light on the control switch illuminates while the defogger and deicer system is acti- vated.

To turn them off, press the control switch again. They also turn off when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK/ OFF position.

The defogger and deicer system will automatically shut off after approximately 15 minutes. If the rear window and the outside mirrors have been cleared and the windshield wiper blades have been deiced completely before that time, press the control switch to turn them off. If defrost- ing, defogging or deicing is not complete, you have to press the control switch to turn them on again.

For models with the automatic climate control system (type B, C and D), it is possible for the defogger and deicer system to be set to continuous operation mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for models with a multi function display, the setting can be changed using the display. For details, refer to Multi function display F3-44.

If the battery voltage drops below the permissible level, continuous operation of the defogger and deicer system is can- celed and the system stops operating.

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the defogger and deicer system con- tinuously for any longer than necessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra- sives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on the window.

NOTE . Turn on the defogger and deicer system if the wipers are frozen to the windshield. . If the windshield is covered with snow, remove the snow so that the windshield wiper deicer works effec- tively. . While the defogger and deicer sys- tem is in the continuous operation mode, if the vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes, the windshield wiper deicer

automatically stops operating, though the rear window defogger and outside mirror defogger maintain continuous operation in this condition. . While the defogger and deicer sys- tem is in the continuous operation mode, if the battery voltage drops below the permissible level, continu- ous operation of the defogger and deicer system is canceled and the system stops operating.

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer 3-117

3

Black plate (270,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt/telescopic position while driv- ing. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to the fixed position, adjust the steering wheel again. It is dan- gerous to drive without locking the steering wheel. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.

1) Tilt adjustment 2) Telescopic adjustment

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to Front seats F1-2. 2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down. 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level. 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down, and forward and backward.

Horn

1) Horn mark

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

3-118

Black plate (271,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Heated Steering Wheel sys- tem (if equipped)

The Heated Steering Wheel system is a function that warms the surface tempera- ture of the steering wheel at the constant temperature. Pull the Heated Steering Wheel switch to warm the steering wheel when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Then, the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.

1) Heated Steering Wheel switch 2) Indicator light 3) Heated area

Pull the switch again to turn the Heated Steering Wheel system off manually. The indicator light will turn off.

CAUTION

. If you use the Heated Steering Wheel system without the engine running, the battery voltage may drop below the permissible level and it may not be possible to start the engine.

. There is a possibility that people with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low tempera- tures if they use the Heated Steering Wheel for a long period of time. When using the Heated Steering Wheel, always be sure to warn the persons concerned.

. Do not cover the Heated Steering Wheel with an object such as a steering wheel cover. Doing so may cause the Heated Steering Wheel to overheat.

NOTE . If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is approximately above 1048F (408C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steer- ing wheel. Then, the indicator light will continue to illuminate. . The Heated Steering Wheel system is equipped with a 30-minute timer. The

system will automatically turn off ap- proximately 30 minutes after the switch has been turned on.

Instruments and controls/Heated Steering Wheel system 3-119

3

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22 Left Page

Black plate (9,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Ventilator control................................................. 4-2 Center and side ventilators.................................. 4-2

Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3 Type A ................................................................ 4-3 Type B ................................................................ 4-4 Type C ................................................................ 4-5 Type D ................................................................ 4-6

Automatic climate control operation (type B, C and D) ....................................................... 4-7 Type B ................................................................ 4-7 Type C and D ...................................................... 4-7 Sensors .............................................................. 4-8

Manual climate control operation ...................... 4-8 Airflow mode selection ........................................ 4-8 Temperature control ............................................ 4-9 Fan speed control .............................................. 4-10 Air conditioner control ....................................... 4-10 Air inlet selection ............................................... 4-10

Defrosting........................................................... 4-11 Type A and B..................................................... 4-11 Type C............................................................... 4-11 Type D............................................................... 4-11

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner ...................................................... 4-12 Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-12 Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight ........................................................... 4-12

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit.............................................................. 4-12

Checking air conditioning system before summer season ............................................................ 4-12

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-12

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12 Air filtration system........................................... 4-13

Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-13

Climate control

4

Black plate (276,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Climate control/Ventilator control

Ventilator control

& Center and side ventilators

Center ventilators 1) Open 2) Close

Side ventilators 1) Open 2) Close

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab. To open or close the ventilator, turn the thumb-wheel up or down.

4-2

Black plate (277,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Climate control panel

& Type A

1) Temperature control dial (Refer to Tem- perature control F4-9.)

2) Air conditioner button (Refer to Air conditioner control F4-10.)

3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to Fan speed control F4-10.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to Air inlet selection F4-10.)

5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to Airflow mode selection F4-8.)

6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-116.)

Climate control/Climate control panel

CONTINUED

4-3

4

Black plate (278,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Climate control/Climate control panel

& Type B 1) Temperature control dial (Refer to Auto- matic climate control operation (type B, C and D) F4-7 and/or Temperature con- trol F4-9.)

2) Air conditioner button (Refer to Air conditioner control F4-10.)

3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to Auto- matic climate control operation (type B, C and D) F4-7 and/or Fan speed control F4-10.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to Air inlet selection F4-10.)

5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to Automatic climate control operation (type B, C and D) F4-7 and/or Airflow mode selection F4-8.)

6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-116.)

NOTE The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle.

4-4

Black plate (279,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Type C 1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to Airflow mode selection F4-8.)

2) Defroster button (Refer to Airflow mode selection F4-8.)

3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-116.)

4) Fan speed control dial (Refer to Fan speed control F4-10.)

5) Air conditioner button (Refer to Air conditioner control F4-10.)

6) Air inlet selection button (Refer to Air inlet selection F4-10.)

7) Temperature control dial (Refer to Auto- matic climate control operation (type B, C and D) F4-7 and/or Temperature con- trol F4-9.)

8) AUTO button (Refer to Automatic cli- mate control operation (type B, C and D) F4-7.)

9) OFF button (Refer to Automatic climate control operation (type B, C and D) F4- 7.)

Climate control/Climate control panel

CONTINUED

4-5

4

Black plate (280,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Climate control/Climate control panel

& Type D 1) Temperature control dial (Refer to Auto- matic climate control operation (type B, C and D) F4-7 and/or Temperature con- trol F4-9.)

2) Defroster button (Refer to Airflow mode selection F4-8.)

3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-116.)

4) DUAL mode button (Refer to DUAL mode (type D) F4-10.)

5) Fan speed control dial (Refer to Fan speed control F4-10.)

6) Air conditioner button (Refer to Air conditioner control F4-10.)

7) Air inlet selection button (Refer to Air inlet selection F4-10.)

8) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to Airflow mode selection F4-8.)

9) Temperature control dial (Refer to Auto- matic climate control operation (type B, C and D) F4-7 and/or Temperature con- trol F4-9.)

10) AUTO button (Refer to Automatic cli- mate control operation (type B, C and D) F4-7.)

11) OFF button (Refer to Automatic climate control operation (type B, C and D) F4- 7.)

4-6

Black plate (281,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Automatic climate control operation (type B, C and D)

When this mode is selected, the fan speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air conditioner compressor operation are automatically controlled. To activate this mode, perform the following.

NOTE . Operate the automatic climate con- trol system when the engine is running. . Even when cooling is not necessary, setting the temperature much lower than the current outlet air temperature turns on the air conditioner compres- sor automatically and the A/C indi- cator light on the control panel illumi- nates.

& Type B 1. Turn the airflow mode selection dial and fan speed control dial to the AUTO position. 2. Set the preferred temperature using the temperature control dial.

NOTE . Each function can be individually set to the AUTO mode independently of the other functions. Any function set to

the AUTO mode is controlled automa- tically. Any function not set to the AUTO mode can be manually adjusted as desired. . The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle.

3. To turn off the climate control system, turn the fan speed control dial to the OFF position. Then the air inlet selection will be set as follows.

. when the AUTO mode is selected: OFF (outside air) . when the AUTO mode is not selected: the mode that was selected when turning off the climate system will be selected.

& Type C and D 1. Depress the AUTO button. The indicator light FULL AUTO on the display illuminates. 2. Set the preferred temperature using the temperature control dial.

NOTE . The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle. . During FULL AUTO mode operation, a small amount of air may flow from the foot outlets when ventilation mode is

displayed. . If you operate any of the buttons on the control panel other than the OFF button, rear window defogger button and temperature control dial(s) during FULL AUTO mode operation, the FULL indicator light on the control panel will turn off and the AUTO indicator light will remain illuminated. You can then manually control the system as desired using the button you operated. To change the system back to the FULL AUTO mode, press the AUTO button.

3. To turn off the climate control system, press the OFF button. Then the air inlet selection will be set to OFF (outside air).

Climate control/Automatic climate control operation (type B, C and D)

CONTINUED

4-7

4

Black plate (282,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

& Sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor 2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system employs several sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are not treated

properly and become damaged, the sys- tem may not be able to control the interior temperature correctly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the following pre- cautions. Do not subject the sensors to impact. Keep water away from the sensors. Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows. Solar sensor: beside the windshield defroster grille Interior air temperature sensor: next to the steering column Outside temperature sensor: near the front bumper opening

Manual climate control op- eration

& Airflow mode selection To select the airflow mode: Type A, B and C: Turn the airflow mode selection dial. Type D: Press the airflow mode selection button.

To select the defrost mode: Type A and B: Turn the airflow mode selection dial. Type C and D: Press the defroster button.

Airflow modes are as follows.

(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets

4-8

Black plate (283,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets

(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of the instrument panel and some through windshield defroster outlets (A small amount of air flows to the windshield and

both side windows to prevent fogging.)

(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets, foot outlets and both side outlets of the instrument panel (Refer to Defrosting F4-11.)

(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets

and both side outlets of the instrument panel (Refer to Defrosting F4-11.)

& Temperature control

! Type A

Turn the temperature control dial over a range from the blue side (cool) to red side (warm) to regulate the temperature of airflow from the air outlets.

! Type B, C and D

Turn the temperature control dial to set the preferred interior temperature. With the dial set to your preferred temperature, the system automatically adjusts the tempera- ture of air supplied from the outlets so that the preferred temperature is achieved and maintained. If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise, the system provides maximum cooling performance. If the dial is turned fully clockwise, the system provides maximum heating performance.

NOTE The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle.

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

CONTINUED

4-9

4

Black plate (284,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

! DUAL mode (type D)

a) Drivers side temperature b) Front passengers side temperature

You can change the setting of the drivers side and front passengers side tempera- ture independently by selecting the DUAL mode.

You can select the DUAL mode by performing either of the following proce- dures. . Press the DUAL button . Turn the passengers side temperature control dial

The DUAL mode can be canceled by pressing the DUAL button. When the DUAL mode is canceled, only the drivers side temperature is displayed.

When the DUAL mode is selected: Turn the drivers side dial to set the drivers side temperature. Turn the front passengers side dial to set the front passengers side temperature.

When the DUAL mode is canceled: Set the desired temperature by turning the drivers side dial.

& Fan speed control The fan operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Select the preferred fan speed by turning the fan speed control dial.

& Air conditioner control The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running. Press the air conditioner button while the fan is in operation to turn on the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the A/C indicator light illuminates. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again.

NOTE For efficient defogging or dehumidify- ing in cold weather, turn on the air conditioner. However, if the ambient temperature decreases to approxi- mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner

compressor will stop operating.

& Air inlet selection Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet selection button.

ON position (recirculation): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the air inlet selection button to the ON position for fast cooling with the air conditioner or when driving on a dusty road.

OFF position (outside air): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Press the air inlet selection button to the OFF position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature and the road is no longer dusty.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi- tion may fog up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside conditions are no longer dusty.

NOTE . When the indicator light on the air inlet selection button is flashing at engine starting, a malfunction might be occurring in the electrical system.

4-10

Black plate (285,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Contact your SUBARU dealer for in- spection. . The indicator light on the air inlet selection button may flash in the following cases. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

After the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnected. When the vehicle battery voltage is low.

Defrosting

& Type A and B Select the or mode by turning the airflow mode selection dial to defrost or to dehumidify the windshield and front door windows.

& Type C Select the mode by pressing the defroster button, or select the mode by turning the airflow mode selection dial to defrost or to dehumidify the windshield and front door windows.

& Type D Select the mode by pressing the defroster button, or select the mode by pressing the airflow mode selection button to defrost or to dehumidify the windshield and front door windows.

NOTE . When the or mode is selected, the air conditioner compres- sor operates automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defrost the windshield more quickly. However the indicator on the air conditioner button will not illumi- nate. At the same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to the outside air mode. For type A climate control system, in this state:

You cannot stop the air condi- tioner compressor by pressing the air conditioner button. You cannot select the recircula- tion mode by pressing the air inlet selection button.

. For type C and D climate control system, after defrosting the windshield by pressing the defroster button , pressing the button again returns the system to the setting that had been selected before the defroster was acti- vated.

Climate control/Defrosting 4-11

4

Black plate (286,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Climate control/Operating tips for heater and air conditioner

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner

& Cleaning ventilation grille

1) Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cooling efficiency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning system before summer sea- son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper operation each spring. Have the air con- ditioning system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

& Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low tem- perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning system.

& Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air condi- tioner operation whenever the accelerator is fully depressed such as during rapid acceleration or when driving up a steep incline.

& Refrigerant for your climate control system

1) Air conditioner label

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

4-12

Black plate (287,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

refrigerant HFC134a (as shown on the air conditioner label). Therefore, the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is different from the method for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty.

Air filtration system

Your vehicles air conditioning system is equipped with an air filtration system. Replace the air filter element according to the replacement schedule found in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. This schedule should be followed to maintain the filters dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the following occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the filter:

. Reduction of the airflow through the vents.

. Windshield gets easily fogged or misted.

NOTE The filter can influence the air condi- tioning, heating and defroster perfor- mance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing an air filter 1. Remove the glove box.

NOTE We recommend that you take mea- sures to protect the center console with masking tape first, so that you avoid scratching the center console with the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the glove box.

Climate control/Air filtration system

CONTINUED

4-13

4

Black plate (288,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Climate control/Air filtration system

1) Stopper

(3) Push in the stoppers located on both sides of the glove box and then pull down the glove box as far as it will go.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion. When doing this, be careful not to damage the hinge.

2. Remove the air filter according to the following procedure in order to prevent dust on the air cleaner from falling to the inside of its housing.

(1) Push in the four stoppers to unlock, and then slowly pull out the air filter 4 in (10 cm) from the housing. (2) Completely pull out the air filter by gently tilting the front side of the air filter downward.

3. Replace the air filter element with a new one.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must point UP.

4-14

Black plate (289,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect the damper shaft. 5. Close the glove box.

Climate control/Air filtration system 4-15

4

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22 Left Page

Black plate (11,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Antenna................................................................ 5-2 Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-2

Audio set ............................................................. 5-3 Base display audio set (if equipped) .................... 5-4 STARLINKTM 7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set (U.S. spec. models only, if equipped) ................. 5-6

Tips for operating the audio/visual system........... 5-7 Basic information before use.............................. 5-15 Basic operation.................................................. 5-18 Unit settings ...................................................... 5-19 SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) ....................... 5-26 AM/FM radio....................................................... 5-28 SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if equipped) ................. 5-37 ahaTM by HARMAN ............................................. 5-44 Pandora (if equipped) ....................................... 5-50 CD ..................................................................... 5-53 USB memory...................................................... 5-55 iPod................................................................... 5-56 Bluetooth audio.................................................. 5-58 AUX................................................................... 5-61

Steering switches for audio .............................. 5-63 Bluetooth settings............................................ 5-66

Regulatory information ....................................... 5-66

Registering/connecting Bluetooth device .......... 5-66 Setting Bluetooth details .................................... 5-69

Hands-free phone system................................. 5-71 Control screen................................................... 5-72 Registering/connecting a Bluetooth phone ......... 5-73 Using the phone switch/microphone................... 5-73 How to change the hands-free phone system ..... 5-73 Making a call ..................................................... 5-74 Receiving a call ................................................. 5-77 Talking on the phone ......................................... 5-78 Phone settings .................................................. 5-79

Voice command system .................................... 5-81 Using the voice command system...................... 5-82 Voice command system operation...................... 5-83 Command list .................................................... 5-85

What to do if....................................................... 5-89 Troubleshooting................................................. 5-89

Appendix ............................................................ 5-93 Certification....................................................... 5-93 Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-93 Certification for Mexico models .......................... 5-94

Audio

5

Black plate (292,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Antenna

Antenna

& Roof antenna

CAUTION

. Be sure to remove the antenna rod before entering garages, parking towers and other loca- tions with low ceilings.

. Remove the antenna rod before washing your car at a car wash. If the antenna rod is left attached, it may scratch the roof.

. When reinstalling the removed antenna rod, be sure to fully tighten it.

1) Unscrew 2) Remove

The roof antenna is installed in the center at the rear part of the roof.

The antenna rod can be removed by unscrewing it from its base.

& Roof antenna (for Shark fin type)

The SUBARU STARLINK antenna is installed in the center of the roof at the rear.

5-2

Black plate (293,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio set

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine SUBARU navigation system or audio system, refer to the separate navigation/ audio Owners Manual for details.

CAUTION

. Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the vehi- cle.

. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio/visual system on when the engine is not running.

NOTE . If a cell phone is placed near the audio set, it may cause the audio set to emit noise when the phone receives calls. This noise does not indicate an audio set malfunction. Note that a cell phone should not be placed near the audio set.

. Some functions may not be avail- able depending on the market and specifications of your vehicle. . The images shown in this Owners Manual are sample images. The actual images may vary depending on the market and specifications of your ve- hicle.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-3

5

Black plate (294,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

& Base display audio set (if equipped)

1) Power/VOLUME knob 2) Eject button 3) AUDIO/TUNE knob 4) HOME button

5) APPS button 6) Display 7) SEEK/TRACK buttons

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. . Power and audio controls: refer to Basic operation F5-18. . SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped): refer to SUBARU STARLINK F5-26. . Radio operation: refer to AM/FM radio F5-28. . Satellite radio operation (if equipped): refer to SiriusXM Satellite Radio F5-37. . ahaTM: refer to ahaTM by HARMAN F5-44. . Pandora (if equipped): refer to Pan- dora F5-50. . CD (compact disc) player operation: refer to CD F5-53. . USB storage device: refer to USB memory F5-55. . iPod operation: refer to iPod F5-56. . Bluetooth audio: refer to Bluetooth audio F5-58. . Auxiliary input jack: refer to AUX F5- 61. . Hands-free phone system: refer to Hands-free phone system F5-71.

5-4

Black plate (295,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

NOTE HD RadioTM Technology (if equipped) should be included as a feature in the base display audio set.

This display audio set is referred to as follows. . U.S. customers: STARLINKTM 6.2 Mul- timedia . Canadian customers: 6.2-inch infotain- ment system

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-5

5

Black plate (296,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

& STARLINKTM 7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set (U.S. spec. models only, if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

For details about how to use the STARLINKTM 7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set, refer to the STARLINKTM 7.0 Multi- media Plus or STARLINKTM 7.0 Multi- media Navigation Owners Manual.

NOTE HD Radio Technology should be in- cluded as a feature in the STARLINKTM

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set.

5-6

Black plate (297,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Tips for operating the audio/ visual system

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the audio/visual system:

. Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio/visual system.

. Do not put anything other than an appropriate disc into the disc slot.

NOTE The use of a cell phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio/visual system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

! Radio

Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with the radio it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or phone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther the vehicle is

from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as the vehicle moves.

Here, some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with the radio are described.

! FM

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40 km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmit- ter. They are often accompanied by distortion. Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicles antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception. Static and fluttering: These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering. Station swapping: If the FM signal being listened to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, the radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.

! AM

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere especially at night. These reflected signals can inter- fere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak. Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broad- cast. Static: AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening or electrical motors. This results in static.

! SiriusXM (if equipped)

. Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of SiriusXM Satellite Radio. . Alternation or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may in- validate the users right to operate the equipment.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-7

5

Black plate (298,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! CD player and disc

. This CD player is intended for use with 4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only. . Extremely high temperatures can keep the CD player from working. On hot days, use the air conditioning system to cool the inside of the vehicle before using the player. . Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make the CD player skip. . If moisture gets into the CD player, the discs may not be able to be played. Remove the discs from the player and wait until it dries.

WARNING

CD players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed out- side the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.

Audio CDs

. Use only discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your player:

SACD dts CD Copy-protected CD Video CD Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

5-8

Black plate (299,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

CAUTION

. Do not use special shaped, trans- parent/translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossi- ble to eject the disc.

. This system is not designed for use of Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs because they may cause damage to the player.

. Do not use discs with a protec- tion ring. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc.

. Do not use printable discs. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossi- ble to eject the disc.

1) Correct 2) Wrong

. Handle discs carefully, especially when inserting them. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting finger- prints on them, particularly on the shiny side. . Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.) . Remove discs from the players when not in use. Store them in their plastic cases away from moisture, heat and direct sunlight.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-9

5

Black plate (300,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint- free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti-static device.

! CD-R/RW discs

. CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been subject to the finalizing process (a process that allows discs to be played on a conventional CD player) cannot be played. . It may not be possible to play CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the

lens of the unit. . It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a personal computer depend- ing on the application settings and the environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the appropri- ate application manufacturers of the ap- plications.) . CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by direct exposure to sunlight, high tem- peratures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play some damaged discs. . If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player, playback will begin more slowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc. . Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played using the DDCD (Double Density CD) system.

! USB memory device

. USB communication formats: USB 1.1/2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps) . File formats: FAT 16/32 . Correspondence class: Mass storage class

! iPod

The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices can be used with this system.

Made for . iPod touch (5th generation)* . iPod touch (4th generation) . iPod touch (3rd generation) . iPod touch (2nd generation) . iPod touch (1st generation) . iPod classic . iPod nano (7th generation)* . iPod nano (6th generation)* . iPod nano (5th generation) . iPod nano (4th generation) . iPod nano (3rd generation) . iPod nano (2nd generation)* . iPod nano (1st generation)* . iPhone 5s* . iPhone 5c* . iPhone 5* . iPhone 4s . iPhone 4 . iPhone 3GS . iPhone 3G . iPhone

*: iPod video not supported

Depending on differences between mod- els or software versions etc., some mod- els might be incompatible with this sys- tem.

5-10

Black plate (301,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! File information

Compatible compressed files (Audio)

Item USB DISC

Compatible file format MP3/WMA/AAC

Folders in the device

Maximum 512

Maximum 255

Files in the device

Maximum 8000

Maximum 512

Files per folder

Maximum 255

Corresponding sampling frequency (Audio)

File type Frequency (kHz)

MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32/44.1/48

MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 16/22.05/24

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)

32/48/64/80/96/128/ 160/192

AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC

48/44.1/32/24/22.05/ 16/12/11.025/8

Corresponding bit rates (Audio)

File type Bit rate (kbps)

MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32 - 320

MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 8 - 160

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192

WMA files: Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR 32 - 192

AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC 16 - 320

(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible) . MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Ad- vanced Audio Coding) are audio compres- sion standards. . This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC files on CD-R, CD-RW discs, USB mem- ory, and Bluetooth device. . This system can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system. . When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file, add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/ .wma/.m4a). . This system plays back files with .mp3/ .wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/ AAC files respectively. To prevent noise

and playback errors, use the appropriate file extension. . This system can play only the first session when using multi-session compa- tible CDs. . MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. This system cannot display disc title, track title and artist name in other formats. . WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/ AAC tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa- tion such as track title and artist name. . The emphasis function is available only when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. . This system can play back AAC files encoded by iTunes. . The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In order to achieve a reasonable level of sound quality, discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are recom- mended. . The MP3/WMA player does not play back MP3/WMA files from discs recorded using packet write data transfer (UDF format). Discs should be recorded using pre-mastering software rather than pack- etwrite software.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-11

5

Black plate (302,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

. M3u playlists are not compatible with the audio device. . MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the audio device. . The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate). . When playing back files recorded as VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used. . It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files. . MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8 levels deep can be played. However, the start of playback may be delayed when using discs containing numerous levels of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 levels of folders.

. The play order of the compact disc with the structure shown above is as follows:

. The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC encoding software you use.

! Terms

! Packet write

. This is a general term that describes the process of writing data on-demand to CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is written to floppy or hard discs.

! ID3 tag

. This is a method of embedding track- related information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track number, track title, the artists name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments, cover art and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to a number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back.

! WMA tag

. WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags carry information such as track title and artist name.

! ISO 9660 format

. This is the international standard for the formatting of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels of regulations. . Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8 character file names, with a 3 character file extension. File names must be com- posed of one-byte capital letters and numbers. The _ symbol may also be included.)

5-12

Black plate (303,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

. Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark . and file extension). Each folder must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

! MP3

. MP3 is an audio compression standard determined by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standard Organiza- tion). MP3 compresses audio data to about 1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

! WMA

. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio compression format developed by Microsoft. It compresses files into a size smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and 9. . This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.

! AAC

. AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compres- sion technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-13

5

Black plate (304,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! Error messages

Mode Message Explanation

CD Disc read error.

. This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the disc.

. This indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. It indicates a disc which is not playable is inserted.

Please eject disc. There is a trouble inside the system. Eject the disc.

USB

Media not connected. Press AUDIO/TUNE knob to exit.

This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device F5-17.

No audio file. This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the USB memory.

Unplayable file This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.

iPod

Media not connected This indicates that a USB device/iPod is not connected to the system.

No audio file This indicates that there is no audio file in the connected iPod.

Unplayable file This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.

NOTE If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

5-14

Black plate (305,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Basic information before use

WARNING

When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, always apply the parking brake for safety. Failure to do so may result in loss of control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. To prevent damaging the screen, touch the screen keys with your finger lightly.

. Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.

! Touch screen gestures

Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.

Operation method Outline Main use

Touch Quickly touch and release once.

Changing and selecting various settings

Drag* Touch the screen with your finger, and move the screen to the desired position.

Scrolling the lists

Flick* Quickly move the screen by flicking with your finger.

Scrolling the main screen page

*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.

NOTE There may be a delayed response to flick operation that are performed at high altitudes.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-15

5

Black plate (306,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! Touch screen operation

This system is operated mainly by the keys on the screen. When a screen key is touched, a beep sounds. You can set the beep sound. Refer to Unit settings F5-19.

NOTE . If the system does not respond to touching a screen key, move your finger away from the screen and touch it again. . Grayed-out screen keys cannot be operated. . The displayed image may become darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the screen is cold. . In extremely cold conditions, the screen may not be displayed correctly. Also, the screen keys may be less responsive than usual when pressed. . When you look at the screen through polarized material such as polarized sunglasses, the screen may be dark and difficult to see. If so, look at the screen from different angles, adjust the screen settings or take off your sunglasses. Refer to Unit settings F5-19.

! Entering letters and numbers/list screen operation

! Entering letters and numbers

When entering the Bluetooth device name or PIN-code, or the phone number, letters and numbers can be entered via the screen.

Enter letters (example: In-Car-Device setting)

No. Function

&1 Enter the desired characters (alpha- bet key mode).

&2 Switch to the screen for characters.

&3 Enter a space.

&4 Confirm the characters/numbers en- tered into the window.

No. Function

&5 Delete a character/number entered into the window.

! List screen

Multimedia playlists (example: iPod play- list)

No. Function

&1 Select a category that wants to play back.

&2 Return to the playback display of each mode.

&3 Select to skip to the next or previous page.

5-16

Black plate (307,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Initial screen

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating.

. When using the SUBARU STARLINK function (if equipped), the display screen may be different from the screen above. . After a few seconds, the caution screen will be displayed. . After about 5 seconds, the caution screen automatically switches to the next screen.

! Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device

The USB port and the AUX jack are located as shown in the following illustra- tion.

NOTE . This unit does not support commer- cially available USB hubs. . Turn on the power of the device when it is not turned on. . This device has a USB port for USB memory/portable device. . For compatible USB memory de- vices, refer to USB memory device F5-10. . For compatible iPod models, refer to iPod F5-10. . Even if a USB hub is used to connect more than two USB devices,

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-17

5

Black plate (308,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

only the first two connected devices will be recognized.

& Basic operation This section describes some of the basic features of the audio/visual system. Some information may not pertain to your sys- tem.

Your audio/visual system works when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio/ visual system on longer than neces- sary when the engine is not running.

NOTE Some functions can also be operated by using the voice command system. For details, refer to Voice command system F5-81.

! Turning the system on and off

Press the power/VOLUME knob to turn the audio/visual system on and off. When the system turns on, the mode that was in use the last time the system was turned off will be displayed. Press and hold the knob to turn the display off. Turn this knob to adjust the volume.

! Selecting an audio source

1. Press the AUDIO/TUNE knob.

2. Select the desired source.

Example: Source select screen

5-18

Black plate (309,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

NOTE . If the audio control screen appears, select the Source key on the audio screen or press the AUDIO/TUNE knob again. . When you push the AUDIO/TUNE knob while any screen other than the audio control screen is displayed, the display will return to the audio control screen. . When the AUDIO/TUNE knob is pushed and held, the graphic equalizer screen will be displayed. Refer to Graphic Equalizer F5-23.

! Selecting a function menu

Press the HOME button to display home screen.

Item Function

AUDIO Select to display the main screen of the audio source that was selected previously.

PHONE

Select to display the hands-free function using your cell phone. Refer to Hands-free phone system F5-71.

APPS

Select to display the functions linked with a smartphone. Refer to SUBARU STARLINK F5- 26.

SETTINGS Select to display the functions for performing various settings. Refer to Unit settings F5-19.

& Unit settings Sound quality adjustment, screen adjust- ment, and information of the audio unit are displayed. 1. Press the HOME button on the audio panel. 2. Touch the SETTINGS key. 3. Select the items to be set.

Available setting: . General settings: Select the tab to check the system software update infor- mation. Refer to General settingsF5-20. . Bluetooth settings: Select the tab to set the Bluetooth settings. Refer to Blue- tooth settings F5-20.

. Sound settings: Select the tab to set the sound quality settings. Refer to Sound settings F5-20. . Display settings: Select the tab to set the screen settings. Refer to Display settings F5-25. . SUBARU STARLINK settings (if equipped): Select to the tab set the SUBARU STARLINK settings. Refer to SUBARU STARLINK settings F5-26.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-19

5

Black plate (310,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! General settings

Touch the tab for the audio unit basic settings.

Item Function

System Language Select to change the language.

Button Beeps

Select to set the sound beeps on/off.

System Software

Select to update software ver- sions. This menu is not used in usual operation.

Reset to Factory Setting

Select to reset the device to factory settings. This menu is not used in usual operation. After resetting to factory settings, turn ignition off and on again.

! Bluetooth settings

Touch the tab to set Bluetooth.

Item Function

BT De- vices Con- nection

Select to pair/connect the Blue- tooth devices.

In-Car-De- vice setting

Select to enter the Bluetooth device name or PIN-code.

For details, refer to Bluetooth settings F5-66.

! Sound settings

Touch the tab to set the sound quality.

Item Function

Balance/ Fader

Select to adjust speaker volume balance (right/left and front/rear).

Speed Vo- lume Con- trol

Select to adjust speaker volume coupled to vehicle speed.

Graphic Equalizer

Select to adjust sound quality in each frequency band.

Sound Re- storer

Select to add high-pitched tone to the compressed audio file.

Volume Smoother

Select to adjust volume differ- ence between audio sources.

Virtual Bass

Select to add harmonic tone so that low-pitched tone is strengthened.

5-20

Black plate (311,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Item Function

Vocal Im- age Con- trol

Select to pick-up vocal sound signal from the sound data, and adjust it to right/left or front/rear.

Refer to the following table for the adjustment range of each audio setting item and default value.

Item Step Default

Balance/ Fader

Volume Balance Control

Balance L9-R9 0 (Center)

Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)

Vocal Image Control

Balance L9-R9 R3

Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)

Speed Volume Control OFF, Low, High Low

Graphic Equalizer 6-+6 0 (Flat)

Sound Restorer ON, OFF ON

Volume Smoother OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid

Virtual Bass OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-21

5

Black plate (312,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! Balance/Fader

A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is important for good quality audio program listening. Keep in mind that when listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of 1 group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.

Touch the Set key of the Balance/Fader key. The Balance/Fader screen will appear.

. Volume Balance setting 1. Select the Volume Balance Control key.

2. Adjust the balance by pressing or key. 3. Adjust the fader by pressing or key.

. Vocal image setting 1. Select the Vocal Image Control key.

2. Adjust the balance by pressing or key. 3. Adjust the fader by pressing or key.

5-22

Black plate (313,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Speed Volume Control

The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for in- creased vehicle noise.

1. Touch the right side key of the Speed Volume Control key. 2. Select the desired item. The High key comes to have a bigger effect. When the OFF key is selected, speed volume control function is cancelled.

! Graphic Equalizer

You can adjust the sound quality by increasing/decreasing the gain for each frequency range. 1. Touch the Set key of the Graphic Equalizer key.

2. In this mode, 6 preset equalizer patterns (the Bass, Treble, Acoustic, Impact, Smooth and Flat key) and 3 customized patterns (the SET 1 - SET 3 key) are available. 3. When customizing the equalizer pat- tern, touch among SET 1, SET 2 or SET 3 and then touch the Adjust key.

4. Adjust the level of each frequency band by touching or key.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-23

5

Black plate (314,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! Sound Restorer

You can play compressed audio data with a sound quality that is close to the original sound. Select the ON or OFF key by the right side key of the Sound Restorer key.

! Volume Smoother

This function reduces the difference in volume among the sound sources to be played. 1. Touch the right side key of the Volume Smoother key. 2. Select the OFF, Low, Mid or High key. The High key comes to have a bigger effect. When the OFF key is selected, the volume smoother function is cancelled.

! Virtual Bass

This function enables you to adjust the bass tone. 1. Touch the right side key of the Virtual Bass key. 2. Select the OFF, Low, Mid or High key. The High key comes to have a bigger effect. When the OFF key is selected, the virtual bass function is cancelled.

! Vocal Image Control

Refer to Balance/Fader F5-22.

5-24

Black plate (315,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Display settings

Touch the tab to set display.

Item Function

Day/Night Mode

The Auto, Day or Night key can be selected on the pop-up screen. When the Auto key is selected, the screen changes to day or night mode depending on the position of the headlight switch.

Brightness Touch + or to adjust the brightness.

NOTE . When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pat- tern may appear on the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disruptive, please operate the

screen without polarized sunglasses. . If the screen is set to Day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condition is memorized even with the engine turned off.

! How to adjust the rear view image

In the camera display, the brightness, tint, color and black level of the screen can be adjusted. 1. Depress the brake pedal fully and stop the vehicle. 2. While the vehicle is stopped, set the shift lever (MT models) or select lever (CVT models) in the R position, and then touch the display. 3. Touch the Display Adjustment key. 4. Touch the items to adjust the rear camera screen.

Camera display

WARNING

When adjusting camera display screen, make sure to depress the brake pedal fully to avoid the vehicle from moving. Failure to do so may lead to a serious accident.

NOTE The camera display can be accessed when the rear camera monitor is dis- played.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-25

5

Black plate (316,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! SUBARU STARLINK settings (if equipped)

Touch the tab to change the SUBARU STARLINK settings.

Item Function

Browser cache

Select to initialize cache files that the browser stores. If the confirmation screen appears and the OK key is selected, the cache files will be deleted.

& SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped)

The SUBARU STARLINK function allows the system to link with a smartphone using Bluetooth.

! How to use SUBARU STARLINK

1. Connect to the audio system. Use a USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and Bluetooth for Android devices.

. For details about connecting an iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to Connect- ing and disconnecting a USB memory/ portable device F5-17. . For details about registering or con- necting an Android device: Refer to Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device F5-66. 2. Press the HOME button, and then touch the APPS key, or press the APPS button on the audio panel. The APPS screen is displayed.

3. Touch the SUBARU STARLINK key on the APPS screen. The disclaimer screen or the error screen is displayed. 4. Touch the Check key on the disclai- mer screen and then the APPS main screen will appear. If you touch the Cancel key, the disclaimer screen dis- appears and the previous screen will be displayed again.

NOTE . The SUBARU STARLINK connection error screen will be displayed due to one of the following possible reasons.

Your smartphone and the system has not been connected via USB (for iPhone) or Bluetooth (for An- droid). SUBARU STARLINK APPS has

5-26

Black plate (317,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

not been activated. . You can also switch to aha or Pandora (if equipped) from the APPS screen.

! APPS main screen

No. Function

&1 Select to go to the Music APPS screen.

&2 Select to go to the News APPS screen.

&3 Select to go to the Calender APPS screen.

&4 Select to go to the iHeartRadio APPS screen.

&5 Select to go to the Weather APPS screen.

NOTE . The error screen will be displayed while using SUBARU STARLINK due to one of the following possible reasons.

When your smartphone has no service or the Bluetooth communi- cation is not possible. When your smartphone is turned off. When the SUBARU STARLINK APPS is quit. When connection to the SUBARU STARLINK server is not possible. When a problem occurs other than a server error.

. When using the SUBARU STARLINK function, a disclaimer screen will be displayed. Be sure to fully read the contents before using the function. . Supported devices

iPhone: iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/ iPhone 5 (iOS Ver. 5.1 or later)/ iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s Android: (OS Ver. 4.0 or later)

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-27

5

Black plate (318,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

& AM/FM radio

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

&1 Select to display the audio source selection screen.

&2 Select to change the band.

&3 The HD Radio indicator on the top right of the screen changes accord- ing to the reception condition of HD Radio (if equipped).

&4 Select to display a station list (if equipped). Refer to Selecting a station from the list F5-29.

No. Function

&5

Select to scan radio channels. This function enables searching for receivable stations automatically, and tunes in to a frequency for 5 seconds if a station is found. When the 5-second period has elapsed, the system searches for the next recei- vable station again, and tunes in to the frequency for 5 seconds.

&6 Select to open the Option screen. Refer to Radio settings F5-30.

&7

When you touch a key, the system tunes to the stored frequency. When you touch and hold a key, the system stores the frequency to the selected preset channel. Refer to Presetting a station F5-29.

No. Function

&8 Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/ off.

&9

Turn to step up/down frequencies. Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the list screens by pressing. Press to select an audio mode. For details, refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

&10 Press to display the sound setting screen. Refer to Unit settings F5- 19.

&11 Press to seek for a station/channel. Press and hold for continuous seek.

NOTE . Although FM is normally static free, reception can be affected by the sur- rounding area, atmospheric conditions, station strength and transmitter dis- tance. Buildings or other obstructions may cause momentary static, flutter or station interference. If reception con- tinues to be unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station. . The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broad- cast is received.

5-28

Black plate (319,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

. The radio automatically blends to an HD Radio signal (if equipped) in AM or FM where available.

! How to change the source

Select the AM or FM key on the source select screen. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

! Presetting a station

In total 18 stations can be set for the FM band (6 each for FM1, FM2 and FM3) and 12 stations can be set for the AM band (6 each for AM1 and AM2). 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. If you touch and hold a key, the system stores the frequency to the selected preset channel.

! Selecting a station from the list (if equipped)

A station list can be displayed. 1. Touch the tab.

2. Touch the tab and the station list will appear. 3. Select the desired station.

! Update the station list

Touch the Update Station List key on the station list screen and the following screen will be displayed.

Item Function

OK Select to execute the manual update.

Cancel Select to cancel the manual update.

NOTE . The audio system sound is muted during refresh operation. . In some situations, it may take some time to update the station list.

! Bookmark the list

You can store and call up the received data (images, song titles, artist names, etc.). The stored data is displayed as a list. 1. Touch the tab on the station list screen and the following screen will be

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-29

5

Black plate (320,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

displayed.

2. Select an item from the bookmark list, the following image will be displayed.

3. When you call up bookmark informa- tion, a QR code converted from the bookmark information will be displayed

on the screen. You can access a URL by reading the QR code using a smartphone, etc.

! Delete bookmark from the list

1. Touch the Delete Bookmark key on the station list screen and the following screen will be displayed.

2. If you select an item from the book- mark list, the item will be deleted from the bookmark list. 3. Touch the Delete All key. If the confirmation screen appears and the OK key is selected, all bookmark items in the list will be deleted.

! Radio settings

You can perform various radio settings. 1. Touch the tab. 2. Select the desired item from the following table.

Item Function

HD (if equipped) Select to turn HD radio on/off.

PTY Select (if equipped)

Select to set the PTY group.

Auto Store

Select to detect 6 radio stations with strong frequencies automa- tically and to store them in the order of frequency.

! About HD RadioTM technology (if equipped)

HD RadioTM Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives. Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.

5-30

Black plate (321,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

AM and FM broadcast sound quality is now crystal clear, with AM sound quality that virtually matches FM quality of the past, and FM broadcasts that have near CD-level sound quality.

HD Radio Technology manufactured un- der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora- tion. Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

FM stations can provide additional digital- only audio programming on HD2/HD3 Channels.

! Available HD RadioTM technology (if equipped)

! Multicast

On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have multiple or supplemental programs on one FM station.

1. Touch the Sub CH key on the control screen and the following screen will be displayed.

2. The indication that shows whether the current broadcast is digital or analog is displayed on the top right of the control screen.

3. Select the desired channel. Turning the AUDIO/TUNE knob can also

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-31

5

Black plate (322,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

select the desired multicast channel.

NOTE . HD RadioTM stations can be preset. . An orange will be displayed on the screen when in digital. The will first appear in a gray color indicating the station is indeed (an analog and) a digital station. Once the digital signal is acquired, the logo will change to a bright orange color. . The song title and artist name will appear on the screen when available by the radio station. The radio station can send album pictures when available. . As a user works through the analog radio stations, (where applicable) the radio receiver will automatically tune from an analog signal to a digital signal within 5 seconds.

! Preserving a music information

Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in the system and transmits to an iPod.

1. Touch the Tag key in the control screen while receiving HD Radio, the tag setting screen will be displayed.

2. Connect an iPod. Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/porta- ble device F5-17.

. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on. . Once an iPod is connected, the music tag moves from the radio into the iPod. . When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the tagged information of the songs which were tagged while listen- ing to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had been listened to on their radio.

5-32

Black plate (323,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

In addition, the following messages appear.

Display Message Contents

Tag storage full If there is not enough memory in the digital audio

Already Stored If the same information is stored in the digital audio

Storing Failed If the store process in the digital audio failed

iPod full Tags cannot be stored If there is not enough memory in the iPod

Starting to transfer the Tag files. If the system starts to transmit music informa- tion to an iPod

Transferring Failed If the transmitting process of music information to an iPod failed

X Tag(s) Sent (X = number of transmitted information) will be displayed.

If the transmitting process of music information to an iPod is successful

NOTE . The tag information can not be preserved while scanning or caching the radio station. . If tagging the music information fails, Saving the HD Radio tag was unsuccessful. (Saving the HD Radio tag was unsuccessful.) will be dis- played on the screen. If this occurs, tag the information again.

. Program Service Data: Presents song name, artist, station IDs, and other rele- vant data streams.

. iTunes Tagging provides you the op- portunity to discover a wide range of content and the means to tag that content for later review and purchase from the iTunes Store. Also refer to the Apple Automotive specifications for implement- ing iTunes Tagging.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-33

5

Black plate (324,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

. Visual information related to content being played on your HD Radio receiver, such as Album Art, historical photographs, still art from live broadcasts, among other related content.

5-34

Black plate (325,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Troubleshooting guide

Experience Cause Action

Mismatch of time alignment - a user may hear a short period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter or skip.

The radio stations analog and digital volume is not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact the radio station.

Sound fades, blending in and out. Radio is shifting between analog and digital audio.

Reception issue. May clear-up as the vehicle continues to be driven. Turning the indicator of the HD RadioTM off will change the radio mode to analog audio.

Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3 multicast channel had been playing.

The radio does not have access to digital signals at the moment.

This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new station.

Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/ HD3 multicast channel preset.

The digital multicast content is not available until HD RadioTM broadcast can be decoded and make the audio available. This takes up to 7 seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to become available.

Text information does not match the present song audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio _station_experiences.

No text information shown for the present selected frequency. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio _station_experiences.

The Acquiring caution message appears when the system attempts to acquire digital transmission.

When acquiring digital data while receiving a digital broadcast and SPS station.

. When the reception in digital of the SPS station is confirmed.

. When the system determined that the SPS station could not be received.

. When the SPS broadcast is ended (stopped) by the radio station while receiving SPS.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-35

5

Black plate (326,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

Experience Cause Action

The HD Channel is unavailable caution message appears when digital reception is not possible.

. When the system determined that the SPS station could not be received while receiving a digital broadcast and SPS station.

. When the SPS broadcast is ended (stopped) by the radio station while receiv- ing SPS.

. When the status is changed to acquiring digital data because the reception condition of SPS station has improved.

. When the received station is changed.

5-36

Black plate (327,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if equipped)

! SiriusXM Data Service

Data service information, which is com- prised of traffic information and weather information, can be received via the SiriusXM Radio.

To receive the data service information in the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is necessary.

Content set to use the SiriusXM data service is reset when personal information is initialized.

! Control screen and audio panel

Control screen

No. Function

&1 Perform the SXM setting. See be- low. Refer to SXM setting F5-43.

&2 Search for a channel which the direction of higher frequency from current frequency. Reproduce the channel that can receive by 5 seconds.

No. Function

&3

A list is displayed. There are three types of lists (Presets, Categories or All Channels) available. . Presets: Preset channels are

displayed in a list. . Categories: The channels of

the selected category are dis- played in a list.

. All Channels: All selectable channels are displayed in a list.

&4 Display the contents information of a channel receiving.

&5 Presets list (30 channels max.) is displayed. Refer to Presetting a channel F5-41.

&6 Categories list is displayed. Refer to Selecting a channel from the list F5-41.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-37

5

Black plate (328,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

No. Function

&7 All channels list is displayed. The available received channels are displayed, and you can select a channel.

&8 Change to the Direct Tune display. Refer to Direct Tune F5-42.

&9 Return to the previous display.

&10 Return to the playback display.

Audio panel

No. Function

&1 Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/ off.

&2 Press to display the sound setting screen. Refer to Unit settings F5- 19.

&3 Turn right to step up channels and turn left to step down channels. Press to select an audio source. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

&4 Press to step up/down channels. Press and hold to step up/down channels fast.

5-38

Black plate (329,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! How to subscribe to SiriusXM Sa- tellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is necessary.

A SiriusXM Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broad- casts provided under a separate subscrip- tion.

! How to subscribe

It is necessary to enter into a separate service agreement with SiriusXM Satellite Radio in order to receive satellite broad- cast programming in the vehicle. Addi- tional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle and digital satellite tuner. For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to SiriusXM Satellite Radio: . U.S. customers: Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866-635-2349 . Canadian customers: Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-209-0079

WARNING

. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services Legal Disclaimers and Warn- ings

Fees and Taxes Subscrip- tion fee, taxes, one time acti- vation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is con- sumer only. All fees and pro- gramming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Cus- tomer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the contiguous USA and DC. SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada: see www.siriusxm.ca. Explicit Language Notice Channels with frequent expli- cit language are indicated with an XL preceding the channel name. Channel block- ing is available for SiriusXM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying SiriusXM at:

. U.S. customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349

. Canadian customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call

1-877-209-0079

CAUTION

. It is prohibited to copy, decom- pile, disassemble, reverse engi- neer, hack, manipulate or other- wise make available any technol- ogy or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SiriusXM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the Online Service or any of its content . Fur thermore, the AMBE voice compression soft- ware included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

. Note: this applies to SiriusXM Satellite Radio receivers only and not XM Ready devices.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-39

5

Black plate (330,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

NOTE . SiriusXM Satellite Services De- scriptions

Only SiriusXM Satellite Radio

brings you more of what you love, all in one place. Get over 175 channels, including commercial- free music, plus the best sports, news, talk, comedy and entertain- ment. Welcome to the world of satellite radio. More information about SiriusXM Satellite Radio is available online at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) and www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

. SiriusXM Satellite Services Sub- scription Instructions

For SiriusXM Services requiring a subscription (such as SiriusXM Satellite Radio, and some Infotain- ment & data services), the following paragraph shall be included. Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio and some Infotainment & data ser- vices monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Sub- scription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement avail- able at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Sirius,

XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after compli- mentary trial period; more informa- tion is available at: . U.S. customers: Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866-635-2349 . Canadian customers: Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-209-0079

. SiriusXM Satellite Radio is solely responsible for the quality, availability and content of the satellite radio ser- vices provided, which are subject to the terms and conditions of the SiriusXM Satellite Radio customer ser- vice agreement. . Customers should have their radio ID ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to Ch 000 on the radio. For details, see DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID below. . All fees and programming are the responsibility of SiriusXM Satellite Radio and are subject to change.

! How to change the source

Select the Sirius XM key on the source select screen. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

5-40

Black plate (331,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Presetting a channel

1. The presets list is displayed via either of the following procedures.

. When you touch the tab in the SiriusXM main screen (if the list that was displayed the last time is Presets). . When you select the tab in each list screen.

2. The current channel is stored if you touch and hold the preset list key. You can store up to 30 channels (A beep sounds when a channel stored).

The playing icon is displayed for the currently selected channel.

! Selecting a channel from the list

1. The categories list is displayed via either of the following procedures.

. When you touch the tab in the SiriusXM main screen (if the list that was displayed the last time is Cate- gories). . When you select the tab in each list screen.

2. Each channel list is displayed when you select each category item.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-41

5

Black plate (332,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

In addition, the following messages appear.

Display Message Contents

Subscription Update Press OK to Continue

An update to your SiriusXM subscription has been received by the SiriusXM tuner. Touch any key to continue.

Channel XXX Not Available (XXX refers to the selected channel number.)

This channel is not a valid SiriusXM channel. The channel number has been entered incor- rectly, or the channel was removed from the SiriusXM channel lineup.

Channel XXX Not Subscribed Call. Call SiriusXM to Subscribed. (XXX refers to the selected channel number.)

This channel is not included in your SiriusXM subscription plan.

Ch Locked Lock Code?

The selected channel has been locked by the parental controls. A prompt to enter the unlock code will appear.

Check Antenna

Ensure the SiriusXM antenna cable is con- nected to the SiriusXM tuner correctly. Check the SiriusXM antenna wire for breaks or sharp bends. Replace the antenna if necessary.

No Signal The vehicle must be outside, and the antenna must have a clear view of the southern sky.

NOTE Contact SiriusXM . Listener Care Center (U.S. customers): 1-866-635-2349 . Listener Care Centre (Canadian customers): 1-877-209-0079

! Direct Tune

1. A channel input screen is displayed when you touch the tab.

2. Input any number and touch the OK key, receive the channel which input.

5-42

Black plate (333,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! SXM setting

1. An option menu screen is displayed when you touch the tab on the lower left side of the screen. The Options screen will appear.

Option menu screen

No. Function

&1 Set the lock function of each chan- nel. Input the password is necessary for operation.

&2 Set the password of the lock func- tion.

2. A password input screen is displayed when you touch the Set key of the Channel Lock function.

Password input screen

3. When the input password is approved, change to the lock channel selection screen.

Lock channel selection screen

4. In the channel list, touch the channel that should be locked.

! Displaying the Radio ID

Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. The Radio ID is required when activating an SiriusXM Satellite Services or when reporting a problem. . If Ch 000 is selected using the AUDIO/TUNE knob, the ID code will be displayed. . Touch the key. The Radio ID will be displayed on the Options screen.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-43

5

Black plate (334,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

& ahaTM by HARMAN aha is a cloud-based application that connects to the system and gives you access to your favorite web content safely and easily. There are over 30,000 stations spanning internet radio, personalized mu- sic, audiobooks, Facebook, Twitter, res- taurant and hotel searches, weather and more. For more about aha, go to the aha site (http://www.aharadio.com).

When connecting iPhone and iPod touch or Android devices with the aha applica- tion installed, you can control, view, and hear aha content through the system.

In order to connect to this system, use a USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and Bluetooth for Android devices.

In this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch or Android devices will be referred to as a smartphone.

WARNING

Do not connect or operate the smartphone while driving. Doing so may result in loss of control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your smartphone in the car. In particular, high tem- peratures inside the vehicle may damage the smartphone.

. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the smartphone while it is connected as this may damage the smart- phone or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the smartphone or its terminal.

5-44

Black plate (335,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Control screen and panel

Control screen (main screen and station screen)

No. Function

&1 Select to display the audio source selection screen.

&2 Select to open the station list. Refer to Using aha application F5-49.

&3 Select to fast forward the current con- tent item by 30 seconds.

&4 Select to display the contents list of the selected station.

&5

Select to make a phone call to the current content item. A phone number is distributed depend- ing on content items. This feature is available only in these cases.

No. Function

&6 The track pauses when pressed during playback and plays back when touched during pause.

&7 Select to set thumbs up.

&8 Select to set thumbs down.

&9 Select to start the playback from the beginning of the content in the target station.

&10 Select to rewind the current content item by 15 seconds.

&11 Select to display the preset list.

&12 Return to the control screen.

No. Function

&13 Select to display the nearby list.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-45

5

Black plate (336,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

Audio panel

No. Function

&1 Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off.

&2 Press to display the sound setting screen. Refer to Unit settings F5-19.

&3 Press to display the station operation screen. Press to select an audio mode.

&4 Turn to display the next/previous con- tent item. Press to select an audio source. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

&5 Press to display the next/previous con- tent item.

NOTE . For safety reasons, certain func- tions are not available while your vehicle is in motion. . In order to maximize signal recep- tion, performance and precision of the smartphone, please ensure the smart- phone is placed as close to the system as possible, while ensuring it is stowed and secure while driving. . When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the battery of the connected iPhone/iPod touch is charged. . iPhone/iPod touch may not be re- cognized when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. In this case, remove the iPhone/iPod touch and reconnect it. . The accuracy of the displayed in- formation or the signal reception per- formance depends on the smartphone or the connected device, and its wire- less connection. . Since the aha application uses sig- nals from GPS satellites and wireless communication lines, it may not work properly in the following locations.

In a tunnel In underground parking lots

5-46

Black plate (337,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Outside wireless communication range, such as some countryside areas Where the wireless communica- tion network is congested, or where communications are restricted

. Depending on the circumstances and environment, the signal may be weak or not be received. In such cases, an error may occur. . Top 35 entries in the preset station list on the smartphone are displayed. When there are more than 35 entries in the preset station list, change the order of the entries in the list on the smart- phone. You can change the priority of your preset stations within the aha application (after disconnected from this system) to modify the station list shown on the screen. Please see your smartphone aha application Edit Pre- sets (in Main menu) to modify this list. . For operating the smartphone, see the instruction manual that comes with it. . If there are multiple music files stored on your iPhone or iPod touch, it may take some time until playback starts. . Playback may be intermittent when you switch to streaming Bluetooth audio from aha on your smartphone

device. . When connecting the device via Bluetooth, the communication speed may become slower than via USB.

! Before using aha application

In order to use the aha application on this system, the application must be installed on the smartphone.

! Settings required to use aha application

. Search and download the aha applica- tion from your smartphone app store.

iPhone and iPod touch: Apple App Store via iTunes Android device: Google Play Store

. Create an account and login to the aha application on the smartphone.

NOTE Please use the latest version of the aha application.

! About app-based connected con- tent

Requirements for using the connected content services of the aha application on this system. . Latest version of the system is compa- tible with connected content application(s) for the smartphone, available from aha,

downloaded to your smartphone. . A current account with a wireless content service provider. . A smartphone data plan: If the data plan for your smartphone does not provide for unlimited data usage, additional charges from your carrier may apply for accessing app-based connected content via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi or 4G LTE wireless networks. . Connection to the internet via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi or 4G LTE networks.

NOTE . Changes to product specifications may result in differences between the content of the manual and features of the product. . Be careful not to exceed the data usage limits for your smartphone. Doing so will result in additional data usage charges from your phone car- rier. . Access to app-based connected content will depend on the availability of wireless cell and/or Wi-Fi network coverage for the purpose of allowing your smartphone to connect to the internet. . Service availability may be geogra- phically limited by region. Consult the wireless connected content service

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-47

5

Black plate (338,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

provider for additional information. . Ability of this product to access connected content is subject to change without notice and could be affected by any of the following: compatibility issues with future firmware versions of the smartphone; compatibility is- sues with future versions of the con- nected content application(s) for the smartphone; changes to or disconti- nuation of the connected content ap- plication(s) or service by its provider. . Communication and phone call charges for smartphones should be paid by the wireless subscriber. . If you lose the data in a smartphone or other device while using it with the system, no compensation will be given for the lost data. . Fuji Heavy Industries makes no guarantee regarding the content pro- vided by aha. . aha may not work due to factors on smartphones, smartphone applications or stations. Fuji Heavy Industries is not responsible for it.

! About the supported devices

This system supports the following de- vices.

. For iPhone/iPod touch users

Type Generation Firmware version or

OS

iPhone

iPhone 3G iOS 4.2.x

iPhone 3GS iOS 6.1.x

iPhone 4 iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 4s iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5 iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5c iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5s iOS 7.0.x

iPod touch

iPod touch iOS 3.1.x

iPod touch 2 iOS 4.2.x

iPod touch 3 iOS 5.1.x

iPod touch 4 iOS 6.1.x

iPod touch 5 iOS 7.0.x

NOTE Note that the warranty does not apply if an unsupported iPhone/iPod touch is connected.

. For Android device users

Android OS Specification Profile

Android Ver. 2.2 or Ver. 2.3

Bluetooth Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher

(Ver. 2.0 + EDR or higher

is recom- mended)

. aha Con- nect Bin- ary API over SPP

. Digital audio by A2DP

NOTE The available functions may vary de- pending on the type of Android device.

! Connecting a smartphone

If you connect a smartphone to this system after starting a supported aha application on the smartphone, you can display and operate the aha application displayed on the smartphone on the system screen. 1. Run the aha application on your smartphone. 2. Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the USB port or connect the Android device by utilizing the Bluetooth connection (SPP and A2DP profile).

. For details about connecting an iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to Connect- ing and disconnecting a USB memory/ portable device F5-17. . For details about registering or con-

5-48

Black plate (339,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

necting an Android device: Refer to Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device F5-66.

NOTE When iPhone/iPod touch and Android devices are connected at the same time, iPhone/iPod touch is prioritized.

! How to change the source

. Select the aha key on the source select screen. Refer to Basic operation F5-18. . Select the aha key on the APPS screen. Refer to SUBARU STARLINK F5-26.

NOTE When starting-up aha, there are some smartphone models for which aha application does not start up automatically.

! Using aha application

1. When the top screen is displayed, touch the station key.

Example of the main screen

2. Select the desired station from the list. The selected station is displayed.

NOTE . The following operations are not available on this system. Perform these operations on the smartphone.

Add/Reorder/Delete stations Login to Facebook/Twitter

. For the aha function, the following touch screen gestures are not avail- able.

Multi-touch operation Double-tap

. For details on the services or the operations, check the aha site (http://www.aharadio.com) on the inter- net. . The button display will vary depend- ing on each station or content item.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-49

5

Black plate (340,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

& Pandora (if equipped) Pandora is an application for a smart- phone. This can automatically select and play recommended tracks.

By rating the track currently playing, tracks that better match your preference will be recommended.

In order to connect to this system, use a USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and Bluetooth for Android devices.

Depending on differences between mod- els or software version etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.

This function is not available if the Pandora application has not been in- stalled on the smartphone.

WARNING

Do not operate the players controls or connect the smartphone while driving. Doing so may result in loss of control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your smartphone in the car. In particular, high tem- peratures inside the vehicle may damage the smartphone.

. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the smartphone while it is connected as this may damage the smart- phone or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the smartphone or its terminal.

NOTE Follow the specific operation proce- dures for the smartphone application.

5-50

Black plate (341,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

&1 Select to display the audio source selection screen.

&2 Select to open the station list. Refer to Station list F5-52.

&3 Select to skip the current track.

&4 The track pauses when touched during playback and plays when touched during pause.

&5 Select to set thumbs up. This gives a high rating to the current song. All other similar songs will be played back more frequently.

No. Function

&6

Select to set thumbs down. This gives a low rating to the current song. All other similar songs will be played back less frequently. When you select thumbs down, the current track is skipped.

&7 During playback of a station, you can use this key to bookmark a song or artist. Refer to Registering Bookmarks F5-52.

&8 Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off.

&9 Turn clockwise to skip to the next track. Press to select an audio source. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

&10 Press to display the sound setting screen. Refer to Unit settings F5-19.

No. Function

&11 Press to skip to the next track/cover art.

! Connecting a smartphone

Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the USB port or connect the Android device by using Bluetooth connection (SPP and A2DP profile). . For details about connecting an iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/porta- ble device F5-17. . For details about registering or con- necting an Android device: Refer to Registering/connecting Bluetooth de- vice F5-66.

! How to change the source

The Pandora operation screen can be reached by the following methods: . Connecting a Pandora device. Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth device F5-69 or Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device F5-17. . Select the Pandora key on the source select screen. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18. . Select the Pandora key on the APPS screen. Refer to SUBARU STARLINK F5-26.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-51

5

Black plate (342,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

NOTE When starting-up Pandora, there are some smartphone models for which Pandora application does not start up automatically.

! Registering Bookmarks

You can register the music and artist now being played in Bookmark. 1. Touch the tab. 2. Select the desired key. The following items are appeared on the screen.

Item Function

Track When selected after the Book- mark key is pressed, the current track is bookmarked.

Artist When selected after the Book- mark key is pressed, the current artist is bookmarked.

Cancel Select to cancel the bookmark operation.

! Station list

You can select, add or delete a station. When the tab is touched on the main screen, a station list will be displayed.

No. Function

&1 Select to sort the list in the chronologi- cal order of when the Station List was created.

&2 Select to create a station. The station can be created using track names or artist names.

&3 Select to delete a station.

&4 Return to the control screen.

&5 Select to sort the list based on the alphabetical order of the station names.

! Store the station

You can register a station. 1. Touch the tab on the Pandora main screen. 2. Touch the New Station key, and then select the desired key.

Item Function

From Track Select to create a station using a track name.

From Artist Select to create a station using an artist name.

Cancel Select to cancel the operation to add a station.

! Delete the station

You can delete a station. 1. Touch the tab on the Pandora top screen. 2. Touch the Delete Station key, and then the station list is appeared. 3. Select the item to delete the station. If the confirmation screen appears and the OK key is selected, the selected station will be deleted from station list.

5-52

Black plate (343,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& CD

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

&1 Select to display the audio source selection screen.

&2 Select to display the play mode currently selected. Refer to Select play mode F5-54.

&3 Audio CD: Select to display a track list.

MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Select to display a folder list.

&4 Shows progress.

&5 The tracks in the disc are played back for 10 seconds each from the beginning of the track.

No. Function

&6 MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Select to choose a folder.

&7 Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/ off.

&8 Press to eject a disc.

&9 Disc slot

&10 Turn to select a track/file. Press to select an audio source. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

No. Function

&11 Press to display the sound setting screen. Refer to Unit settings F5- 19.

&12 Press to select a track/file. Press and hold to fast forward/re- wind.

NOTE . Depending on the compression data format of the inserted CD, some keys may not be displayed on the screen. . If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA files can be played back. . If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to 32 characters can be displayed. . If the disc contains no CD-TEXT, only the track number would be dis- played on the screen.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-53

5

Black plate (344,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! Loading a disc

CAUTION

Never try to disassemble the audio kit or lubricate any part of the CD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot.

Insert a disc into the disc slot. After insertion, the disc is automatically loaded.

NOTE When inserting a disc, gently insert it with the label facing up.

! Unloading a disc

Press the eject button to remove the disc.

! How to change the source

The CD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: . Insert a disc. Refer to Loading a disc F5-54. . Select the DISC key on the source select screen. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

! Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear when play mode key is touched. Select the preferred play mode from the following items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start folder repeat.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to start shuffle folder.

Return to the control screen.

NOTE Depending on the compression data formant of the inserted CD, the dis- played play mode may differ from the illustration shown here.

5-54

Black plate (345,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& USB memory Audio files on the USB memory can be played.

WARNING

Do not operate the players controls or connect the USB memory while driving. Doing so may result in losing control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your USB memory in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the USB memory.

. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is con- nected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

&1 Select to display the audio source selection screen.

&2 Select to display the play mode currently selected. Refer to Select play mode F5-56.

&3 Select to display folder list.

&4 Shows progress.

&5 The tracks in the folder are played back 10 seconds each from the beginning of the track.

&6 Select to choose a folder.

&7 Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off.

No. Function

&8 Turn to select a file/track. Press to select an audio source. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

&9 Press to display the sound setting screen. Refer to Unit settings F5- 19.

&10 Press to select a file/track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-55

5

Black plate (346,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! Connecting a USB device

You can connect a USB device to the vehicle USB port. Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/porta- ble device F5-17.

! How to change the source

The USB Audio playback screen can be reached by the following methods: . Connect a USB memory. Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device F5-17. . Select the USB/iPod key on the source select screen. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

! Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear when play mode key is touched. Select the preferred play mode from the following items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start folder repeat.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to start shuffle folder.

Return to the control screen.

& iPod Audio files on the iPod can be played.

WARNING

Do not operate the players controls or connect the iPod while driving. Doing so may result in loss of control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.

. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the por- table player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

5-56

Black plate (347,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

&1 Select to display the audio source selection screen.

&2 Select to display the play mode currently selected. Refer to Select play mode F5-58.

&3 Select to display iPod List. Refer to iPod settings F5-58.

&4 Shows progress.

&5 Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off.

&6 Turn to select a track/file. Press to select an audio source. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

&7 Press to display the sound setting screen. Refer to Unit settings F5-19.

No. Function

&8 Press to select a track/file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

NOTE . When an iPod is connected using a genuine USB cable, the iPod starts charging its battery. . When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume playing from the same point it was last used. . Depending on the iPod that is con- nected to the system, certain functions may not be available. . Files/tracks selected by operating a connected iPod may not be recognized or displayed properly.

! Connecting the iPod

You can connect an iPod to the vehicle USB port using the USB cable. Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device F5-17.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-57

5

Black plate (348,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! How to change the source

The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods: . Connect an iPod. Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/porta- ble device F5-17. . Select the USB/iPod key on the source select screen. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

! Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear when play mode key is touched. Select the preferred play mode from the following items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to turn off shuffle.

Touch to start shuffle album.

Return to the control screen.

! iPod settings

You can choose the following items from the list screen after touching the tab on the screen.

Icon Function

Select to display the play list.

Select to display tracks list.

Select to display artists list.

Select to display albums list.

Select to open other list (Gen- res, Composers, Audiobooks and Podcast).

Select to open Genres list.

Select to open Composers list.

Select to open Audiobooks list.

Select to open Podcasts list.

& Bluetooth audio The Bluetooth audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is played on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth, the Bluetooth audio system will not func- tion.

WARNING

. Do not operate the players con- trols or connect to the Bluetooth audio system while driving. Doing so may result in loss of control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

. Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization ther- apy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

5-58

Black plate (349,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

. Before using Bluetooth devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re- synchronization therapy-pace- makers or implantable cardiover- ter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its opera- tion under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the opera- tion of such medical devices.

CAUTION

Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high tem- peratures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

&1 Select to display the audio source selection screen.

&2 Select to display the play mode currently selected. Refer to Select play mode F5-60.

&3 Select to display as a list (for the models with AVRCP Ver. 1.4 or high- er).

&4 The track pauses when touched dur- ing playback and plays when touched during pause.

&5 Select to open Bluetooth Settings. Refer to Setting Bluetooth details F5-69.

&6 Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off.

No. Function

&7 Turn to select a track. Press to select an audio source. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

&8 Select to display the sound setting screen. Refer to Unit settings F5-19.

&9 Press to select a track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-59

5

Black plate (350,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

NOTE . Depending on the Bluetooth device that is connected to the system, the music may start playing when selecting the key while it is paused. Con- versely, the music may pause when selecting the key while it is playing. . In the following conditions, the sys- tem may not function:

The Bluetooth device is turned off. The Bluetooth device is not con- nected. The Bluetooth device has a low battery.

. It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth audio is being played. . For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it. . If the Bluetooth device is discon- nected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth network when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi- tion, the system will automatically reconnect to the portable player. . If the Bluetooth device is discon- nected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does not happen. Reconnect the portable player manu- ally.

. Bluetooth device information is re- gistered when the Bluetooth device is connected to the Bluetooth audio sys- tem. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove the Bluetooth audio information from the system. Refer to Bluetooth settings F5-66.

! Connecting a Bluetooth device

To use the Bluetooth audio system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth device with the system. . Registering an additional device 1. Select the Add key on the Bluetooth devices connection screen. 2. For more information: Refer to Regis- tering/connecting Bluetooth device F5- 66.

. Selecting a registered device 1. Select the Select key on the Blue- tooth devices connection screen. 2. For more information: Refer to BT Devices Connection screen F5-69.

! How to change the source

Select the BT Audio key on the source select screen. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

NOTE Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be available and/or the screen may look differently than shown in this manual.

! Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear when play mode key is touched. Select the preferred play mode from the following items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to repeat the tracks in the group.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to play tracks in the order in which they are registered in the audio device.

Touch to start shuffle group.

5-60

Black plate (351,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Icon Function

Return to the control screen.

NOTE If the connected device does not sup- port the group repeat mode, the group functions are not available.

& AUX

WARNING

Do not operate the players controls or connect the portable audio device while driving. Doing so may result in loss of control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave portable audio de- vice in the vehicle. The tempera- ture inside the vehicle may be- come high, resulting in damage to the player.

. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the por- table audio device while it is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its

terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device or its term- inal.

Audio/Audio set

CONTINUED

5-61

5

Black plate (352,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Audio set

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

&1 Select to display the audio source selection screen.

&2 Select to adjust the audio gain level. Refer to Audio level settingsF5-62.

&3 Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off.

&4 Press to select an audio source. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

&5 Press to display the sound setting screen. Refer to Unit settings F5- 19.

! Connecting a portable audio device

You can connect a portable audio device to the vehicle AUX jack. Refer to Con- necting and disconnecting a USB mem- ory/portable device F5-17.

! How to change the source

The AUX operation screen can be reached by the following methods: . Connect a portable audio device. Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device F5-17. . Select the AUX key on the source select screen. Refer to Selecting an audio source F5-18.

! Audio level settings

You can set the audio gain level. 1. Select the tab on the screen, and then touch the right side key of the Audio Level key. 2. Select the audio level from the follow- ing items.

. Low

. Mid

. High

5-62

Black plate (353,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Steering switches for audio

Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.

1) + switch 2) / switch 3) Mute/Enter switch 4) List switch 5) Back switch 6) Source switch

Audio/Steering switches for audio

CONTINUED

5-63

5

Black plate (354,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Steering switches for audio

. +/ switch

Mode Operation Function

Except list screen Press Volume up/down

Press and hold Volume up/down continuously

List screen Press Move cursor up/down

Pandora main screen (if equipped) Press and hold + switch is thumb up/ switch is thumb down

. / switch

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio, SiriusXM (if equipped) Press Preset channel up/down

Press and hold Seek up/down continuously while the switch is being pressed

aha

Press Content up/down

Press and hold Reverse the current content item for 15 sec- onds/Fast forward the current content item for 30 seconds

Audio CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB, iPod, BT audio

Press Select a track/file

Press and hold Fast forward/rewind

Pandora (if equipped) Press and hold Thumbs up

List screen Press Move cursor left/right

5-64

Black plate (355,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

. Mute/Enter switch

Mode Operation Function

List screen Press Select cursor entry

CD, USB, iPod, BTaudio, Pandora (if equipped), aha Press Pause or play back

AM/FM radio, AUX, SiriusXM (if equipped) Press Mute or cancel mute

. Back switch

Mode Operation Function

All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press Return to the previous screen

All Press and hold Return to the HOME screen

. List switch

Mode Operation Function

All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press Show list screen

. Source switch

Mode Operation Function

All Press Change audio modes

NOTE In the aha, Pandora (if equipped) and SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected APPS.

Audio/Steering switches for audio 5-65

5

Black plate (356,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Bluetooth settings

Bluetooth settings

WARNING

Be sure to park the vehicle in a safe location before connecting or oper- ating a Bluetooth phone or audio device. Failure to do so may result in loss of control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

& Regulatory information

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

& Registering/connecting Bluetooth device

You can register up to five devices, regardless of whether they are Bluetooth phones or audio devices.

NOTE . Once the phone has been regis- tered, it is possible to use the hands- free system or Bluetooth audio. . Devices cannot be registered during

driving.

! Registering a Bluetooth phone for the first time

To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth phone with the system.

For details about registering a Bluetooth device: Refer to Registering a Bluetooth Audio device for the first time F5-67. 1. Turn the Bluetooth connection setting of your cell phone on.

. This function is not available when Bluetooth connection setting of your cell phone is set to off.

2. Press the HOME button and select the SETTINGS key.

3. Touch the tab and then the SET- TINGS screen will appear.

Settings (When the tab is selected)

. Operations up to this point can also be performed by pressing the off hook switch on the steering wheel.

4. To register a device, touch the Set key on BT Devices Connection.

5-66

Black plate (357,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

BT Devices Connection screen (At the initial startup and when no device is registered).

5. Touch the Add key.

When the Add key is selected (Waiting for the connection request from a device).

. For details about operating the Blue- tooth device, see the manual that comes with it. . To cancel the registration, touch the Cancel key.

6. Register the Bluetooth device using your Bluetooth device.

. A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth device being con- nected, a message confirming regis- tration may be displayed on the Blue- tooth devices screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth device accord- ing to the confirmation message.

7. Check that the screen is displayed when registration is complete.

. The system waits for connection requests coming from the registered device. . At this stage, the Bluetooth func- tions are not yet available.

! Registering a Bluetooth Audio de- vice for the first time

To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary to register an audio device with the system.

The device registration procedure is the same for both the hands-free system and

Bluetooth audio. 1. Display the BT Devices Connection screen. Refer to Registering a Bluetooth phone for the first time F5-66. 2. Select the Add key. The Add key is not displayed when five devices are already registered. To add another device, you need to delete one of the registered devices. Press the key for the device to be deleted, and then select the OK key. 3. Register the Bluetooth device using your Bluetooth device.

. A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth device being con- nected, a message confirming regis- tration may be displayed on the Blue- tooth devices screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth device accord- ing to the confirmation message.

4. Check that the screen is displayed when registration is complete.

. The system waits for connection requests coming from the registered device. . At this stage, the Bluetooth func- tions are not yet available.

Audio/Bluetooth settings

CONTINUED

5-67

5

Black plate (358,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Bluetooth settings

! Profiles

This system supports the following services.

Bluetooth Device Spec. Function Requirements Recommendations

Bluetooth Phone/Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth Specification Registering a Bluetooth de-

vice Ver. 1.1 Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Bluetooth Device Profile Function Requirements Recommendations

Bluetooth Phone

HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.5

OPP (Object Push Profile) Transferring the contacts

Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.1

PBAP (Phone Book Access profile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0

MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth phone message Ver. 1.0

SPP (Serial Port Profile) Connecting a Bluetooth phone Ver. 1.1

Bluetooth Audio Device

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)

Bluetooth audio system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.2

AVRCP (Audio/Video Re- mote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.4

NOTE . If your cell phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible. . If the connected Bluetooth device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth device function may not work properly. . For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your local dealer to arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the vehicle.

5-68

Black plate (359,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Setting Bluetooth details

! BT Devices Connection screen

1. Press the HOME button. 2. Touch the SETTINGS key and then touch the tab. 3. Touch the BT Devices Connection key and then select the desired device to register.

BT Devices Connection screen (One device is registered.)

No. Function

&1 Register the device. Refer to Regis- tering/connecting Bluetooth device F5-66.

&2 Make the connection to the registered device.

No. Function

&3 This shows the status of the device connection profile. (The icon illuminates while connected.)

&4 Delete the registered device. Refer to Deleting a Bluetooth device F5-70.

&5 Switch to connect/disconnect Bluetooth communication. Refer to Bluetooth ON/OFF F5-69.

! Connecting a Bluetooth device

Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (phones and audio devices) can be registered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been registered, select which device to connect to. 1. Display the BT Devices Connection screen. Refer to BT Devices Connection screen F5-69. 2. Select the device to be connected.

. Supported profile icons will be dis- played. : Phone : Audio device : Smartphone Application . Supported profile icons for currently connected devices will illuminate. . The audio icon illuminates only when in the Bluetooth audio mode. . All icons are dimmed when Blue-

tooth is set to off or when the connec- tion cannot be made with the device.

NOTE . It may take time if the device con- nection is carried out during Bluetooth audio playback. . Depending on the type of Bluetooth device being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the device. . It is not possible to establish a Bluetooth connection with iOS devices currently connected with a USB cable. . Supported profile icons of the un- selected devices are not displayed if several Bluetooth devices have been registered.

! Bluetooth ON/OFF

1. Display the BT Devices Connection screen. Refer to BT Devices Connection screen F5-69. 2. Select the ON or OFF key by the right side of the Connect with Bluetooth key. The ON key establishes a connec- tion, and the OFF key disconnects the connection.

Audio/Bluetooth settings

CONTINUED

5-69

5

Black plate (360,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Bluetooth settings

NOTE The setting is fixed as the OFF key when no device is registered.

! Deleting a Bluetooth device

1. Display the BT Devices Connection screen. Refer to BT Devices Connection screen F5-69. 2. Select the desired device. 3. Touch the key for the device to be deleted, and then select the OK key.

NOTE When deleting a Bluetooth phone, the contact data will be deleted at the same time.

! In-Car-Device setting screen

The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed and changed. 1. Display the SETTINGS screen. Refer to Registering a Bluetooth phone for the first time F5-66. 2. On the SETTINGS screen for In- Car-Device setting, select the Set key.

No. Function

&1 Display the Bluetooth device address of the in-vehicle equipment.

&2 Display the Bluetooth device name of the in-vehicle equipment. The default name is SUBARU BT, which can be changed by selecting it and entering alphanumeric characters.

&3 Display the PIN code of the in-vehicle equipment. The default code is 1234, which can be changed by selecting it and entering numbers.

&4 Delete one character from the cur- rently selected item (BT device name or the PIN code).

&5 Save the current BT device name and PIN code.

&6 Numeric input keys.

No. Function

&7 Switch the screen to input characters.

! Editing the Bluetooth device name

The device name can be set or changed. 1. Touch the Name key. 2. Enter a name and then select the Set key.

! Editing the PIN-Code

The PIN-code can be set or changed. 1. Select the PIN Key. 2. Enter a PIN-code and then select the Set key.

NOTE If the PIN key is already selected, the ABC key is cross-hatched and dis- abled.

5-70

Black plate (361,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Hands-free phone system

The hands-free system enables calls to be made and received without having to take your hands off the steering wheel.

This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a wireless data system that enables cell phones to be used without being con- nected by a cable or placed in a cradle.

The operating procedure of the phone is explained here.

WARNING

. While driving, do not use a cell phone or connect the Bluetooth phone. Doing so may result in loss of control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

. Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization ther- apy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

. Before using Bluetooth devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re- synchronization therapy-pace- makers or implantable cardiover- ter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its opera- tion under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the opera- tion of such medical devices.

CAUTION

Do not leave your cell phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may rise to a level that could damage the phone.

NOTE . If your cell phone does not support Bluetooth, this system cannot function. . In the following conditions, the sys- tem may not function:

The cell phone is turned off. The current position is outside the communication area. The cell phone is not connected. The cell phone has a low battery.

. When using the hands free function and other Bluetooth functions at the same time, the following problems may occur:

The Bluetooth connection may be cut. Noise may be heard when play- ing back voice with the Bluetooth function.

. The other partys voice will be heard from the front speakers. The audio/ visual system will be muted during phone calls or when hands-free voice commands are used. . Talk alternately with the other party on the phone. If both parties speak at the same time, the other party may not hear what has been said. (This is not a malfunction.) . Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the other partys voice may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may increase. When talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone. . The other party may not hear you clearly when:

Driving on an unpaved road. (Making excessive traffic noise.) Driving at high speeds. The moonroof or windows are open. The air conditioning vents are

Audio/Handsfree phone system

CONTINUED

5-71

5

Black plate (362,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Handsfree phone system

pointed towards the microphone. The sound of the air conditioning fan is loud. There is a negative effect on sound quality due to the phone and/or network being used.

. When another phone is connected, the following registered data cannot be read:

Contact data Call history data All phone settings

. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize the data. Refer to Unit settings F5-19. . Once initialized, the data and set- tings will be erased. Take extra caution when initializing the data. . The voice command system sup- ports phone commands, so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible. Refer to Voice command system F5-81. . The images shown in this Owners Manual are sample images. The actual images may vary depending on the market and specifications of your ve- hicle.

& Control screen

PHONE (Menu) screen

PHONE (Dialpad) screen

No. Function

&1 Open the Incoming Calls screen. Refer to By incoming calls F5-74.

&2 Open the Outgoing Calls screen. Refer to By outgoing calls F5-75.

&3 Open the Contacts screen. Refer to By contacts list F5-75.

&4 Open the dialpad screen. Refer to By Dialpad F5-76.

&5 Open the phone volume settings screen. Refer to Phone volume set- tings F5-79.

&6 Use to make a phone call. You cannot press this key until you open the dialpad screen and enter a phone number.

&7 Open the BT Devices Connection screen. Refer to Setting Bluetooth details F5-69.

&8 Enter the phone number that you want to call.

&9 Switch the screen to the phone (menu) screen.

NOTE When the cell phone is not registered and the Bluetooth setting is off, a message is displayed instead of menu items.

5-72

Black plate (363,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Registering/connecting a Bluetooth phone

To use the hands-free system for cell phones, it is necessary to register a cell phone with the system. Refer to Register- ing/connecting Bluetooth device F5-66.

! Bluetooth phone condition display

The condition of the Bluetooth phone appears on the upper right side of the screen.

& Using the phone switch/mi- crophone

. Steering switch

By pressing the steering switch, a call can be received or ended without taking your hands off the steering wheel.

1) Volume control switch 2) Off hook switch 3) On hook switch

. Microphone The microphone is used when talking on the phone.

1) Models without SUBARU STARLINK 2) Models with SUBARU STARLINK

(U.S.-spec. models only)

& How to change the hands- free phone system

The phone (menu) screen can be used to make a phone call. To display the hands- free operation screen, press the HOME button and then select the PHONE key, or press the off hook switch on the steering wheel.

Audio/Handsfree phone system

CONTINUED

5-73

5

Black plate (364,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Handsfree phone system

& Making a call There are several methods by which a call can be made, as described below. 1. Press the HOME button on the audio panel. 2. Touch the PHONE key. 3. Select the desired key to make a call from the list.

Item Function

Incoming Calls

Display the history of incoming calls. Refer to By incoming calls F5-74.

Outgoing Calls

Display the history of outgoing calls. Refer to By outgoing calls F5-75.

Contacts Display the phonebook. Refer to By contacts list F5-75.

Item Function

Dialpad Dial a phone number. Refer to By Dialpad F5-76.

NOTE You can also make a call by using the following functions. . Make a call using the off hook switch on the steering wheel. Refer to By off hook switch F5-77. . Make a call using voice operation. Refer to Voice command system F5- 81.

! By incoming calls

On the phone (menu) screen, select the Incoming Calls key to open the Incom- ing Calls screen. You can make a call by selecting an item in the incoming call history list. If there is no incoming call history, a message appears to indicate that there is no incoming call history data.

Incoming Calls screen

No. Function

&1 Open the Outgoing Calls screen.

&2 Open the Contacts screen.

&3 Delete all incoming call history data. The Delete All key is disabled when there is no incoming call history.

When you select an item in the history list on the Incoming Calls screen, the out- going call screen opens.

NOTE . Up to 10 items in the incoming call history are listed. Scroll the screen to see items that are not on the screen. . When making a call to the same

5-74

Black plate (365,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

number continuously, only the most recent call is listed in call history. . When a phone number registered in the contact list is received, the name is displayed. . Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system. . International phone calls may not be made depending on the type of cell phone you have. . The list should group together con- secutive entries with the same phone number and same call type.

! By outgoing calls

On the phone (menu) screen, select the Outgoing Calls key to open the Out- going Calls screen. You can make a call by selecting an item in the outgoing call history list. If there is no outgoing call history, a message appears to indicate that there is no outgoing call history data.

Outgoing Calls screen

No. Function

&1 Open the Incoming Calls screen.

&2 Open the Contacts screen.

&3 Delete all outgoing call history data. The Delete All key is disabled when there is no outgoing call history.

When you select an item in the history list on the Outgoing Calls screen, the out- going call screen opens.

NOTE . Up to 10 items in the outgoing call history are listed. Scroll the screen to see items that are not on the screen. . When making a call to the same number continuously, only the most recent call is listed in call history. . When a phone number registered in the contact list is received, the name is displayed. . Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system. . International phone calls may not be made depending on the type of cell phone you have. . The list should group together con- secutive entries with the same phone number and same call type.

! By contacts list

On the phone (menu) screen, select the Contacts key to open the phone number list screen. You can make a call by selecting an item in the list (up to five phone numbers are listed). If there is no contact data, a message is displayed to indicate that there is no contact data.

Audio/Handsfree phone system

CONTINUED

5-75

5

Black plate (366,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Handsfree phone system

Contacts screen

No. Function

&1 Open the Incoming Calls screen.

&2 Open the Outgoing Calls screen.

&3 Open a pop-up screen for starting the download of contact data. Refer to Update contacts from phone F5-80.

&4 Delete all contact data. The Delete All key is disabled when there is no contact data. Refer to Deleting the contact data F5-81.

No. Function

&5 Open a list of contacts that starts with the selected character. This key is cross-hatched and cannot be se- lected if there is no contact data that starts with the selected character.

Select the up/down arrow key to scroll the list of contacts. When you select a phone number on the screen, the outgoing call screen opens.

NOTE Up to 1000 items in the contact data are listed. Scroll the screen to see items that are not on the screen.

! When the contact is empty

For PBAP incompatible but OPP com- patible Bluetooth phones

On the Contacts screen, select the Download Contacts key. A screen where you can select how to download contacts opens. You can select to download all items or download one item. For details, refer to Update contacts from phone F5-80.

! Delete contacts

When the Delete All key is selected, all contact data downloaded into the in- vehicle equipment will be deleted. Refer to Deleting the contact data F5- 81.

! By Dialpad

Input the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen.

Phone (Dialpad) screen

No. Function

&1 Allow you to enter numbers from 0 to 9 and *, #, and +. To enter +, press and hold the 0 key.

&2 Delete one character from the entered characters.

5-76

Black plate (367,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

No. Function

&3 Switch the screen to the phone (menu) screen.

&4

Open the Outgoing Calls screen and dials the entered phone number. This is the same as pressing the off hook switch on the steering wheel. This key is cross-hatched and cannot be se- lected until the phone number is entered.

&5 Open the Options screen. Refer to Phone volume settings F5-79.

&6 Open the BT Devices Connection screen. Refer to Setting Bluetooth details F5-69.

When you enter a phone number on the screen and select the key, the Out- going Call screen opens.

! By off hook switch

Calls can be made using the latest call history item. 1. Press the off hook switch on the steering wheel to display the phone (menu) screen. 2. Check that the call screen is dis- played.

! Outgoing screen

Outgoing call screen

No. Function

&1 Open the Options screen. Refer to Phone volume settings F5-79.

&2 Abort the call. The screen returns to the phone (menu) screen. This is the same as pressing the on hook switch on the steering wheel.

NOTE . Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone. . When you are on the outgoing call screen, the screen changes to the call screen when the other party answers the call.

. The , , and keys are disabled on the outgoing call screen.

& Receiving a call

! Incoming calls

When a call is received, the incoming call screen is displayed with a sound. When you receive a phone call while the cell phone is connected, the screen changes to the incoming call screen.

Incoming call screen

No. Function

&1 Open the Options screen. Refer to Phone volume settings F5-79.

Audio/Handsfree phone system

CONTINUED

5-77

5

Black plate (368,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Handsfree phone system

No. Function

&2

Put the incoming call on hold. This function may not work on some cell phone models. This function is the same as pressing the on hook switch on the steering wheel for a short period of time.

&3 Open the call screen. This function is the same as pressing the off hook switch on the steering wheel.

&4 Reject the incoming call. This function is the same as pressing and holding the on hook switch on the steering wheel.

NOTE . During international phone calls, the other partys name or number may not be displayed correctly depending on the type of cell phone you have. . The ringtone that has been set in the phone setting screen sounds when there is an incoming call. Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone, both the system and Bluetooth phone may sound simultaneously when there is an incoming call. Refer to Phone volume settings F5-79.

! By off/on hook switch

When you receive a call, you can also answer it by pressing the off hook switch on the steering wheel. To end a call, press the on hook switch.

& Talking on the phone The call screen opens when you perform the following operations. . When you accept a call on the incom- ing call screen (by selecting the key), the call screen opens. . When you are on the outgoing call screen, the screen changes to the call screen when the other party answers the call.

While talking on the phone, this screen is displayed. The operations outlined below can be performed on this screen. . When the incoming call screen is displayed and you accept the call, the screen changes to the call screen. The screen stays on the incoming call screen if you reject the call. . The and keys are disabled on the incoming call screen.

Call screen

Call (Dialpad) screen (DTMF)

5-78

Black plate (369,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

No. Function

&1 Open the Options screen. Refer to Phone volume settings F5-79.

&2 Mute your voice to the other party. Touch this key again to deactivate the Mute mode. This key is disabled in the private mode.

&3 Change the mode to private mode. The other partys voice emits from the cell phone. Touch this key again to deactivate the private mode.

&4

End the call. This will return you to the phone (menu) screen when ending outgoing calls and the previous screen when ending incoming calls. This function is the same as pressing the on hook switch on the steering wheel.

&5 Open the call (dialpad) screen. For details about how to use the function, refer to By Dialpad F5-76.

&6 Switch the screen to the phone (menu) screen.

&7 Allow you to make DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) calls. The numbers you enter are sent as tone signals.

NOTE . When cell phone call is changed to hands-free call, the hands-free screen is displayed and its functions can be operated on the screen. . Changing between cell phone call and hands-free call can be performed

by operating the cell phone directly. . Transferring methods and opera- tions will be different depending on the type of cell phone you have. . For the operation of the cell phone, see the manual that comes with it. . The sound quality of the voice heard from the other partys speaker may be negatively impacted.

& Phone settings You can transfer the phonebook informa- tion and adjust the volume of your phone using the Bluetooth phone system.

NOTE . The ringer volume for outgoing and incoming calls, as well as the volume while on hold or during a call are controlled independently from the vo- lume of the audio source. The volume setting in the phone setting is applied. . When making a call, receiving a call or while talking on the phone, you can adjust the volume by using the power/ Volume knob on the audio panel or the volume control switch on the steering wheel.

! Phone volume settings

The call and ringtone volume can be adjusted. A ringtone can be selected. 1. Display the PHONE screen. Refer to How to change the hands-free phone system F5-73. 2. Touch the key. 3. Select the desired item to be set.

. On the PHONE screen, the screen changes to the Options screen when you select the key.

Options (volume settings) screen

Audio/Handsfree phone system

CONTINUED

5-79

5

Black plate (370,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Handsfree phone system

No. Function

&1 Adjust the ringtone volume. The key lowers the volume, and the + key increases the volume. (Default volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume levels)

&2 Adjust the receive volume. The key lowers the volume, and the + key increases the volume. (Default volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume levels)

&3 Adjust the transmit volume. The key lowers the volume, and the + key increases the volume. (Default volume: 3 out of a total of 5 volume levels)

NOTE . Depending on the type of phone, certain functions may not be available. . Contact data is managed indepen- dently for every registered phone. When one phone is connected, another phones registered data cannot be read.

! Update contacts from phone

Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP (Object Push Profile) compatible Bluetooth phones. 1. Display the PHONE screen. Refer to How to change the hands-free phone

system F5-73. 2. Touch the Contacts key, and then select the Download Contacts key.

Contacts screen (Download selection)

No. Function

&1

Open the download confirmation screen. Confirm whether or not to download. If the downloaded contact (s) already exist(s), confirm whether or not to overwrite the existing data.

&2 Download one set of contact data. To download the data, you need to operate from the connected device.

&3 Cancel the download. The screen returns to the Contacts screen.

NOTE . If your cell phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts can- not be transferred. . When you are transferring the con- tacts data, you may have to operate the cell phone, depending on the type of cell phone. . Depending on the type of cell phone, some functions may not be supported.

! For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones

1. Select the Download Contacts or Download 1 Entry key. Contacts are transferred automatically. 2. Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

. This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cell phone. . If another Bluetooth device is con- nected when transferring contact data, depending on the phone, the con- nected Bluetooth device may need to be disconnected.

5-80

Black plate (371,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth phones

1. Select the Download 1 Entry key. 2. Transfer the contact data to the sys- tem using a Bluetooth phone.

. This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cell phone. . To cancel this function, select the Cancel key.

3. Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

NOTE To download all items, you may need to change the settings in your cell phone beforehand.

! Deleting the contact data

You can delete the phonebook data stored in the audio set. 1. Display the PHONE screen. Refer to How to change the hands-free phone system F5-73. 2. Touch the Contacts key, and then select the Delete All key. 3. Select the OK key when the con- firmation screen appears.

NOTE . Manual transfer operation cannot be performed while driving. . If your cell phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts can- not be transferred. . Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone:

It may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone when transferring contact data.

Voice command system

The voice command system enables the audio, hands-free phone system, etc. to be operated using voice commands. Refer to the Command list F5-85 for samples of voice commands. Voice commands can be used even when you set the system to another language. For details about setting language, refer to General settings F5-20.

Audio/Voice command system

CONTINUED

5-81

5

Black plate (372,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Voice command system

& Using the voice command system

! Steering switch

1) Talk switch

Action Function

Press Start the voice com- mand system.

Press and hold Cancel voice recogni- tion.

! Microphone

1) Models without SUBARU STARLINK 2) Models with SUBARU STARLINK

(U.S.-spec. models only)

It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.

NOTE . Wait for the confirmation beep be- fore speaking a command. . Voice commands may not be recog- nized if:

Spoken too quickly. Spoken at a low or high volume. The moonroof or windows are open. Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken. The air conditioning speed is set

high. The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.

. In the following conditions, the sys- tem may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not be possible:

The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize. There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.

5-82

Black plate (373,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Voice command system op- eration

1. Press the talk switch on the steering wheel. After the voice command top screen has been displayed, speech guidance will commence.

NOTE When the voice command mode is audio mode, voice guidance for the voice command system can be skipped by pressing the talk switch on the steering wheel.

2. Say the command.

Example (Say PHONE)

NOTE . Commands related with each func- tion are displayed on the screen of the each function tab. Some commonly used commands are displayed on the screen of the main tab. Even if any tab is selected, all commands can be operated. . Saying Help prompts guidance to offer examples of commands and op- eration methods. . To cancel voice recognition, select 6, or press and hold the talk switch on the steering wheel. . If the system does not respond or the confirmation screen does not dis- appear, press the talk switch on the

steering wheel and try again. . The notations used in the com- mands are as follows.

< >: Numbers, titles or names to be spoken

! Voice command example: Call name

1. Press the talk switch on the steering wheel. 2. Say Call .

. A confirmation screen will be dis- played showing the recognition re- sults. If multiple matching items are found, a selection screen will be displayed. Say or select the number.

NOTE . In the same manner as it is dis- played on the screen, Call , after saying Call a contact say the name of a contact. For exam- ple: Call a contact, John Smith or Call a contact, Mary Davis . Short or abbreviated names in the contacts list may not be recognized. Change names in the contacts list to full names. . Sometimes a voice recognition re- sult confirmation screen will be dis- played. After confirming the result, say

Audio/Voice command system

CONTINUED

5-83

5

Black plate (374,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Voice command system

Yes or No. . When the system recognizes multi- ple names from the contacts list, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the top of the screen, say or select the number of the name from the candidate list (number 1, number 2, etc.) to select a name from the candidate list. . When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the contacts list, a candidate list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say or select the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (num- ber 1, number 2, etc.) to select a phone number from the candidate list.

! Voice command example: Dial number

1. Press the talk switch on the steering wheel. 2. Say Dial number. 3. Say Dial . For example, if the phone number is 2345678: Say two three four five six seven eight Do not say twenty three forty five sixty seven eight

4. Say Dial or press the off hook switch on the steering wheel.

NOTE . When the system recognizes multi- ple phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen. Pressing the off hook switch on the steering wheel makes a call to the top entry on the list. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list to select a phone number from the candidate list. . Calling to the following phone num- bers

3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611) 7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers) 10 digit numbers (Area code + Local phone number) 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code + Local phone number)

. As the system cannot recognize additional numbers, say the complete number without stopping.

! Casual speech recognization

Due to natural language speech recogni- tion technology, this system enables re- cognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every variation of each com- mand. In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly state the desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in the function menu.

NOTE If the command cannot be recognized completely, the command input screen will be displayed. (Search results will be shown based on the part of the command that was recognized.)

! Expression examples for each function

Command Expression examples

Dial

Phone .

5-84

Black plate (375,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Command list Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.

NOTE . Some voice commands may not be available depending on the market, vehicle specifications or the device connection status. . Frequently used commands are listed in the following tables. . For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be displayed on the screen. Also, according to conditions, other com- mands may not be displayed on the screen. . The functions available may vary according to the system installed. . Voice recognition language can be changed. Refer to Unit settings F5- 19. . The notations used in the com- mands are as follows.

< >: Numbers, titles or names to be spoken ( ): There is no need to speak the command, the voice command system will recognize the content.

! Basic command

Voice command Function

Back

Go back one hierar- chy or cancel the voice recognition (voice command top screen)

Help Ask for help with the current task

Cancel, Close Cancel the current task

Yes

No

Display OFF Turns the display off

Audio ON Turns the audio sys- tem on

Audio OFF Turns the audio sys- tem off

STARLINK Switch to APPS mode

! Commands for changing the audio mode

Voice command Function

Change to AM Switch to AM mode

Change to AM1 Switch to AM mode band 1

Change to AM2 Switch to AM mode band 2

Change to FM Switch to FM mode

Change to FM1 Switch to FM mode band 1

Change to FM2 Switch to FM mode band 2

Change to FM3 Switch to FM mode band 3

Change to SiriusXM Switch to XM mode

Change to BT Audio Switch to Bluetooth Audio mode

Change to CD Switch to CD mode

Change to USB Switch to USB mode

Change to iPod Switch to iPod mode

Change to aha Switch to aha radio mode

Change to Pandora Switch to Pandora mode

Change to AUX Switch to AUX mode

Audio/Voice command system

CONTINUED

5-85

5

Black plate (376,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Voice command system

! Commands for hands-free phone

Voice command Function

Dial Number ? <0-9, +, *, #> ? Change number, Dial Places a call to the

said phone number Dial <0-9, +, *, #> ? Change number, Dial

Contacts, Phonebook ? ? <1-5> ? Dial Make a call by using

the phonebook Call ? <1-5> ? Dial

Call History ? In- coming call, Outgoing call ? Next (page), Previous (page) ? <1-5> ? Dial

Make a call by using the call history

Incoming Calls Display the call his- tory screen

Outgoing Calls Display the call his- tory screen

Redial Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing call

Callback Places a call to the phone number of the latest incoming call

Select Phone ? <1-5>

Display the phone select screen

Phone Menu Display the hands free top screen

! Commands for Pandora

Voice command Function

Like Mark Like flag

Dislike Mark Dislike flag

Skip, Next Skip to the next song

! Commands for aha

Voice command Function

Thumbs Up, Heart, Like Mark Like flag

Thumbs Down, Ban, Dislike Mark Dislike flag

Refresh, update Refresh the selected station to get the lat- est information

Content Up Playback next Con- tent

Content Down Playback previous Content

! Commands for AM/FM control

Voice command Function

Seek Up Tunes in the higher frequency direction

Seek Down Tunes in the lower frequency direction

Scan Switch to the scan mode

Tune to Designate the fre- quency to switch to a specific radio station

Preset

Designate the preset channel to switch to specific radio station

Tag iTunes Tagging for HD Radio

5-86

Black plate (377,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Commands for SiriusXM radio con- trol

Voice command Function

Preset

Designate the preset channel to switch to specific radio station

Scan Switch to the scan mode

Channel

Designate the chan- nel to switch to spe- cific radio station

Category ? Next (page), Previous (page), <1-5> ? Next (page), Previous (page), <1-5>

Displays the category list screen

! Commands for CD control

Voice command Function

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down Select the current track

Scan Switch to the scan mode

Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat, Repeat All Select a repeat mode

1 Track Repeat Repeat single track

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Shuffle Plays randomly

! Commands for MP3/WMA/AAC, USB control

Voice command Function

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down Select the current track

Folder Up Plays from the start of the next folder

Folder Down Plays from the start of the previous folder

Scan Switch to the scan mode

Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat, Repeat Folder, Repeat All

Select a repeat mode

1 Track Repeat Repeat single track

Repeat Folder Repeat of the folder

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Shuffle ? Shuffle Folder, Shuffle All

Select a random play mode

Shuffle Folder Plays randomly of the folder

Shuffle All Plays randomly

! Commands for iPod Control

Voice command Function

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down Select the current track

Repeat ? Repeat One, Repeat All Select a repeat mode

Repeat One Repeat single track

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Shuffle ? Shuffle Track, Shuffle Album, Shuffle OFF

Select a random play mode

Shuffle Track Shuffle all tracks

Shuffle Album Shuffle all tracks

Shuffle OFF Turn off shuffle

Audio/Voice command system

CONTINUED

5-87

5

Black plate (378,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Voice command system

! Commands for Bluetooth audio control

Voice command Function

Pause Pause play

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down Select the current track

Repeat ? 1 track Repeat, Repeat All, Group Repeat

Select a repeat mode

1 Track Repeat Repeat single track

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Group Repeat Repeat tracks on group

Shuffle ? Shuffle All, Group Shuffle, Shuf- fle OFF

Select a random play mode

Shuffle All Shuffle all tracks

Group Shuffle Shuffle tracks on group

Shuffle OFF Turn off shuffle

5-88

Black plate (379,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

What to do if...

& Troubleshooting If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth device, first check the table below.

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device

Symptom Likely cause Solution Page

Cell phone

This system

The hands-free system or Bluetooth device does not work.

The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth cell phone.

For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your local dealer to arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the vehicle.

*

The Bluetooth version of the connected cell phone may be older than the specified version.

Use a cell phone with Bluetooth version 1.1 or higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher).

* 5-68

*: For details, refer to the owners manual that came with the cell phone.

Audio/What to do if...

CONTINUED

5-89

5

Black plate (380,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/What to do if...

When registering/connecting a cell phone

Symptom Likely cause Solution Page

Cell phone

This system

A cell phone cannot be registered.

An incorrect passcode was entered on the cell phone. Enter the correct passcode on the cell phone. *

The registration operation has not been completed on the cell phone side.

Complete the registration operation on the cell phone (approve registration on the phone). *

Old registration information remains on either this system or the cell phone.

Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cell phone, then register the cell phone you wish to connect to this system.

* 5-69

A Bluetooth connection cannot be made.

Another Bluetooth device is already connected.

Manually connect the cell phone you wish to use to this system. 5-69

Bluetooth function is not enabled on the cell phone. Enable the Bluetooth function on the cell phone. *

Automatic Bluetooth connection on this system is set to off.

Set automatic Bluetooth connection on this system to on when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or ON position.

5-69

*: For details, refer to the owners manual that came with the cell phone.

5-90

Black plate (381,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

When using the phonebook

Symptom Likely cause Solution Page

Cell phone

This system

Phonebook data cannot be trans- ferred manually.

The profile version of the connected cell phone may not be compatible with transferring phonebook data.

For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your local dealer to arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the vehicle.

*

Transfer operation on the cell phone has not completed.

Complete transfer operation on the cell phone (approve transfer operation on the phone). *

Phonebook data cannot be edited. Editing function is not available on this system. 5-79

*: For details, refer to the owners manual that came with the cell phone.

Audio/What to do if...

CONTINUED

5-91

5

Black plate (382,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/What to do if...

In other situations

Symptom Likely cause Solution Page

Cell phone

This system

Even though all conceivable mea- sures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.

The cell phone is not close enough to this system. Bring the cell phone closer to this system.

The cell phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.

Turn the cell phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack, and then restart the cell phone.

*

Enable the cell phones Bluetooth connection. *

Stop the cell phones security software and close all applications. *

Before using an application installed on the cell phone, carefully check its source and how its operation might affect this system.

*

*: For details, refer to the owners manual that came with the cell phone.

5-92

Black plate (383,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Appendix

& Certification . Bluetooth

The Bluetooth word mark and logo are registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Clarion Co., Ltd. is under license.

. Sir iusXM Sate l l i te Radio ( i f equipped)

SiriusXMTM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. All rights reserved.

. Pandora (if equipped)

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and other Pandora marks are trademarks or regis- tered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., or its subsidiaries worldwide. If you have any issues with the Pandora application on your mobile phone, please direct them to pandora-support@pandora.com.

. iPod

Made for iPod and Made for iPhone mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regula- tory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

. How to get the source code using the open source

This system implements software using the open source. For customers who would like to get the source code of the software, it is available by downloading it from the web site of Clarion Co., Ltd. For details, refer to the following web site.

http://www.clarion.com/us/en/support/in- dex.html

& Certification for the Hands- free system

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-ex- empt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- ject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired opera- tion.

Le prsent appareil est conforme la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC et CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appa- reils radio exempts de licence. Lexploita- tion est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency

Audio/Appendix

CONTINUED

5-93

5

Black plate (384,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Audio/Appendix

(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements nonces pour un environnement non contrl et respecte les lignes directrices dexposition aux frquences radiolectriques de la FCC dans le Supplment C OET65 et dexposition aux frquences radiolectri- ques (RF) CNR-102 de lIC. Cet quipe- ment met une nergie RF trs faible qui est considre conforme sans valuation de lexposition maximale autorise.

FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

& Certification for Mexico mod- els

. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-250 Clarion PF-3547

. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-253 Clarion PF-3688

5-94

Black plate (13,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2 Dome light .......................................................... 6-2 Cargo area light .................................................. 6-2 Map lights ........................................................... 6-3 OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4 Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-4 Vanity mirror ....................................................... 6-5 Vanity mirror with light (if equipped) .................... 6-5

Storage compartment ......................................... 6-6 Glove box ........................................................... 6-6 Center console.................................................... 6-6 Overhead console (if equipped) ........................... 6-7

Cup holders ......................................................... 6-7 Front passengers cup holder .............................. 6-7 Rear passengers cup holder (if equipped) ........... 6-8

Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-9 Accessory power outlets.................................... 6-9

Use with a cigarette lighter (if equipped) ............. 6-11

Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-11 Floor mat (if equipped)...................................... 6-12 Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-13 Convenient hook................................................ 6-13 Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................... 6-14

Using the cover ................................................. 6-14 To install the front cover .................................... 6-14 To remove the front cover .................................. 6-14 To remove the cover housing............................. 6-15 Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 6-15 To install the cover housing ............................... 6-16

Cargo tie-down hooks ....................................... 6-16 Under-floor storage compartment (if equipped) ........................................................ 6-17

Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-17 How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-18 Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-19 Help line............................................................ 6-20

Interior equipment

6

Black plate (388,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Interior lights

Interior lights

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the lights are turned off to avoid battery discharge.

& Dome light

1) ON 2) DOOR 3) OFF

The dome light switch has the following three positions.

ON: The light remains on continuously. OFF: The light remains off.

DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto- matically in the following cases. . Any of the doors or the rear gate is opened. . The doors or the rear gate are un- locked using the keyless access function (if equipped). Refer to Locking and unlocking with keyless access entry function F2-13. . The doors or the rear gate are un- locked using the remote keyless entry system. Refer to Remote keyless entry system F2-21. . The ignition switch is turned from the ACC position to the LOCK/OFF posi- tion.

& Cargo area light

1) ON 2) OFF

ON: The light illuminates when the rear gate is opened. The light remains illumi- nated for several seconds and gradually turns off after the rear gate is closed. OFF: The light remains off.

6-2

Black plate (389,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Map lights

1) Map light switch (lens)

To turn on the map light, push the lens. To turn it off, push the lens again.

! Door interlock switch

1) Door interlock switch

Although the map light switches (lenses) are in the OFF position (manually off), the map lights can be set to illuminate auto- matically in conjunction with a door open- ing, etc. by use of the door interlock switch. The door interlock switch has the following positions.

OFF: The map lights do not illuminate automatically in conjunction with a door opening. However, the lights can be turned on manually by pushing the map light switches (lenses). DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto- matically in the following cases. . Any of the doors other than the rear gate is opened. (The map lights do not

illuminate when only the rear gate is opened.) . The doors are unlocked using the keyless access function (if equipped). Refer to Locking and unlocking with keyless access entry function F2-13. . The doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry system. Refer to Remote keyless entry system F2-21. . The ignition switch is turned from the ACC position to the LOCK/OFF posi- tion.

& OFF delay timer The following lights have an automatic illumination function. . dome light . map light . cargo area light

After being illuminated automatically, these lights remain on for several seconds and then gradually turn off under the following conditions. . after all doors and the rear gate are closed (dome light) . after all doors are closed (map light) . after the rear gate is closed (cargo area light)

While the lights are illuminated, if any of the following operations are performed,

Interior equipment/Interior lights

CONTINUED

6-3

6

Black plate (390,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Sun visors

the lights turn off immediately. . The ignition switch is turned from the LOCK/OFF position to the ACC or ON position. . All doors and the rear gate are locked using the keyless access function (if equipped). . All doors and the rear gate are locked using the remote keyless entry system.

The setting for the period of time in which the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con- tact your SUBARU dealer for details. For models with multi function display, the setting can be changed by operating the multi function display. For details, refer to Interior light off delay timer setting F3- 84.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.

& Sun visor extension plate

With the sun visor positioned over the side window, you can use the sun visor extension plate to prevent glare through the gap between the sun visor and center pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it toward the rear of the vehicle. When you have finished using it, stow it by pushing it toward the front of the vehicle.

6-4

Black plate (391,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension plate with the sun visor positioned over the windshield. The extension plate would obstruct your view of the rearview mirror.

& Vanity mirror

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed while the car is being driven to avoid being temporarily blinded by the glare of bright light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

& Vanity mirror with light (if equipped)

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed while the car is being driven to avoid being distracted by the light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. The light beside the vanity mirror illumi- nates when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE Use of the vanity mirror light for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

Interior equipment/Sun visors 6-5

6

Black plate (392,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Storage compartment

Storage compartment

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com- partment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain- ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compart- ment.

& Glove box

1) Lock 2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box, insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.

& Center console The center console box provides a sto- rage space.

1) Coin tray 2) Accessory tray 3) Card holder

The lid located inside the center console can be used as a coin tray or an accessory tray for small items. There is a card holder on the reverse side of the lid.

When the lid inside the center console is removed, you can use a pen holder.

6-6

Black plate (393,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

1) Paper holder (if equipped) 2) Pen holder

The top of the console can be used as an armrest.

For some models, the armrest is adjus- table. Slide the armrest to the desired

position.

& Overhead console (if equipped)

To open the console, push on the console lid lightly. The lid will automatically open.

CAUTION

. Before driving, ensure that the overhead console is closed.

. When your vehicle is parked in the sun or on a warm day, the inside of the overhead console heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat-vulnerable or flam- mable articles such as a lighter in the overhead console.

Cup holders

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you and/or your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery, carpets or audio equipment.

& Front passengers cup holder

CAUTION

Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.

Interior equipment/Cup holders

CONTINUED

6-7

6

Black plate (394,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Cup holders

A dual cup holder is built into the console.

The divider in the cup holder can be pulled out.

NOTE . The shape of the front passengers cup holder may be slightly different depending on the model. . With the divider taken out, the cup holder can be used as a storage box.

& Rear passengers cup holder (if equipped)

CAUTION

When a cup in the rear passengers cup holder contains a beverage, do not fold down the rear seatback. Otherwise, the beverage could spill and, if the beverage is hot, it could burn you and/or your passengers.

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

6-8

Black plate (395,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Bottle holders

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the bottle holder or put a bottle in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a bottle holder, make sure it is capped. Otherwise, the beverage could spill when opening/closing the door or while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it could burn you and/or your passengers.

The bottle holder equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold a beverage bottle and other items.

Accessory power outlets

Power outlet below the climate control

Power outlet in the center console

Interior equipment/Bottle holders

CONTINUED

6-9

6

Black plate (396,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets

Power outlet in the cargo area

Accessory power outlets are provided below the climate control dials, in the center console and in the cargo area. Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available at any of the outlets when the ignition switch is in either the ACC or ON position. You can use an in-vehicle electrical appliance by connecting it to an outlet. The maximum power rating of an appli- ance that can be connected is 120W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet. When using appliances connected to two or more outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 120W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlets.

. Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Al- ways put the cap on the acces- sory power outlet when it is not in use.

. Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wat- tage for each outlet.

When using appliances con- nected to two or more outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 120W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli- ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appliance will not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accel- erator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving.

6-10

Black plate (397,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

NOTE When the lid of the center console is closed, an opening remains between the center console and the lid to allow the power outlet in the center console to be used. Pass the cord of the electrical appliance through this open- ing.

& Use with a cigarette lighter (if equipped)

To use the accessory power outlet as a cigarette lighter socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is available from your SUBARU dealer. The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments. It will automatically spring up when ready for use.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could also damage the heating element.

CAUTION

. Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it will overheat.

. The electrical power socket is originally designed to use a gen- uine SUBARU cigarette lighter plug. Do not use a non-genuine cigarette lighter plug in the sock- et. Doing so may cause a short- circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.

. If the socket is ever used for a plug-in accessory such as a cell phone, that may damage the portion of the sockets internal mechanism that causes a cigar- ette lighter plug to pop out after its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do not place a cigar- ette lighter plug in a socket that has been used, even once, to power a plug-in accessory. Doing so may cause the plug to stick and overheat, creating a potential fire hazard.

Ashtray (if equipped)

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them into the ashtray, and then close the ashtray securely. If you keep the ashtray open, the fire of the cigarette may spread to another cigarette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material in the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette butts in the ashtray.

NOTE Particles of ash and tobacco will accu- mulate around the hinges of the ash- trays inner lid. Clean them off using a toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended implement.

Interior equipment/Ashtray

CONTINUED

6-11

6

Black plate (398,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Floor mat

The portable ashtray can be installed in each cup holder or bottle holder. For the locations of the cup holders, refer to Cup holders F6-7. For the locations of the bottle holders, refer to Bottle holdersF6- 9.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

Floor mat (if equipped)

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident. Observe the following precautions to prevent the floor mat from slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuine SUBARU floor mat or an equiva- lent designed with grommets in the correct locations.

. Make sure that the drivers floor mat is placed in its proper loca- tion and is correctly secured on its retaining pins.

. Do not use more than one floor mat.

Retaining pins are located on the drivers side floor. The floor mat should be properly secured using the built-in grommets, by placing the grommets over the pins and pushing them downward.

6-12

Black plate (399,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or more.

A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area.

Convenient hook

CAUTION

. Do not hang items on the con- venient hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or more. Depending on the conditions of use (for example, in low temperatures, etc.), the rear gate may lower even with lighter loads. However, this is not a malfunction. Be careful not to hit your head or other body parts.

. When using the convenient hook, do not try to close the rear gate. Doing so may cause the item on the hook to be jammed in the rear gate and damaged. Remove the item from the hook before clos- ing the rear gate.

A convenient hook is attached to the rear gate trim. When the rear gate is open, you can hang a candle lantern, wet suit, etc. on the hook.

Interior equipment/Shopping bag hook 6-13

6

Black plate (400,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover

Cargo area cover (if equipped)

The cargo area cover is provided for covering the cargo area and to protect its contents from direct sunlight. This cover is detachable to make room for additional cargo.

& Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, unhook it from the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex- tended cover. Putting excessive weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear gate stays while extending and rewinding the cover. Scratches on the stays could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.

& To install the front cover

CAUTION

For models with a rear seat reclining mechanism, when reclining the rear seatback, move the front cover backward so that the cover is not damaged.

1. Align the right side of the front cover with the triangle mark before fixing the cover in place. 2. Push the front cover to the right side and shorten the bar. 3. Align the left side of the front cover with the triangle mark before fixing the cover in place.

& To remove the front cover 1. Push the front cover to the right side and shorten the bar. 2. Remove the front cover.

6-14

Black plate (401,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& To remove the cover housing 1. Rewind the cover.

2. Push the cover housing to the right side and shorten it. 3. Take it off the retainer.

& Stowage of the cargo area cover

The cargo area cover can be stowed in under the cargo floor.

1. Pull the strap to open the center part of the cargo floor lid, and then remove the lid. 2. Remove the left and right parts of the cargo floor lid.

3. Stow the cover housing in the cargo area end.

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover

CONTINUED

6-15

6

Black plate (402,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Cargo tiedown hooks

& To install the cover housing

1. Insert the protrusion located on the right end of the sleeve into the recess of the retainer.

2. Push the cover housing to the right

side and shorten the bar. 3. Insert the other protrusion into the recess of the other retainer.

Cargo tie-down hooks

The cargo area is equipped with four tie- down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a cargo net or ropes. When using the front tie-down hooks, turn them down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de- signed only for securing light cargo. Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.

6-16

Black plate (403,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Under-floor storage compart- ment (if equipped)

NOTE

The shape of the storage compartment may be different depending on the model.

The storage compartment is located under the floor of the cargo area and can be used to store small items. Pull the strap to open the center part of the cargo floor lid, and then remove the lid.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lids closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain- ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compart- ment.

Rear view camera (if equipped)

A rear view camera is attached to the rear gate. When the ignition switch is ON and the shift lever (MT models) or select lever (CVT models) is set to R, the rear view camera automatically displays the rear view image behind the vehicle on the monitor of the navigation system or the audio display.

WARNING

. Since the rear view camera uses a wide-angle lens, the image on the monitor is different from the actual view in terms of distance.

. Since the range and field of view

Interior equipment/Underfloor storage compartment

CONTINUED

6-17

6

Black plate (404,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

of the image on the monitor is limited, you should always check the rear view and the surround- ing area with your eyes and mirrors, and move backward at a slow speed. Moving backward only by checking the rear view image from the camera could cause an accident.

. Do not disassemble or modify the camera, switch or wiring. If smoke comes out or you smell a strange odor, stop using the rear view camera immediately. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Continued use may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle is washed with a high-pressure washer, do not allow water to contact the camera directly. Entry of water into the camera lens may result in con- densation, malfunction, fire or electric shock.

. Since the camera is a precision device, do not subject it to strong impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,

fire or electric shock may occur.

. If mud or snow sticks to or is frozen on the camera, you must be very careful when removing it. Otherwise, damage to the camera may cause a fire or electric shock. Pour water or lukewarm water over the camera to remove mud and ice, and wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

. Do not put a flame close to the camera or wiring. Otherwise, da- mage or fire may occur.

. When replacing the fuse, be sure to use a fuse with the specified rating. Use of a fuse with a different rating may result in a malfunction.

. If the rear view camera is used for a long time while the engine is not operated, the battery may become completely discharged.

NOTE . Do not wipe the camera with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the camera with a cloth moistened with a diluted neutral detergent and then wipe it with a soft,

dry cloth. . When waxing the vehicle, be careful not to apply the wax to the camera. If it comes in contact with the camera, moisten a clean cloth with a diluted neutral detergent to remove the wax. . The camera lens has a hard coating to help prevent scratches. However, when washing the vehicle or cleaning the camera lens, be careful not to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a washing brush directly on the camera lens. The image quality of the rear view camera may deteriorate. . Strong light shined on the camera lens may develop vertical lines around the light source. This is not a malfunc- tion. . Under fluorescent light, the display may flicker. However, this is not a malfunction. . The image of the rear view camera may be slightly different from the actual color of the objects.

& How to use the rear view camera

When the shift lever/select lever is set to R, the rear view camera automatically displays the rear view image from the vehicle. When the lever is set to other positions, the image before setting to R

6-18

Black plate (405,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

is displayed. 1. Set the ignition switch to ON. 2. Set the shift lever/select lever to R.

NOTE . For models with the genuine SUBARU navigation or audio system, while the navigation system is acti- vated, the image of the rear view camera will not be displayed. However, the image of the rear view camera has priority over other screen displays. . The image of the rear view camera has priority over other screen displays. . The image of the rear view camera is horizontally reversed as is the case with the vehicle rearview mirror or the side view mirror. . It may be difficult to see the image of the rear view camera in the following cases. This is not a malfunction of the camera.

The vehicle is used for towing or a trailer hitch is installed. The vehicle is in a dark place (at night, in a tunnel, etc.). The vehicle is in an extremely hot or cold place. An object (such as raindrops, snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the view of the rear view camera sticks

to the lens of the camera. Strong light shined directly on the camera lens (occasionally, there are vertical lines on the screen).

& Viewing range on the screen

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with the rear view camera is limited. Always be sure to check with your eyes when moving backward and proceed slowly.

Range of view

Range of view

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the bumper and areas just under the bumper cannot be viewed.

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

CONTINUED

6-19

6

Black plate (406,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

Also, the image from the rear view camera looks shorter than the actual distance.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be viewed. If there is an object that has a

wide projection on its upper part such as a sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec- tion cannot be seen on the screen.

& Help line The help line (distance marker and vehicle width line) is a guide to help you realize the actual distance from the screen image.

1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line) 2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line) 3) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line) 4) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line) 5) Vehicle centerline

When the shift lever/select lever is set to position R, the monitor screen displays the help lines together with the rear view

image.

CAUTION

. When moving backward, always check the back with your eyes without relying on the help lines.

. The actual position may be dif- ferent from the indication of the help lines.

. Differences may occur due to number of passengers or loaded cargo.

. When the vehicle is on a slope or when the vehicle is inclined against the road, the indication is different from the actual posi- tion.

. Be sure to observe the displayed warning message Check Sur- roundings Before Backing Up.

NOTE If you shift to the R range shortly after turning on the ignition switch, the warning message Check Surround- ings Before Backing Up may not be displayed. Wait for several seconds or more after turning on the ignition switch before shifting to the R range. Then the warning message will be

6-20

Black plate (407,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

displayed.

! Difference between screen image and actual road

The distance markers show the distance for a level road when the vehicle is not loaded. It may be different from the actual distance depending on the loading condi- tions or road conditions.

! When there is an upward slope at the back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance.

! When there is a downward slope at the back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer than the actual distance.

NOTE When cargo is loaded, the rear view distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance as in an upward slope.

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

CONTINUED

6-21

6

Black plate (408,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

! Feature of distance marker

1) 3 feet (1 m) line 2) 10 feet (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance on the road. If there is a car or other object close behind, distance cannot be correctly displayed.

6-22

Black plate (15,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3 Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3 Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-5

State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7 Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8 Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system).................. 7-9 Starting engine.................................................... 7-9 Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-11

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) .............................. 7-12 Safety precautions ............................................. 7-12 Operating range for push-button start system............................................................. 7-12

Starting engine................................................... 7-12 Stopping engine................................................. 7-13 When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-14

Remote engine start system (dealer option).............................................................. 7-14 Models with keyless access with push-button start system ................................................... 7-14

Models without keyless access with push-button start system ................................................... 7-15

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote start................................................................. 7-19

Entering the vehicle following remote engine start shutdown......................................................... 7-19

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the vehicle ............................................................. 7-19

Service mode (models without keyless access with push-button start system)........................ 7-19

Remote transmitter program (models without keyless access with push-button start system).......................................................... 7-20

System maintenance.......................................... 7-20 Manual transmission ......................................... 7-22

Shifting speeds.................................................. 7-23 Driving tips........................................................ 7-24

Continuously variable transmission................. 7-24 Select lever ....................................................... 7-25 Selection of manual mode (if equipped).............. 7-27 Selection of L (if equipped) ............................. 7-29 Shift lock function ............................................. 7-30 Driving tips........................................................ 7-31

SI-DRIVE (if equipped)....................................... 7-32 Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 7-32 Sport (S) mode .................................................. 7-32 Sport Sharp (S#) mode....................................... 7-33 SI-DRIVE switches ............................................. 7-34

Power steering................................................... 7-34 Braking ............................................................... 7-35

Braking tips....................................................... 7-35 Brake system .................................................... 7-36 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-36

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-37 ABS self-check .................................................. 7-37 ABS warning light.............................................. 7-37

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system............................................................. 7-38 Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-38

Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-39 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-41

Starting and operating

7

Black plate (16,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................. 7-41 X-mode (if equipped).......................................... 7-42

To activate/deactivate the X-mode....................... 7-43 Hill descent control function............................... 7-44

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) ......................................... 7-46

Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-47 Parking brake..................................................... 7-47 Parking tips ....................................................... 7-48

Hill start assist system ...................................... 7-49 To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist system............................................................. 7-50

Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light................................................... 7-52

Cruise control (if equipped)............................... 7-53 To set cruise control .......................................... 7-53 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-55 To turn off the cruise control .............................. 7-55 To change the cruising speed............................. 7-55 Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-57 Cruise control set indicator light......................... 7-57

BSD/RCTA (if equipped) .................................... 7-58 System features................................................. 7-58 System operation............................................... 7-60 BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer ............................................................. 7-61

BSD/RCTA warning indicator.............................. 7-63 BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... 7-64 Certification for the BSD/RCTA........................... 7-65 Handling of radar sensors.................................. 7-65

Reverse Automatic Braking System (if equipped) ........................................................ 7-66 Reverse Automatic Braking System overview ..... 7-67 Operating conditions ......................................... 7-67 Reverse Automatic Braking System operation......................................................... 7-69

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking system operation......................................................... 7-72

Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF setting............................................................. 7-73

RAB warning indicator ....................................... 7-73 Handling of the sonar sensors ........................... 7-73

Black plate (413,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel additive may cause damage to the engine and/or fuel system.

& Fuel requirements

! Non-turbo models

The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

! Turbo models

The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) or higher. Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher may be used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease in maximum engine performance while using 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel.

Regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher may also be used. Using regular unleaded

gasoline will not be detrimental to engine durability, nor will it affect your warranty coverage. However, depending on your driving habits and conditions, you may notice a decrease in maximum engine performance, fuel economy or slight en- gine vibration or knocking. If you experi- ence any of these conditions while using a lower octane rated fuel, you may want to return to using 91 AKI (95 RON) octane rated fuel as soon as possible. Addition- ally, if your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently, or if you are driving with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer, the use of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher grade unleaded gasoline is required.

! Fuel octane rating

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

! RON

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

! AKI

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

! Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! Gasoline for California-certified LEV

If your vehicle was certified to Californias low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as indicated on the underhood tune-up label, it is designed to optimize engine and emission performance with gasoline that meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali- fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in any other state than California, your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out- side California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor- mance of your vehicles catalytic converter and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the

Starting and operating/Fuel

CONTINUED

7-3

7

Black plate (414,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Fuel

problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

! MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en- hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- function indicator light may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should contain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain deter- gents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following description. . Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual. . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- vents and corrosion inhibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions. . If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- line before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer. . Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

7-4

Black plate (415,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling

Only one person should be involved in refueling. Do not allow others to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress. Be sure to observe any other precautions that are posted at the service station.

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid release lever up. The lever is on the floor at the left of the drivers seat.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap, first touch the vehicle body or a metal portion of the fuel pump or similar object to discharge any static electricity that may be present on your body. If your body is carry- ing an electrostatic charge, there is a possibility that an electric spark could ignite the fuel, which could burn you. To avoid acquiring a new static electric charge, do not get back into the vehicle while refueling is in progress.

1) Open 2) Close

2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam- mable. Before refueling, always first stop the engine and close all vehicle doors and windows. Make sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adja- cent area. Only handle fuel out- doors. Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it firmly and turn it slowly to the

Starting and operating/Fuel

CONTINUED

7-5

7

Black plate (416,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Fuel

left. Do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pres- sure and spray out of the fuel filler neck, especially in hot weather. If you hear a hissing sound while you are removing the cap, wait for the sound to stop and then slowly open the cap to prevent fuel from spraying out and creating a fire hazard.

3. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel nozzle securely into the fuel filler pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func- tion, causing fuel to overflow the tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto- matic stop mechanism on the fuel nozzle activates. If you con- tinue to add fuel, temperature changes or other conditions may cause fuel to overflow from the tank and create a fire hazard.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump automatically stops. Do not add any more fuel. 5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain not to catch the tether under the cap while tightening. 6. Close the fuel filler lid completely. If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE . You will see the sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle. . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator light may illuminate. Refer to CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- dicator light F3-16.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause da- mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If the cap is not securely tightened, fuel may leak out while the vehicle is being driven or fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident, creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank and emission control system may be damaged. It could also

7-6

Black plate (417,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the en- gine. Continuing to operate your vehicle at an extremely low fuel level may result in a reduction of engine performance.

State emission testing (U.S. only)

WARNING

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. At- tempting to do so will result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem- ber to tell your inspection or service station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited War- ranty and is the responsibility of the state inspection program or its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs to inspect your vehicles emission control system. If your vehicle does not pass this test, some states may deny renewal of your vehicles registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the performance of the engines emission control system. Certi- fied emission inspectors will inspect the On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as part of the state emission inspection process. The OBDII system is designed to detect engine and transmission pro- blems that might cause the vehicle emis- sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of Colum- bia have implemented emission inspec- tion of the OBDII system. . The inspection of the OBDII system consists of a visual operational check of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal- function indicator light (MIL) and an examination of the OBDII system with an electronic scan tool. . A vehicle passes the OBDII system inspection if proper operation of the CHECK ENGINE warning light is ob- served, there are no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness monitors are all complete.

Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)

CONTINUED

7-7

7

Black plate (418,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Preparing to drive

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if the CHECK ENGINE warning light is not properly operating (light is illuminated or is not working due to a burned out bulb) or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in the vehicles computer. . A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBDII system readiness monitors NOT READY is greater than one. If the vehicles battery has been recently re- placed or disconnected, the OBDII system inspection may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for the emission test. Under this condition, the vehicle driver should be instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to reset the readiness monitors and return for an emission re-inspection. . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU Dealer for service.

Some states still use dynamometers in their emission inspection program. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your vehicles wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in one place. Prior to your vehicle being put on a dynamometer, tell your emission inspector not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emission testing program have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer. There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing program. When properly used, this equipment should not damage a SUBARU AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected for state emission testing.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving. 1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed. 2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for proper inflation. 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks and check that no small animal is under the vehicle. 4. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment. 5. Check that the hood and rear gate are fully closed. 6. Check the adjustment of the seat. 7. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors. 8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts. 9. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. 10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn- ing lights after starting the engine.

7-8

Black plate (419,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool- ing fan and belts of the engine may result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment and under the vehicle before starting the engine.

NOTE Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.

Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)

& Starting engine

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than 10 sec- onds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for 5 to 10 seconds, wait for 10 seconds or more before trying again.

NOTE It may be difficult to start the engine when the battery has been discon- nected and reconnected (for mainte- nance or other purposes). This diffi- culty is caused by the electronically controlled throttles self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine.

! General precautions when starting engine

WARNING

. Never start the engine from out- side the vehicle. It may result in an accident.

. Do not leave the engine running in locations with poor ventilation, such as a garage and indoors. The exhaust gas may enter the vehicle or indoors, and it may result in carbon monoxide poi- soning.

. Do not start the engine near dry foliage, paper, or other flam- mable substances. The exhaust pipe and exhaust emissions can create a fire hazard at high temperatures.

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped during driving, the catalyst may over- heat and burn.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without pushbutton start system)

CONTINUED

7-9

7

Black plate (420,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without pushbutton start system)

. When starting the engine, be sure to sit in the drivers seat (except when using the remote engine start system).

NOTE . Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel- eration immediately after the engine has started. . For a short time after the engine has started, the engine speed is kept high. When the warm-up is completed, the engine speed lowers automatically. . On rare occasions, it may be difficult to start the engine depending on the fuel and the usage condition (repeated driving of a distance in which the engine has not warmed up sufficiently). In such a case, it is recommended that you change to a different brand of fuel. . On rare occasions, transient knock- ing may be heard from the engine when the accelerator is operated rapidly such as a rapid start-up and a rapid acceleration. This is not a malfunction. . The engine starts more easily when the headlights, air conditioner and rear window defogger are turned off. . After the engine starts, the engine speed will be kept high until the engine has warmed up sufficiently.

! MT models

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- cessories. 3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. The starter motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the floor. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to Warning and indicator lights F3-13. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started. If the engine does not start, try the following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while depressing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts. (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accel- erator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal. (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the OFF position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal. (4) If the engine still does not start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have turned off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system auto- matically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.

! CVT models

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- cessories. 3. Shift the select lever to the P or N position (preferably the P position). The starter motor will only operate when the select lever is at the P or N position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

7-10

Black plate (421,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to Warning and indicator lights F3-13. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while depressing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts. (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accel- erator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal. (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the OFF position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have turned off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system auto- matically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure that the select lever is at the P or N position and that the parking brake is applied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the select lever into the N position. Do not attempt to place the select lever of a moving vehicle into the P posi- tion.

& Stopping the engine The ignition switch should be turned off only when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will cause loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer- ing and braking more difficult. It could also result in accidental acti- vation of the LOCK position on the ignition switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without pushbutton start system) 7-11

7

Black plate (422,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with pushbutton start system)

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

& Safety precautions Refer to Safety precautions F2-10.

& Operating range for push- button start system

Refer to Operating range for push-button start system F3-6.

& Starting engine

WARNING

. There are some general precau- tions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in Starting engine F7-9.

. If the indicator on the push- button ignition switch flashes in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering is still locked, and it may result in an accident.

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in orange, there may be a malfunction with the vehicle. Contact a SUBARU dealer imme- diately.

. If the indicator on the push- button ignition switch is flashing in green after the engine has started, it means that the steering is still locked. Depress the brake pedal while moving the steering wheel to the right and left, and press the push-button ignition switch.

. Do not continue pressing the push-button ignition switch for more than 10 seconds. Doing so could cause a malfunction. If the engine does not start, stop pressing the push-button ignition switch. Instead, press the push- button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power status to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, and then press the push-button igni- tion switch to start the engine.

NOTE . When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine starter operates for a maximum of 10 seconds and after starting the engine, the starter stops automatically. . When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine can be started regardless of the status of the push-button ignition switch. . If the security indicator light illumi- nates when you attempt to start the engine but the engine does not start, press the push-button ignition switch to switch the power to OFF and then try to start the engine again. . If the engine does not start, press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power to OFF. Then, while de- pressing the brake pedal more force- fully, press the push-button ignition switch. . The engine start procedures may not function depending on the radio wave conditions around the vehicle. In such a case, refer to Starting engine F9-18. . If the vehicle battery is discharged, the steering cannot be unlocked.

7-12

Black plate (423,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Charge the battery. . After the engine starts, the engine speed will be kept high until the engine has warmed up sufficiently.

1) Operation indicator 2) Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine will start. The starting proce- dure for the engine is as follows.

1. Carry the access key, and sit in the drivers seat. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Shift the select lever into the P position. The engine can also start when the select lever is in the N position, however, for safety reasons, start in the P position.

4. Depress the brake pedal until the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green. When starting with the select lever in the N position, the indicator does not turn green. 5. While depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE . While pressing the select lever but- ton in, the indicator on the push-button ignition switch will not turn green even when the select lever is in the P position. . In case the engine does not start by the normal engine start procedure, move the select lever to the P posi- tion, and switch the power to ACC. Depress the brake pedal, and press the push-button ignition switch for at least 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only use this engine start procedure in case of emergency. . When the engine is not started, the brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a case, depress the brake pedal more forcefully than usual. Check that the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green, and press the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

& Stopping engine 1. Stop the vehicle completely. 2. Move the select lever to the P position. 3. Press the push-button ignition switch. The engine will stop, and the power will be switched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push-button ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition switch is operated as follows, the engine will stop.

The switch is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer.

The switch is pressed briefly 3 times or more in succession.

When the engine stops, the brake booster will not function. A great- er foot pressure will be required on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will not operate either. A greater force will be required to steer, and it may result in an accident.

. If the engine stops during driving, do not operate the push-button ignition switch or open any of the

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with pushbutton start system)

CONTINUED

7-13

7

Black plate (424,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

doors until the vehicle is stopped in a safe location. It is dangerous because the steering lock may be activated. Stop the vehicle in a safe location, and contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

. Do not stop the engine while the select lever is in a position other than the P position.

. If the engine is stopped while the select lever is in a position other than the P position, the power will be in ACC. If the vehicle is left in this condition, the battery may be discharged.

NOTE Although you can stop the engine by operating the push-button ignition switch, do not stop the engine during driving except in an emergency.

& When access key does not operate properly

Refer to Access key if access key does not operate properly F9-17.

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

WARNING

. There are some general precau- tions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in General precau- tions when starting engine F7- 9.

. Do not remote start a vehicle in an enclosed environment (e.g. closed garage). Prolonged opera- tion of a motor vehicle in an enclosed environment can cause a harmful build-up of Carbon Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is harmful to your health. Exposure to high levels of Carbon Monox- ide can cause headaches, dizzi- ness or in extreme cases uncon- sciousness and/or death.

. Before performing any servicing of the vehicle, temporarily place the remote engine start system in service mode to prevent the system from unexpectedly start- ing the engine.

The remote engine start system allows

you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. In addition, the remote engine start system can activate the heater or air conditioner, providing you with a comfor- table cabin upon entry.

& Models with keyless access with push-button start sys- tem

NOTE For more details, refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the remote engine start system.

Access key 1) Lock button

An access key can be used as the remote engine start transmitter. Operate the lock button to start or stop the engine as

7-14

Black plate (425,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

follows.

! Before starting the engine

Before using the remote engine start system to start the engine, confirm the following conditions. . The select lever is in the P position. . All doors including the rear gate are closed. . The engine hood is closed. . The push-button ignition switch is in the OFF position.

! Starting the engine

To start the engine with remote engine start system, briefly press the lock button twice within 2 seconds, then press and hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The hazard warning flashers then flash once. 2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button briefly again. The hazard warning flashers then flash once again. 3. After step 2, immediately press and hold the lock button. The hazard warning flashers then flash once. 4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3, release the lock button. The engine will then start successfully.

! Stopping the engine

Press and hold the lock button to stop the engine with remote engine start system.

! Automatic engine shutdown

The remote engine start system will automatically shut down or will not start the engine under the following conditions. . The total run-time has exceeded 20 minutes. . Any door or the rear gate is opened. . The select lever is moved to any position other than P. . The engine hood is opened. . The push-button ignition switch is pressed. . The brake pedal is depressed. . The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or more.

The time setting until the engine auto- matically stops can be changed. To change it, please contact your SUBARU dealer. Note that some settings may violate state, provincial, or local laws and regulations. Check the laws in your area to determine which setting is permitted.

& Models without keyless ac- cess with push-button start system

Remote engine starter transceiver (fob) 1) Fob button

! Starting the engine

NOTE All vehicle doors (including rear gate) and the engine hood must be closed prior to activating the remote engine start system. Any open entry point will prevent starting or cause the engine to stop.

The remote engine start system is acti- vated by pressing the fob button on your remote engine starter transceiver (fob) twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

CONTINUED

7-15

7

Black plate (426,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

operating range of the system and the start request is received, the following phenomena will occur. . The fob flashes and beeps once. . The horn sounds once. . The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.

If the fob is not within range (the user is too far away from the vehicle), the fob will indicate two long flashes without beeping.

The system will check certain safety preconditions before starting, and if all conditions are met, the engine will start within 5 seconds. After the engine starts, the following phenomena will occur. . The fob flashes and beeps twice. . The horn sounds once. . The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote engine start system, the following phe- nomena will occur. . The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights remain illuminated. . The fob button flashes once every 3 seconds. . The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start (or starts and stalls) the remote engine

start system will power off and then attempt to start the engine 3 additional times. The system will not attempt to restart the engine if it determines a vehicle malfunction is preventing starting. If the engine does not start after 3 additional attempts, the remote engine start request will be aborted.

! Stopping the engine

Press and hold the fob button for at least 2 seconds to stop the engine. The fob will flash and beep three times, indicating the engine has stopped. If the stop request is not received (for example, if the user is too far away from the vehicle), the fob will continue to flash once every 3 seconds. The system will automatically stop the engine after 15 minutes.

! Remote start safety features

For safety and security reasons, the remote engine start system will prevent starting (or stop the engine if running) and sound the horn twice if any of the following conditions is detected. In addition, the fob will flash and beep 3 times. . The brake pedal is depressed . A key is in the ignition switch . The engine hood is open . The remote start system Service mode is engaged . The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500

RPM . The security alarm is triggered . The select lever is not in the P position

If the system detects any door (including the rear gate) open during operation, it will prevent starting or stop the engine, and sound the horn and flash side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.

In addition to the items above, if the vehicles engine management system determines there is a safety risk due to a vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will power down and the horn will sound 3 times.

NOTE . If the alarm system is armed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is flashing), the alarm system will remain armed throughout the remote start run cycle. . If the alarm system is disarmed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is not flash- ing), the alarm system will remain disarmed throughout the remote start run cycle.

7-16

Black plate (427,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Remote start operation - fob con- firmation

Your remote engine starter fob is a bidirectional transceiver that can confirm system operation with several different visual and audible indications. The fobs LED-backlit button and internal piezo buzzer will indicate status of the system using the following flash and beep se- quences, provided the fob is within opera- tional range of the system.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

CONTINUED

7-17

7

Black plate (428,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

Precondition Fob Indication

Meaning Flash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button is held down The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by pressing fob button twice within 3 sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully

1 flash every 3 sec Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started

2 long flashes Vehicle not in range (engine not started)

Engine idling by remote engine start operation 1 flash every 3 sec Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety reasons (see sections above)

User attempts to stop engine by pressing and holding fob button for at least 2 sec.

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request

1 flash every 3 sec Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

7-18

Black plate (429,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the keyless access function (if equipped) or remote keyless entry system. If the vehi- cles doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicles alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either of the following procedures to disarm the alarm system. Refer to Alarm system F2-25.

. Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON position (models without keyless access with push- button start system) . Turn the push-button ignition switch to the ACC or ON position (models with keyless access with push-button start system) . Press any button on the access key/ remote keyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle. 3. The engine will shut down when any door or rear gate is opened. 4. For models without keyless access with push-button start system, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn to the START position to restart the engine. For models with keyless access with push-

button start system, press the push- button ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal to restart the engine.

& Entering the vehicle follow- ing remote engine start shut- down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is opened by the remote keyless entry transmitter within a few seconds immedi- ately following remote engine start shut- down.

& Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the vehicle

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- perature controls to the desired setting and operation. After the system starts the engine, the heater or air conditioning will activate and heat or cool the interior to your setting.

& Service mode (models with- out keyless access with push-button start system)

In service mode, the remote engine start function is temporarily disabled to prevent the system from unexpectedly starting the engine while being serviced.

To engage or disengage service mode: 1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle doors and the rear gate. 2. Verify that the select lever is in the P position (CVT models) 3. Depress and hold the brake pedal 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 5. Press and release the remote engine start transmitter button three times. The system will honk the vehicles horn each time the button is pressed. 6. The system will pause for 1 second then honk the vehicles horn three times to indicate that the service mode has been engaged or honk one time to indicate that the service mode has been disengaged.

NOTE When taking your vehicle in for service, it is recommended that you inform the service personnel that your vehicle is equipped with a remote engine start system.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

CONTINUED

7-19

7

Black plate (430,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

& Remote transmitter program (models without keyless ac- cess with push-button start system)

New transmitters can be programmed to the remote engine start system in the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, damaged or additional transmitters are desired (the system will accept up to eight transmitters). New remote engine start transmitters can be programmed accord- ing to the following procedure.

1. Open the drivers door (the drivers door must remain opened throughout the entire process). 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON then LOCK, back to ON then LOCK, back to ON then LOCK, then back to ON again and leave the ignition ON through- out the programming process. 4. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn three times, indicating that the system has entered the transmitter learn mode. 5. Press and release the button on the transmitter that you want to program. 6. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn one time, indicating that the system has learned the transmitter. Upon successful programming, the remote start confirmation transmitter button will flash one time. 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional transmitters (the system will accept up to eight transmitters). 8. The system will exit the transmitter learn mode if the key is turned to the LOCK position, the door is closed or after 2 minutes.

& System maintenance NOTE For models without keyless access with push-button start system: In the event that the vehicles battery is replaced, discharged or disconnected, it will be necessary to start the vehicle a minimum of one time using the key prior to activating the remote engine start system. This is required to allow the vehicle electronic systems to re- synchronize.

! Changing the battery

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the re- mote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to touch the battery and any re- moved parts; children could swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion if an incorrect replacement battery is used. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of bat- tery.

. Batteries should not be exposed to excessive heat such as sun- shine, fire or the like.

For models with keyless access with push-button start system: Perform the procedure described in Re- placing battery of access key F11-45.

7-20

Black plate (431,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

For models without keyless access with push-button start system: The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR- 2032) supplied in your remote engine start transmitter should last approximately one year, depending on usage. When the battery begins to weaken, you will notice a decrease in range (distance from the vehicle that your remote control operates). Follow the instructions below to change the remote engine start transmitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo- cated on the back side of the transmitter.

2. Carefully pry the remote engine start transmitter halves apart using a small flat- head screwdriver.

3. Remove the circuit board from the bottom half of the case and remove the battery and replace with a new one. Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the old battery before removing it to ensure that the new battery is inserted properly (battery + should be pointed away from the transmitter circuit board on the bat- tery). 4. Carefully snap the case halves back together, reinstall the phillips screw and test the remote engine start system.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

CONTINUED

7-21

7

Black plate (432,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

NOTE . This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equip- ment and void warranty. . To comply with the FCC RF expo- sure compliance requirements, no change to the antenna or the device is permitted. Any change to the antenna or the device could result in the device exceeding the RF exposure require- ments and void users authority to operate the device.

Manual transmission

This manual transmission is a completely synchromesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-re- verse-speed transmission. The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob.

1) Slider

You must raise the slider and hold it in that position before you can move the shift lever to the R position.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.

7-22

Black plate (433,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

WARNING

. Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disengaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed) or with the shift lever in the neutral position. Engine braking has no effect in either of these condi- tions and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.

. Do not engage the clutch (i.e., release the clutch pedal) sud- denly when starting the vehicle. By doing so the vehicle might unexpectedly accelerate or the transmission could malfunction.

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely stopped. It may cause damage to the transmis- sion to try shifting into reverse when the vehicle is moving.

& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ- omy and vehicle performance during normal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

! Maximum allowable speeds

The following table shows the maximum speeds that are possible with each differ- ent gear. The tachometers needle will enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded. With the exception of cases where sudden acceleration is required, the vehicle should not be driven with the tachometers needle inside the red area. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy.

Gear mph (km/h)

1st 29 (48)

2nd 54 (88)

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Al- lowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a conse- quence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident increased.

NOTE Never exceed the posted speed limit.

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

CONTINUED

7-23

7

Black plate (434,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

& Driving tips

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an upgrade. Either of those actions may cause clutch damage. Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause wear on the transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life. In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Remember, if you ride (over use) the brakes while descending a hill, they may overheat and not work properly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon is not an indication of a problem in your vehicle.

Continuously variable trans- mission

The continuously variable transmission is electronically controlled and provides an infinite number of forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. For some models, it also has a manual mode or an L position.

WARNING

Do not shift from the P or N position into the D or R position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the P or R position only after the vehicle is comple- tely stopped. Shifting while the vehicle is moving may cause damage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the N or P position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

7-24

Black plate (435,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

. Never move the vehicle rearward by inertia with the select lever set in a forward driving position or move the vehicle forward by inertia with the select lever set in the R position. Doing so may result in an unexpected accident or malfunction.

. Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving positions into the R position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmis- sion.

. When parking the vehicle, first securely apply the parking brake and then place the select lever in the P position. Avoid parking for a long time with the select lever in any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery.

NOTE . When the engine coolant tempera- ture is still low, the transmission will upshift or downshift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant tempera- ture is sufficiently high in order to shorten the warm-up time and improve

driveability. The gearshift timing will automatically shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed up. . Immediately after transmission fluid is replaced, you may feel that the transmission operation is somewhat unusual. This results from invalidation of data which the on-board computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while. . When driving a CVT model under continuous heavy load conditions such as when towing a camper or climbing a long, steep hill, the engine speed or the vehicle speed may automatically be reduced. This is not a malfunction. This phenomenon results from the engine control function maintaining the cool- ing performance of the vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed will return to a normal speed when the engine is able to maintain the optimum cooling per- formance after the heavy load de- creases. Driving under a heavy load must be performed with extreme care. Do not try to pass a vehicle in front when driving on an uphill slope while towing.

. The continuously variable transmis- sion is a chain type system that provides superior transmission effi- ciency for maximum fuel economy. At times, depending on varying driving conditions, a chain operating noise may be heard that is characteristic of this type of system.

& Select lever

Type A 1) Select lever button

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

CONTINUED

7-25

7

Black plate (436,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

Type B 1) Select lever button

1) Models with L position 2) Models with manual mode

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift while pressing the select lever button in.

: Shift while pressing the select lever button in. : Shift without pressing the select lever button.

The select lever has four positions, P, R, N, D and it also has an L or M gate.

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine. In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the parking brake firmly, then shift into the P position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the mechanical friction of the transmis- sion.

To shift the select lever from the P position to any other position, you should depress the brake pedal fully then move the select lever. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle. To shift from the N to R position, stop the vehicle completely then move the lever to the R position while pressing the select lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned to the LOCK/OFF position, movement of the select lever from the N to R position is possible for a limited time period by depressing the brake pedal, and then it becomes impossible. For details, refer to Shift lock functionF7-30.

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled engine. In this position, the transmission is neutral, meaning that the wheels and transmission are not locked. Therefore, the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake

7-26

Black plate (437,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in neutral. Engine braking has no effect in this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the select lever in the N (neutral) position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an accident is consequently in- creased.

NOTE If the select lever is in the N position when you stop the engine for parking, you may not subsequently be able to move it to the R and P positions. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. You will then be able to move the select lever to the P position.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving. The transmission shifts automatically and con- tinuously into a suitable gear according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require. Also, while driving up and down a hill, the transmission assists and

controls the driving performance and engine braking while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in the D position, depress the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automati- cally downshift. In this case, the transmis- sion will operate like a conventional automatic transmission. When you re- lease the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.

For models with manual mode, if one of the shift paddles behind the steering wheel is operated while driving in the D position, the transmission will temporarily switch to the manual mode. In this mode, you can shift into any gear position using the shift paddles. For details about the manual mode, refer to Selection of manual mode F7-27. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission will switch from the manual mode back to the D position for normal driving.

& Selection of manual mode (if equipped)

Type A

Type B

With the vehicle either moving or station- ary, move the select lever from the D

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

CONTINUED

7-27

7

Black plate (438,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

position to the M position to select the manual mode.

Select lever/gear position indicator (type A) 1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Gear position indicator

Select lever/gear position indicator (type B) 1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator and upshift indica- tor and/or downshift indicator on the combination meter illuminate.

The gear position indicator shows the currently selected gear in the following range. . 1st-to-8th-gear range (when the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected (if equipped)) . 1st-to-6th-gear range (in other situa- tions)

The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gear shift is possible. When the

upshift indicator illuminates, upshift- ing is possible. When the downshift indicator illuminates, downshifting is possible. When both indicators illuminate, upshifting and downshifting are both pos- sible. When the vehicle stops (for exam- ple, at traffic signals), the downshift indicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position, pull the shift paddle that has + indicated on it. To downshift to the next lower gear position, pull the shift paddle that has indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the select lever to the D position from the M position.

7-28

Black plate (439,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on the shift paddles. Doing so may result in accidental gear shifting.

NOTE Please read the following points care- fully and bear them in mind when using the manual mode. . If you attempt to shift down when the engine speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone, beeps will be emitted to warn you that the down- shift is not possible. . If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- sion will not respond. . You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating the shift paddle twice in rapid succes- sion. . The transmission automatically se- lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving. . If the temperature of the transmis- sion fluid becomes too high, the AT OIL TEMP warning light on the combi- nation meter will illuminate. Immedi- ately stop the vehicle in a safe location

and let the engine idle until the warning light turns off. . For models with SI-DRIVE, by select- ing Sport Sharp (S#) mode, upshifting will not occur automatically. According to the road conditions, shift change manually so that the tachometer needle does not enter the red zone. Also, if the engine revolutions reach the specified number, the fuel supply will be cut. In this case, perform shift up operation.

& Selection of L (if equipped)

Type A

Type B

L is for using engine braking when going down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move the select lever from the D position to the L position.

Type A combination meter

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

CONTINUED

7-29

7

Black plate (440,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

Type B combination meter

When selected, the indicator L will illuminate on the combination meter.

To deselect L, move the select lever to the D position.

& Shift lock function The shift lock function helps prevent the improper operation of the select lever. . The select lever cannot be operated unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed. . The select lever cannot be moved from the P position to any other position before the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the brake pedal first, and then operate the select lever.

. Only the P position allows you to turn the ignition switch from the ACC position to the LOCK/OFF position and remove the key from the ignition switch. . If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position while the select lever is in the N position, the select lever may not be moved to the P position after a period of time. Therefore, move the select lever to the P position with the brake pedal depressed soon after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/ OFF position.

! Shift lock release

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn the ignition switch back to the ON position then move the select lever to the P position with the select lever button pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, perform the following steps. . When the select lever cannot be shifted from P to N: Refer to Shift lock release using the shift lock release button F7-30. . When the select lever cannot be shifted from N to R, P: Within 60 seconds after placing the igni- tion switch in the ACC position, move the

select lever to the P position with the select lever button pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If you must perform the above procedure, the shift lock system (or the vehicle control system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, refer to Shift lock release using the shift lock release button F7-30.

! Shift lock release using the shift lock release button

Perform the following procedure to release the shift lock. 1. Apply the parking brake and stop the engine.

7-30

Black plate (441,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock release button is located under the shift lock cover.

3. While depressing the brake pedal,

insert a screwdriver into the hole, press the shift lock release button using a screwdriver, and then move the select lever.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, the shift lock system may be malfunctioning. Con- tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

& Driving tips

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the D or R position. . Make sure to apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the mechanical friction of the transmission. . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the D position. Use the brake instead. . The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a malfunction.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission 7-31

7

Black plate (442,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/SIDRIVE

SI-DRIVE (if equipped)

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive) works to maximize engine performance, control and efficiency. This system consists of three modes: Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp (S#). By operating the SI-DRIVE switches, the character of the power unit changes.

& Intelligent (I) mode

! For smooth, efficient performance driving

Type A combination meter

Type B combination meter

The linear acceleration characteristic of the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal driving usage. The Intelligent (I) mode provides well- balanced performance with greater fuel efficiency and smooth driveability without stress. Power delivery is moderate during acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency. This is ideal for around-town driving and situations that do not require full power output. It provides better control in difficult driving conditions, such as slippery roads or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle response.

& Sport (S) mode

! For all-around performance driving

Type A combination meter

Type B combination meter

The Sport (S) mode provides the engine

7-32

Black plate (443,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

power desired by those who want to make the driving experience their own personal adventure.

& Sport Sharp (S#) mode

! For maximum performance driving

Type A combination meter

Type B combination meter

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating level of engine performance and control. The throttle becomes more responsive regardless of the engine speed. Delivering maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is ideal for tackling twisting roads and for merging or overtaking other vehicles on the freeway with confidence.

When you select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode while the select lever is in the D position, the transmission gear ratio will shift from variable speed to eight-speed. The select lever/gear position indicator display will change from D to the gear position.

When selecting Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

the following controls will be applied.

Uphill control: Prevents unnecessary shift-up/shift-down during ascent.

Cornering control: While turning, if there is a large centrifugal force, shift-up will not occur: during re-acceleration.

Braking control: At the beginning of corners etc., heavy application of the brake pedal will cause automatic down- shift and gently re-accelerate.

Sudden acceleration return control: During acceleration, if acceleration pedal is returned suddenly (for example, at corners etc.), shift-up will not be applied.

Starting and operating/SIDRIVE

CONTINUED

7-33

7

Black plate (444,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Power steering

& SI-DRIVE switches

SI-DRIVE switches

To select the Intelligent (I) mode, perform either of the following procedures. . Press the S/I switch when the Sport (S) mode is selected . Press the S#/I switch when the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected

To select the Sport (S) mode, press the S/ I switch when any mode other than Sport (S) mode is selected.

To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, press the S#/I switch when any mode other than Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected.

NOTE . While the engine is cool, you cannot change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode. . The next time you turn on the engine, after you turned off the engine in the Sport (S) mode or Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-DRIVE mode changes to the Intelligent (I) mode. . While the engine is running, if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc- tion indicator light illuminates, the SI- DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S) mode. In this case, it is not possible to change to another mode. . If there is a possibility that the engine could overheat because of a temperature increase of the engine coolant, it is not possible to change to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, it changes to the Sport (S) mode when the engine coolant temperature in- creases. . If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer.

Power steering

Power steering warning light (type A)

Power steering warning light (type B)

The vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering system. When the ignition

7-34

Black plate (445,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

switch is turned to the ON position, the power steering warning light on the combination meter illuminates to inform the driver that the warning system is functioning properly. Then, if the engine started, the warning light turns off to inform the driver that the steering power assist is operational.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immedi- ately.

NOTE If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the con- trol computer and drive motor, from overheating. . The steering wheel is operated fre- quently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turn- ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking. . The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time.

At this time, there will be more resis- tance when steering. However this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering wheel is not operated for a while and the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power steering is operated in a non-standard way which causes power assist limitation to occur too fre- quently, this may result in a malfunc- tion of the power steering control system.

Braking

& Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descend- ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured. This could cause

Starting and operating/Braking

CONTINUED

7-35

7

Black plate (446,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Braking

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe location.

& Brake system

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems. Each circuit works diag- onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.

! Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, result- ing in poor braking power. The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you will have to depress the pedal much harder than normal and the braking dis- tance will increase.

! Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the brake assist. It is not a system that brings more braking ability to the vehicle beyond its braking capabil- ity. Always use the utmost care when driving regarding vehicle speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly, continue depressing the brake pedal strongly to bring the effect of the brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system. It assists the brake power when the driver cannot depress the brake pedal strongly and the brake power is insufficient. Brake assist generates the brake power according to the speed at which the driver depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE When you depress the brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the following phenomena occur. However, even though these occur, they do not indi-

cate any malfunctions, and the brake assist system is operating properly. . You might feel that the brake pedal is applied by lighter force and gener- ates a greater braking force. . You might hear an ABS operating noise from the engine compartment.

& Disc brake pad wear warning indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica- tors on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while braking, im- mediately have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer.

7-36

Black plate (447,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- tem)

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the ABS could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de- crease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe

following distance from other vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be long- er for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. When driving under these conditions, therefore, re- duce your speed and leave ample distance from other vehicles.

. When tire chains are installed, stopping distances may be long- er for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. Be sure to reduce your speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.

. When you feel the ABS operating, you should maintain constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the opera- tion of the ABS.

& ABS self-check Just after the vehicle is started, you may feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar to when the ABS operates, and you may also hear the sound of the ABS working from the engine compartment. This is

caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS being carried out and does not indicate a malfunction.

& ABS warning light Refer to ABS warning light F3-21.

Starting and operating/ABS (Antilock Brake System) 7-37

7

Black plate (448,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

Electronic Brake Force Dis- tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective- ness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicles loading condition and speed. The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS and uses some of the ABS compo- nents to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD system malfunction, the EBD system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

& Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions

Brake and ABS warning light (type A)

Brake and ABS warning light (type B)

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driving. Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the conventional braking system will still func- tion. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control. If the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously, take the following steps. 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat location. 2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the engine. 3. Restart the engine. 4. Release the parking brake.

Even if both warning lights turn off: The EBD system may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

If both warning lights illuminate again and remain illuminated after restarting the engine: 1. Turn off the engine again.

7-38

Black plate (449,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Check the brake fluid level. For details about checking the brake fluid level, refer to Checking the fluid level F11-18.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark, the EBD system may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected. . If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dan- gerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains illuminated, have the brakes in- spected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating prop- erly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for re- pair.

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system could easily lead to a serious acci- dent.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control system, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-cov- ered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system is an indication that the road being travelled on has a slippery sur- face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions, its activation should be seen as a sign that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo- nents, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have an inspection of that system performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system is operating properly:

All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Further- more, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires.

Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side door pillar.

Use only the specified tem- porary spare tire to replace a flat tire. With a temporary spare tire, the effectiveness

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

CONTINUED

7-39

7

Black plate (450,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system is reduced and this should be taken into ac- count when driving the vehi- cle in such a condition.

. If non-matching tires are used, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may not operate cor- rectly.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system helps prevent unstable vehicle motion such as skidding using control of the brakes and engine power. Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem unless it is absolutely ne- cessary. If you must turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem, drive very carefully accord- ing to the road surface condition.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface and/or during cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system adjusts the engines output and the wheels respective braking forces to help maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function The traction control function is designed to prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control. Activation of this function is shown by flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels tendency to slide sideways during steering operations. Acti- vation of this function is shown by flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

NOTE . The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.

Slight twitching of the brake pedal is felt. The vehicle or steering wheel shakes to a small degree. An operating sound from the engine compartment is heard briefly when starting the engine and when driving off after starting the engine. The brake pedal seems to jolt when driving off after starting the engine.

. In the circumstances shown in the following list, the vehicle may be less stable than it feels to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics Control System may therefore operate. Such operation does not indicate a system malfunction.

on gravel-covered or rutted roads on unfinished roads when the vehicle is towing a trailer when the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will cause operation of the steering wheel to feel slightly different compared to that for normal conditions. . It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner, even if your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. . Always turn off the engine before replacing a tire. Failure to do so may render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unable to operate correctly.

7-40

Black plate (451,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor

Refer to Vehicle Dynamics Control warn- ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- tion indicator light F3-24 and Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator lightF3- 25.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch (models with power rear gate)

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch (models without power rear gate)

Use this switch in the following special situations. Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may help to recover from the loss of traction. Use the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as necessary. . a standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy or gravel-covered surface . extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light (type A)

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light (type B)

When the switch is pressed during engine operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

CONTINUED

7-41

7

Black plate (452,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Xmode

OFF indicator light on the combination meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated and the vehicle will behave like a model not equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system. When the switch is pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system deactivated, traction and stability en- hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics Control system is unavailable. Therefore you should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under above-mentioned situations.

NOTE . When the switch has been pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reacti- vates itself the next time the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position and the engine is restarted. . If the switch is held down for 30 seconds or longer, the indicator light turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is activated, and the system ignores any further pressing of the switch. To make the switch usable again, turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position and restart the engine. . When the switch is pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system, the vehicles running per- formance is comparable with that of a vehicle that does not have a Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do not de- activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except when absolutely neces- sary. . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated, compo- nents of the brake control system may still activate. When the brake control system is activated, the Vehicle Dy- namics Control operation indicator light flashes.

X-mode (if equipped)

WARNING

. Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence be- cause you are driving a vehicle with X-mode could easily lead to a serious accident.

. Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence be- cause you are driving a vehicle with hill descent control function could easily lead to a serious accident. Be especially careful, and depress the brake pedal if necessary when driving on ex- tremely steep downhill, frozen, muddy or sandy roads. Failure to control the vehicles speed may cause a loss of control and result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped with X-mode, winter tires or snow chains should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably.

7-42

Black plate (453,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Simply having X-mode does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.

. Activating the X-mode should be done when you encounter a very slippery surface at low speed. However, having X-mode is no guarantee that full vehicle con- trol will be maintained at all times and under all conditions. When activating X-mode, the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo- nents, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have the system in- spected by an author ized SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the X-mode is operating properly:

All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Further- more, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires.

Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the label attached to the vehicles door pillar.

Use only the special tempor- ary spare tire to replace a flat tire. With a normal temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the X-mode is reduced and this should be taken into ac- count when driving the vehi- cle in such a condition.

. If the hill descent control function has operated continuously for a long time, the temperature of the brake disc may increase and the hill descent control function may be temporarily disabled. In this case, the hill descent control indicator light will turn off. When the hill descent control indicator light turns off, the hill descent control function is disabled.

X-mode is the integrated control system of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics Control system, etc. for driving with bad road conditions. Using X-mode, you can drive more comfortably even in slippery road conditions including uphill and down- hill.

X-mode has the following functions.

. Hill descent control function: Using the hill descent control function, you can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is likely to increase, the brake control system will be activated to adjust the vehicle speed. . Driving ability control: This mode increases the hill-climbing ability and driving ability as well as enabling smooth application of torque for easier control of the steering wheel.

& To activate/deactivate the X-mode

X-mode switch

Starting and operating/Xmode

CONTINUED

7-43

7

Black plate (454,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Xmode

X-mode indicator light (type A)

X-mode indicator light (type B)

To activate: Press the X-mode switch. While the X- mode is activated, the X-mode indicator

light illuminates.

To deactivate: Press the X-mode switch again. The X- mode indicator light will turn off when the X-mode is deactivated.

NOTE . Even if you try to activate the X- mode by pressing the X-mode switch when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, the X-mode will not be activated. At this time, a buzzer will sound twice. . If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while the X-mode is activated, a buzzer will sound once and the X-mode will be deactivated.

NOTE For models with SI-DRIVE: . The SI-DRIVE mode will change to the Intelligent (I) mode when the X- mode is deactivated. . The SI-DRIVE mode cannot be chan- ged while the X-mode is activated. At this time, a buzzer will sound twice. . While the engine is running, if any of the following conditions is met, the X- mode will be deactivated. In this case, it is not possible to activate the X-mode. Also, for models with SI-DRIVE, the

mode will change to the Sport (S) mode and it will not be possible to change to the other modes.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illu- minates. The AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes. The ABS warning light illumi- nates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light illuminates.

. If there is a possibility that the engine could overheat because of a temperature increase of the engine coolant, it is not possible to change to the X-mode. While the vehicle is in the X-mode, it changes to the Sport (S) mode when the engine coolant tem- perature increases. . It is not possible to activate the X- mode when the engine is not running, because the hill descent control func- tion is not activated.

& Hill descent control function The hill descent control function will be in standby mode when the X-mode is acti- vated and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). The function will operate when the vehicle

7-44

Black plate (455,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less than approximately 10%. The function will turn off when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is depressed.

NOTE . Even while the hill descent control function is operating, you can vary the vehicle speed by using the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. . During braking by the hill descent control function, the brake system warning light will illuminate. . The hill descent control function may also operate on a flat road. . The hill descent control function may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.

An operating sound is heard briefly from the engine compart- ment while the hill descent control function is operating. The sensation of depressing the brake pedal is different, (harder than usual etc.) when the brake pedal is depressed during hill des- cent control function operation.

! Hill descent control indicator light

Hill descent control indicator light (type A)

Hill descent control indicator light (type B)

This light illuminates while the hill descent control function is in the standby mode. It flashes while the function is operating. It

will turn off when the function is in the disabled mode. When this function is changed from operational to non-opera- tional, it will turn off when the vehicle speed reaches more than approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

Starting and operating/Xmode 7-45

7

Black plate (456,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.spec. models)

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

Low tire pressure warning light (type A)

Low tire pressure warning light (type B)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro- vides the driver with a warning message. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise, an accident involving serious vehicle damage and ser- ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe location.

(3)Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the door pillar on the drivers side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a very short distance, the tires get warm and their pressures in- crease accordingly. Be sure to let the tires cool thoroughly be- fore adjusting their pressures to the standard values shown on the tire placard. Refer to Tires and wheels F11-23. The tire pressure monitoring system does not function when the ve- hicle is stationary. After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the TPMS rechecking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have signifi- cant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/trans-

7-46

Black plate (457,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

mitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is un- able to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/ or system resetting.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the sys- tem inspected.

CAUTION

. Do not place metal film or any metal parts in the cargo area. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not func- tion properly.

. FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

. U.S.-spec. models FCC ID: CWTWD1U781

NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.

Parking your vehicle

& Parking brake To set the parking brake, depress the brake pedal firmly and hold it down until the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.

To release the parking brake, perform the following procedure. 1. Pull the lever up slightly. 2. Press the release button. 3. Lower the lever while keeping the button pressed.

When the parking brake is set while the engine is running, the parking brake warning light illuminates. After starting the vehicle, be sure that the warning light has turned off before the vehicle is driven. Refer to Brake system warning light F3-

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

CONTINUED

7-47

7

Black plate (458,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

21.

CAUTION

Never drive while the parking brake is set because this will cause un- necessary wear on the brake lin- ings. Before starting to drive, always make sure that the parking brake has been fully released.

& Parking tips When parking your vehicle, always per- form the following items. . Apply the parking brake firmly. . For MT models, put the shift lever in the 1 (1st) for upgrade or R (Reverse) for a downgrade. . For CVT models, put the select lever in the P (Park) position.

Never rely on the mechanical friction of the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent op- eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the tempera- ture in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people.

. Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come near hot engine or exhaust sys- tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occu- pants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) con- tained in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a front under- spoiler and rear underspoiler (both optional), pay attention to blocks

7-48

Black plate (459,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

and other obstructions on the ground when parking. The under- spoilers could be damaged by con- tact with them.

Hill start assist system

WARNING

. The Hill start assist system is a device only for helping the driver to START the vehicle on an uphill grade. To prevent accidents when the vehicle is parked on a slope, be sure to firmly set the parking brake. When setting the parking brake, make sure that the vehicle remains stationary when the clutch pedal (MT models) and brake pedal (both MT and CVT models) are released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position while the Hill start assist system is operating. The Hill start assist system will be deactivated and may lead to an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device to make the following vehicle operations easier. 1) Starting forward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT

models) B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)

In both these cases, the Hill start assist system operates under the following con-

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

CONTINUED

7-49

7

Black plate (460,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

ditions. . when the clutch pedal is depressed while the brake pedal is also depressed (MT models) . when the vehicle has stopped with the brake pedal depressed (CVT models)

Braking power is maintained temporarily (for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill start assist system after the brake pedal is released. The driver is therefore able to start the vehicle in the same way as on a level grade, just using the clutch pedal (MT models only) and accelerator pedal (all models).

If the braking power of the Hill start assist system is insufficient after the brake pedal is released, apply more braking power by depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill start assist system does not operate in the following cases.

. when starting backward facing uphill

. when starting forward facing downhill

. while the parking brake is applied

. while the ignition switch is in the ACC or LOCK/OFF position . while the Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF indicator light is illuminated

When using the Hill start assist system, a braking effect may be felt even after the brake pedal has been released. However, this braking effect should disappear once the clutch pedal is released.

CAUTION

The braking power of the Hill start assist system may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle begins to move forward after being reversed.

& To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist system

CAUTION

While the Hill start assist system is deactivated, when starting on an uphill grade, braking power is not maintained if the brake pedal is released. Start on an uphill grade by using the parking brake.

7-50

Black plate (461,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

You can activate/deactivate the Hill start assist system according to the following procedure.

NOTE If you make an error when performing any steps in the following procedure, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position once and then start over again.

! To deactivate

1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe location and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. 3. Restart the engine.

Type A combination meter

Type B combination meter

4. Confirm the following items. (1) The Brake system warning light illuminates. (2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light turns off. (3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. (4) The ABS warning light turns off.

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch (models with power rear gate)

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch (models without power rear gate)

5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch and hold it until the Vehicle

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

CONTINUED

7-51

7

Black plate (462,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illuminates for 30 seconds and then turns off. 6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch.

Hill start assist OFF indicator light (type A)

Hill start assist OFF indicator light (type B)

7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch, press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch once again. Then the Hill start assist OFF indicator light illuminates. 8. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. The hill start assist system has now been deactivated.

NOTE While the Hill start assist system is deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF indicator light illuminates continuously.

! To activate

When the procedure to deactivate the Hill start assist system is performed again, the system is activated. When the Hill start assist system is activated, the Hill start assist OFF indicator light turns off.

& Hill start assist warning light/ Hill start assist OFF indicator light

Refer to Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light F3-23.

7-52

Black plate (463,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Cruise control (if equipped)

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system: Refer to the Owners Manual supple- ment for the EyeSight system.

Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control under any of the following conditions. These may cause loss of vehicle control.

. driving up or down a steep grade

. driving on slippery or winding roads

. driving in heavy traffic

. towing a trailer

NOTE . On uphill and downhill slopes, de- pending on the degree of the slope and the load of the vehicle, there may be cases when a constant speed cannot be guaranteed. . If the cruise control indicator light does not illuminate even after pressing the cruise control main button, it is possible that there is a malfunction in the system. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. . Make sure the cruise control system is turned off when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unintentionally setting the cruise control.

& To set cruise control

Cruise control main button

1. Press the cruise control main button.

Cruise control indicator light (type A)

Starting and operating/Cruise control

CONTINUED

7-53

7

Black plate (464,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Cruise control

Cruise control indicator light (type B)

The cruise control indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate. 2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Press the RES/SET switch to the

SET side and release it. Then release the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control set indicator light (type A)

Cruise control set indicator light (type B)

At this time, the cruise control set indicator light is illuminated in the combination

meter. The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in- creased while driving with the cruise control activated. Simply depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- cle. When the accelerator pedal is re- leased, the vehicle will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.

NOTE For turbo models, when you set the desired speed while the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected, the select lever/ gear position indicator will change from the current gear position indica- tion to the D indication.

7-54

Black plate (465,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& To temporarily cancel the cruise control

The cruise control can be temporarily canceled in the following ways.

. Press the CANCEL button.

. Press the X-mode switch to activate the X-mode (models with X-mode). . Depress the brake pedal. . Depress the clutch pedal (MT models only).

WARNING

For CVT models, you can cancel the cruise control by shifting the select lever into the N position. However, do not shift the lever into the N position while driving except in case of emergency. If the select lever is

shifted into the N position, the engine brake will no longer work. This could result in an accident.

The cruise control set indicator light in the combination meter turns off when the cruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled and with vehi- cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more, press the RES/SET switch to the RES side to return to the original cruising speed automatically. The cruise control set indicator light in the combination meter will automatically illu- minate at this time.

& To turn off the cruise control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: . Press the cruise control main button again. . Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or LOCK/OFF position (but only when the vehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by the RES/ SET switch)

Press the RES/SET switch to the RES side and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the switch. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed.

Starting and operating/Cruise control

CONTINUED

7-55

7

Black plate (466,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Cruise control

U.S.-spec. models When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is small, the set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the RES/SET switch to the RES side quickly.

Except U.S.-spec. models When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is small, the set speed can be increased 1 km/h each time by pressing the RES/SET switch to the RES side quickly.

! To increase the speed (by accel- erator pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

2. Press the RES/SET switch to the SET side once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without depressing the accel- erator pedal.

NOTE . U.S.-spec. models If the difference between the actual vehicle speed when the switch is pressed and the speed last time you set is small, the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This

occurs because the cruise control system regards this operation as that intended to decrease the vehicle speed. . Except U.S. spec. models If the difference between the actual vehicle speed when the switch is pressed and the speed last time you set is small, the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 km/h. This occurs be- cause the cruise control system re- gards this operation as that intended to decrease the vehicle speed. . Turbo models If you depress the accelerator pedal while the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected, the select lever/gear position indicator may change from the D indication to the current gear position indication.

7-56

Black plate (467,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! To decrease the speed (by the RES/SET switch)

Press the RES/SET switch to the SET side and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the switch. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed.

U.S.-spec. models When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is small, the set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the RES/ SET switch to the SET side quickly.

Except U.S.-spec. models When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is small, the set speed can be lowered 1 km/h each

time by pressing the RES/SET switch to the SET side quickly.

NOTE If the RES/SET switch is repeatedly operated quickly to the SET side, the set vehicle speed displayed in the combination meter becomes the low speed setting. However, when the set vehicle speed is set to a speed much lower than the actual vehicle speed, the set speed may be reset to the actual vehicle speed.

! To decrease the speed (by brake pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the

desired speed, press the RES/SET switch to the SET side once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without de- pressing the accelerator pedal.

& Cruise control indicator light Refer to Cruise control indicator light F3-32.

& Cruise control set indicator light

Refer to Cruise control set indicator light F3-32.

Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-57

7

Black plate (468,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross Traffic Alert.

These functions enable the system to detect objects or vehicles to the rear, drawing attention to the driver when changing a lane or when driving in reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when changing lanes or reversing the vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the driver by monitoring the rear and side areas of the vehicle during a lane change or reversing. However, you cannot rely on this system alone in assuring the safety during a lane change or reversing. Over- confidence in this system could result in an accident and lead to serious injury or death. Since the system operation has various limita- tions, the flashing or illumination of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may be delayed or it may not operate at all even when a vehicle is present in a neighboring lane or approaching from either side.

The driver is responsible for paying attention to the rear and side areas of the vehicle.

& System features BSD/RCTA consists of the following func- tions. . To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind Spot Detection) . To detect a vehicle approaching from the right or left while reversing the vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the above functions.

NOTE The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been certified by the radio wave related laws of the U.S. When driving in other countries, certification of the country where the vehicle is driven must be obtained. For certification in the U.S., refer to Certification for the BSD/ RCTA F7-65.

! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles existing in the blind area. If the system detects a vehicle existing in the blind area, it warns the driver of dangers by illuminat- ing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s). If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the system warns the driver of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

7-58

Black plate (469,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes. If the system detects a vehicle approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver of dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s). If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the system warns the driver of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another vehicle approaching from either side when driving in reverse. This feature helps the driver check the rear and side areas of the vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach- ing from either side while moving back- ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the following way. . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes. . A warning buzzer sounds.

1) The detection range of the radar sensors A) Vehicle that may be detected

WARNING

In parking areas in which parking lots are located diagonally to driving lanes as indicated in the illustration above, the system may detect a vehicle (A) that is coming across the front of your vehicle in some cases. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle, because the detectability of RCTA is limited.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

CONTINUED

7-59

7

Black plate (470,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

1) The detection range of the radar sensors 2) The out of detection range of the radar

sensors B) Vehicle that may not be detected

WARNING

The approaching vehicle (B) may not be detected because the vehicle reversing is blocked by a parked vehicle. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle, because the detectability of RCTA is limited.

& System operation

! Operating conditions

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the following conditions are met. . The ignition switch is in the ON position. . The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off. . The vehicle is driven at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h) (except when reversing). . The shift lever/select lever is in the R position (RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the following situations. . The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on. . The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator remains off (except when rever- sing).

NOTE . In the following case, the BSD/RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will appear. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears, have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

When a malfunction occurs in the system, including the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

. In the following cases, the BSD/ RCTA will temporarily stop operating (or may stop operating) and the BSD/ RCTA warning indicator will appear.

When the radar sensor becomes significantly misaligned (If the or- ientation of the radar sensor is shifted for any reason, readjust- ment is required. Have the sensor adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.) When a large amount of snow or ice sticks to the rear bumper sur- face around the radar sensors When the vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road or in an envir- onment in which there are no objects around (such as in a desert) for a long time When the temperature around the radar sensors increased exces- sively due to long driving on uphill grades in summer, etc. When the temperature around the radar sensors becomes extre- mely low When the vehicle battery voltage lowers When the vehicle battery be- comes overvoltage

When the above conditions are cor- rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume

7-60

Black plate (471,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

operation and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA warning indicator has ap- peared for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . The detectability of the radar sen- sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de- tection may be impaired and the sys- temmay not operate properly under the following conditions.

When the rear bumper around the radar sensors is distorted When ice, snow or mud adheres to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors When stickers, etc. are affixed on the areas of the radar sensors on the rear bumper During adverse weather condi- tions such as rain, snow or fog When driving on wet roads such as snow-covered roads and through puddles

. The radar sensors may not detect or may have difficulty detecting the fol- lowing.

Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe- destrians, stationary objects on the road or road side, etc. Vehicles with body shapes that the radar may not reflect (vehicles

with a low body height such as sports cars or a trailer with no cargo) Vehicles that are not approach- ing your vehicle even though they are in the detection area (either on a neighboring lane to the rear or beside your vehicle when rever- sing) (The system determines the presence of approaching vehicles based on data detected by the radar sensors.) Vehicles traveling at significantly different speeds Vehicles driving in parallel at almost the same speed as your vehicle for a prolonged time Oncoming vehicles Vehicles in a lane beyond the neighboring lane Vehicles travelling at a signifi- cantly lower speed that you are trying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow lanes, the system may detect vehicles driving in a lane next to the neighbor- ing lane.

& BSD/RCTA approach indica- tor light/warning buzzer

While the BSD/RCTA is active, the follow- ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver. . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light (when there are vehicles in the neighboring lanes) . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle is approaching from the left or right side while reversing)

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

It is mounted in each side of the outside mirrors and will illuminate when a vehicle approaching from behind is detected. If an indicator light is illuminated and the turn

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

CONTINUED

7-61

7

Black plate (472,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

signal lever is operated toward the side in which this light turned on, the indicator light flashes to warn the driver of dangers. When reversing the vehicle, the indicator light flashes when the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light dimming function

When the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE . When affected by direct sunlight, you may have difficulty recognizing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light. . When affected by the headlight beams from the vehicles behind, you may have difficulty recognizing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light. . While the illumination brightness control dial is in the fully upward position, even if the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/ RCTA approach indicator light will not be reduced. For details about the illumination brightness control dial, refer to Illumination brightness con- trol F3-101.

! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz- zer (only when reversing)

A warning buzzer sounds along with flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in- dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume can be changed by operating the multi information display of the combination meter. For details, refer to BSD/RCTA F3-43.

! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer

. In the following cases, operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings.

When a vehicle moves to the neighboring lane from a lane next to the neighboring lane When driving on a steep incline or on repeated sharp uphill and downhill grades When going beyond a pass When both your vehicle and a vehicle driving on a neighboring lane are driving on the far side of each lane. When several narrowly-spaced ve- hicles are approaching in a row In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersection) When there is a difference in height between your lane and the neighbor- ing lane Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA OFF switch Immediately after the shift lever/ select lever is shifted to the R position When extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the trunk or cargo area

. During reversing, operation of the BSD/ RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings under the following conditions.

When backing out of an angled parking space When a large-sized vehicle is parked next to your vehicle (That vehicle prevents the propagation of radar waves.) When reversing on sloped roads When reversing at a high speed

7-62

Black plate (473,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may illuminate when driving close to solid objects on the road or road side (such as guardrails, tunnels and side- walls). . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash when turning at an inter- section in urban areas or a multilane intersection. . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash and the warning buzzer may sound if a building or a wall exists in the reversing direction. . In the following cases, the system may detect a vehicle driving two lanes away from your vehicle.

When you are driving on the near side of its lane from the corresponding vehicle

When the vehicle driving two lanes away is driving on the near side of its lane from your vehicle

& BSD/RCTA warning indicator

! System temporary stop indicator

System temporary stop indicator

This indicator appears when the system is used under the following conditions. . Extremely high or low temperatures . When abnormal voltage exists for the vehicle battery . When the radar sensor is significantly misaligned

Once the above conditions are corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will

disappear. If the indicator remains dis- played for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System temporary stop indicator due to reduced radar sensitivity

System temporary stop indicator due to reduced radar sensitivity

This indicator appears when the detect- ability of the radar sensors is reduced. Once the condition is corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear. If the indicator remains dis- played for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

CONTINUED

7-63

7

Black plate (474,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

! System malfunction indicator

System malfunction indicator (type A)

System malfunction indicator (type B) 1) At first, this message will appear 2) Then this message will appear

This indicator appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

& BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type A)

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type B)

If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on the multi information display of the combi- nation meter, and the BSD/RCTA is deactivated. Press the switch again to activate the BSD/RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indica- tor will disappear.

NOTE . In the following cases, the system may not operate properly due to blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/ RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the system.

When towing a trailer When a bicycle carrier or other item is fitted to the rear of the

7-64

Black plate (475,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

vehicle When using a chassis dynam- ometer or free roller device, etc. When running the engine and making the wheels rotate while lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position, the last known status of the system is maintained. For example, if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position with the BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA will remain deactivated the next time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. . If the vehicle battery is disconnected due to situations such as battery terminal or fuse replacement, after the battery is reconnected, the BSD/RCTA will be activated.

& Certification for the BSD/ RCTA

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: OAYSRR2A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard (s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lex- ploitation est autorise aux deux condi- tions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

& Handling of radar sensors

Radar sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear bumper.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

CONTINUED

7-65

7

Black plate (476,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

NOTE . To ensure correct operation of the BSD/RCTA, observe the following pre- cautions.

Always keep the bumper surface near the radar sensors clean. Do not affix any stickers or other items on the bumper surface near the radar sensors. Do not modify the bumper near the radar sensors. Do not paint the bumper near the radar sensors. Do not expose the bumper near the radar sensors to strong im- pacts. If a sensor becomes misa- ligned, a system malfunction may occur, including the inability to detect vehicles entering the detec- tion areas. If any strong shock is applied to the bumper, be sure to contact your SUBARU dealer for inspection. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

. If the radar sensors require repair or replacement, or the bumper area around the radar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, con- tact your SUBARU dealer for assis- tance.

Reverse Automatic Braking System (if equipped)

Reverse Automatic Braking is a system designed to help avoid collisions or reduce collision damage when reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected in the reversing direction, the system will notify the driver with a warning sound and may activate the vehicles brakes auto- matically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking is not a system intended to replace the drivers responsibility to check surrounding areas for vehicles or obstacles to avoid a collision.

. The driver is responsible for driving safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings visually when reversing the vehicle.

. Since the system operation has various limitations, the warning sound or automatic braking may be delayed or may not operate at all even when an obstacle is present in the reversing direc- tion.

. The system is not designed to

detect people (including chil- dren), animals or other moving objects.

. Depending on the vehicle condi- tion or the surrounding environ- ment, the sonar sensors ability to detect objects may become unstable.

NOTE The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys- tem records and stores the following data when automatic braking operates. It does not record conversations, per- sonal information or other audio data. . Distance from the object . Vehicle speed . Accelerator pedal operation status . Brake pedal operation status . Select lever position . Outside temperature . The sensitivity setting of the sonar sensors

SUBARU and third parties con- tracted by SUBARU may acquire and use the recorded data for the purpose of vehicle research and development. SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU will not disclose or provide the acquired

7-66

Black plate (477,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

data to any other third party except under the following conditions. The vehicle owner has given his/ her consent. The disclosure/provision is based on a court order or other legally enforceable request. Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar purposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking System overview

The system detects objects using sonar sensors installed in the rear bumper. If the system determines a possible collision with an object in the reversing direction, automatic deceleration will be activated. Also, beeping sounds will activate. If the vehicle is further reversed, automatic hard braking will be applied and a continuous beeping sound will activate.

! Detecting range

1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6 in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2) Range that the system cannot detect: Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the rear of the vehicle

3) Detecting range (length): Approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail- road crossing and you are trying to escape by reversing through the crossing gate, the system may re- cognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and the brakes may acti- vate. In this case, remain calm and either continue to depress the accel- erator pedal or cancel the system.

To cancel the system, refer to Can- celing the Reverse Automatic Brak- ing system operation F7-72.

& Operating conditions The Reverse Automatic Braking system will operate when all of the following conditions are met. . The ignition switch is in the ON position . The EyeSight warning indicator is off . The Reverse Automatic Braking fail indicator is off . HALT (Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF) indicator is off . The Reverse Automatic Braking sys- tem is set to on . The select lever is in the R position . The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h)

NOTE . When the Reverse Automatic Brak- ing fail indicator is illuminated, the Reverse Automatic Braking system cannot be operated. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected. . When the Reverse Automatic Brak- ing system OFF indicator is illumi-

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

CONTINUED

7-67

7

Black plate (478,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

nated, the Reverse Automatic Braking system cannot be operated. . In the following cases, the system may not be able to properly detect an obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

A sticker, paint, or a chemical is applied to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor The rear bumper is modified The rear bumper has been re- moved and reattached The ground clearance is changed due to the vehicles loading condi- tion or modification Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor The rear bumper is exposed to strong impact, or the rear bumper is deformed

. On a steep hill, the systems auto- matic braking ability will be reduced. . The system is designed to avoid collisions by automatic hard braking when the vehicles reversing speed is less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). However, the system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid collisions in any situation. . If the vehicle is reversed at an extremely slow speed, the drivers

operation may be prioritized. In this case, automatic braking will not oper- ate. . The system may not be able to detect the following objects

Sharp or thin objects such as poles, fences and ropes which may not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor Objects that are too close to the rear bumper when the select lever is set to the R position Objects with a surface which may not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor such as a chain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designed to detect

Pedestrians Moving objects including moving vehicles Objects which absorb sound waves such as cloth or snow Objects whose surface has a diagonal angle Objects that are low to the ground such as parking blocks Objects that are high above the ground such as objects hanging from above

. The system may not be able to properly detect objects or may cause

a system malfunction when the follow- ing conditions exist

High frequency sound from other sources are nearby Horn sound from another vehicle Engine sound from other vehi- cles Sound of an air brake Vehicle detection equipment or a sonar from another vehicle A sound wave with a frequency similar to the vehicles system is transmitted nearby A vehicle equipped with the same system is reversing toward your reversing direction

Weather conditions Extremely high or extremely low temperatures in which the area near the sonar sensor becomes too hot or too cold to operate The rear bumper near the sonar sensors is exposed to heavy rain or a significant amount of water Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc. Air is moving rapidly such as when a strong wind is blowing

7-68

Black plate (479,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Parts attached to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor Commercial electronic parts (fog light, fender pole, radio antenna) or commercial attachment parts (trai- ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper guard) are attached Parts that emit high frequency sound, such as a horn or speaker, are attached

Vehicle conditions The vehicle is significantly in- clined The ground clearance is signifi- cantly reduced due to the vehicles loading condition, etc. When the sonar sensor is mis- aligned due to a collision or an accident

Surrounding environment A cloth banner, flag, hanging branch or railroad crossing bars are present in the reversing direc- tion When reversing on a gravel or grassy area When reversing in an area where objects or walls are adjacent to the vehicle such as narrow tunnels, narrow bridges, narrow roads or

narrow garages Wheel tracks or a hole is present in the ground of the reversing direction When reversing over a drainage cover (grate cover)

The path of the reversing direc- tion is inclined such as on a steep uphill A curb is present in the reversing direction When reversing downhill

& Reverse Automatic Braking System operation

When the Reverse Automatic Braking System is in operation, the range between the vehicle and the detected object will be indicated on the multi function display. Also, warning sounds will activate in 3 levels to warn the driver of a potential collision.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

CONTINUED

7-69

7

Black plate (480,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity (ob- ject detected) 35 inches (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound

Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)

28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm) Yellow + Green Short beeps

Close proximity alert (approaching closer to the object)

20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)

Orange + Yellow + Green Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)

20 inches (50 cm) or less Red + Orange + Yellow + Green Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

! Obstacle detected and alert level

Long proximity alert (object detected) 1) Green: 35 inches (90 cm) or more

7-70

Black plate (481,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Medium and close proximity alert (ap- proaching the object and approaching closer to the object) 1) Orange: 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm) 2) Yellow: 28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the object) 1) Red: 20 inches (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the rever- sing direction, the range of detected object will be shown on the multi function display. A warning alarm will sound and, depend- ing on the speed, either torque control to generate engine braking or automatic braking will be applied.

! Object close behind warning

Automatic braking warning

If the vehicle continues to go in reverse, the system may determine the risk of collision with the object. In this case, short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound and either strong auto- matic braking or torque control will be applied to prevent collision.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

CONTINUED

7-71

7

Black plate (482,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

! When the vehicle is being stopped by the system

Depress brake pedal warning

Make sure to depress the brake pedal once the vehicle has been stopped by automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is depressed, a message will be displayed on the multi function display and the continuous beep will remain sounding.

! After the vehicle is stopped by the system

1) Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator

After the brake pedal is depressed, the Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator will illuminate and the system will temporarily stop operating. The Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator will turn off when the select lever is shifted to a position other than the R position. The system will operate again the next time the select lever is shifted to R position.

NOTE Automatic braking only holds the ve- hicle for 2 seconds. Before the auto- matic brake is released, a warning sound (3 short beeps followed by a long beep) will activate to alert the driver that the automatic brake will be released.

& Canceling the Reverse Auto- matic Braking system opera- tion

The Reverse Automatic Braking system can be temporarily cancelled by any of the following operations. . While automatic braking is in operation, the brake pedal is depressed . While automatic braking is in operation, the accelerator pedal is depressed . When automatic deceleration is in activation, the accelerator pedal is de- pressed hard . The select lever is shifted to a position other than the R position

NOTE The system will be cancelled if the object is no longer detected.

7-72

Black plate (483,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

& Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF setting

While the select lever is shifted to the R position, the below functions of the Re- verse Automatic Braking system can be set by operating the multi function display. For details about how to operate the multi function display, refer to Basic operation F3-45.

1) ON/OFF setting of Reverse Automatic Braking

2) ON/OFF setting of the object detection warning sound

NOTE The Reverse Automatic Braking sys- tem settings that are changed by the multi function display will be restored to default (ON setting) the next time the

select lever is shifted to R position.

& RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking System malfunctions, the above indicator illumi- nates in the combination meter. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Handling of the sonar sen- sors

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear bumper. To ensure the proper opera- tion of the Reverse Automatic Braking system, observe the following precau- tions.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items on the bumper surface near the sonar sensors. . Always keep the rear bumper surface near the sonar sensors clean. . Do not modify the rear bumper. . Do not paint the bumper near the sonar sensors. . Do not apply strong impacts to the rear bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

CONTINUED

7-73

7

Black plate (484,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

malfunction may occur, including inability to detect objects in the reversing direction. If any strong impact is applied to the rear bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected. . Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE If the sonar sensors require repair or replacement, or if the area of the rear bumper near the sonar sensors re- quires repair, paintwork or replace- ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

7-74

Black plate (17,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4 Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4 Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5 On-road and off-road driving.............................. 8-6 Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8

Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Driving on snowy and icy roads ......................... 8-10 Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-11 Snow tires ......................................................... 8-11 Tire chains......................................................... 8-11 Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-12

Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-14

Roof rack (if equipped) ...................................... 8-14 Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped)............ 8-15

Trailer hitch (dealer option)............................... 8-16 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-17 If not towing a trailer.......................................... 8-18

Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-19 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-19 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-19 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-22 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-22 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-23

Driving tips

8

Black plate (488,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/New vehicle breakin driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km): . Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency. . Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or slow. . Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency. . Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save fuel. . Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- tion. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine. . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. . Keep the engine properly tuned. . Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption. . Use the air conditioner only when necessary. . Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment. . Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dan- gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en- gine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from enter- ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the venti- lation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system al- ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

8-2

Black plate (489,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the ex- haust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off. This sound is normal.

Catalytic converter

Non-turbo models

Turbo models

The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic conver- ter: . Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter. . Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle. . Avoid racing the engine. . Never turn the ignition switch to the OFF position while the vehicle is moving. . Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (misfiring, back- firing or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer. . Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust sys- tem. . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level.

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g., grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter

Driving tips/Catalytic converter

CONTINUED

8-3

8

Black plate (490,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Periodic inspections

operates at very high tempera- tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the recom- mended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet per- formed at the specified time or mileage intervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in another country: . Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. Refer to Fuel requirements F7-3. . Comply with all regulations and re- quirements of each country.

8-4

Black plate (491,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips for AWD models

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden brak- ing or under other similar condi- tions.

. Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence be- cause you are driving an All- Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.

. When replacing or installing tire (s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(c) Speed symbol

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the bottom of drivers door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same in items (a) to (h), it may lead to serious mechanical damage to the drive train of your car and affect the following factors.

Ride

Handling

Braking

Speedometer/Odometer calibration

Clearance between the body and tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD models provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force during deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the following tips in mind. . An AWD model is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery

Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models

CONTINUED

8-5

8

Black plate (492,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Onroad and offroad driving

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles. . Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The recom- mended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side. . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driving conditions such as steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the follow- ing items than that specified in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.

Engine oil Brake fluid Rear differential gear oil Manual transmission oil (MT mod- els) Continuously variable transmission fluid (CVT models) Front differential gear oil (CVT models)

. There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detailed information, refer to Towing F9-13.

On-road and off-road driving

WARNING

. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wear- ing a seat belt. You the driver and all your passengers should fas- ten the seatbelts before starting to drive in order to minimize the chance of serious injury or death.

. Do not make sharp turns and quick maneuvers unless abso- lutely unavoidable. Such actions are dangerous as you may lose control, possibly resulting in a rollover which could cause death or serious injury.

. Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden brak- ing or under other similar condi- tions.

. Whenever strong crosswinds are present, slow down sufficiently to maintain control of your vehi- cle. Remember that your vehicle, with its higher profile and center

of gravity, is more likely to be affected by crosswinds than or- dinary passenger cars.

. Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence be- cause you are driving an All- Wheel Drive model could easily lead to a serious accident.

Your vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher ground clearance which enables them to be used for wide applications including off- road driving. But please keep in mind that your vehicle is neither a conventional off- road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A higher center of gravity in relation to the tread width as compared with ordinary passenger cars makes vehicles of this type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll- over rate than other types of vehicles. The high ground clearance of this vehicle is a real advantage, giving you a better view of the road and allowing you to anticipate problems earlier. However, remember that your utility vehicle is not designed for high- speed cornering comparable to ordinary passenger cars and that your vehicle could roll over if you make a sharp turn at high speed. If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain

8-6

Black plate (493,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

common sense precautions such as those in the following list should be taken. . Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts. . Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio. . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain. . Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and the like. . Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes that are too steep. . Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- cially at higher speeds. . Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim. . If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and cross the stream without stopping. The water should be shallow enough that it does not reach the vehicles under- carriage. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may da- mage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to drive through rushing water; regardless of its depth, it can wash away the ground from under your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover. . Always check your brakes for effec- tiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads. . Do not drive or park over or near flammable materials such as dry grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the engine is running and right after engine stops. This could create a fire hazard. . After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from

the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur. . Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over. . If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the shift lever/ select lever back and forth between 1/ D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. . When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st. For CVT models with manual mode, refer to Selection of manual mode F7-27. . Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in this manual. . Wash the vehicles underbody after off- road driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

Driving tips/Onroad and offroad driving

CONTINUED

8-7

8

Black plate (494,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Winter driving

need to be washed thoroughly. . Frequent driving of an AWD model under hard-driving conditions such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the follow- ing items than that specified in the maintenance schedule described in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.

Engine oil Brake fluid Rear differential gear oil Manual transmission oil (MT mod- els) Continuously variable transmission fluid (CVT models) Front differential gear oil (CVT models)

Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off-road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed above is not eligible for warranty coverage.

Winter driving

& Operation during cold weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for cold winter starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine in very cold weather conditions. Use an engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil will make it harder to start the engine. Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and after- wards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con- tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of the vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- perature varies according to how much it is diluted, as indicated in the following table.

Washer Fluid Con- centration Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F (128C)

50% 48F (208C)

100% 498F (458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid, check the freezing temperatures in the table above when adjusting the fluid concentration to the outside temperature. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen- tration appropriately for the out-

8-8

Black plate (495,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

side temperature. If the concen- tration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti- freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti- freeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicles paint, wiper blades or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During severe

winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that position. Instead, you should observe the following tips. 1. Place the shift lever in 1 or R for MT models, or the select lever in P for CVT models. 2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.

When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavily covered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking action. Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- ness.

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.

! Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather. Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.

! Opening rear gate (models with power rear gate)

CAUTION

Before operating the power rear gate, check that there is no frost or snow between the power rear gate and the vehicle body. If you notice

Driving tips/Winter driving

CONTINUED

8-9

8

Black plate (496,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Winter driving

frost or snow etc. on the power rear gate, remove it. If you forcibly operate the power rear gate with frost or snow, it may cause a mal- function.

& Driving on snowy and icy roads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads. Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.) Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha- vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- hances your vehicles braking perfor- mance on snowy and icy roads. For information on braking on slippery sur- faces, refer to ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) F7-37 and Vehicle Dynamics Control system F7-39.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms. Snow will enter the engines intake system and may hinder the airflow, which could re- sult in engine shutdown or even breakdown.

! Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield or rear window, perform the following procedure. . To thaw the windshield wiper blades, use the defroster with the airflow selection in and the temperature set for maximum warmth until the wiper blades are completely thawed. Refer to Climate control F4-1. . If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blades. Refer to Defog- ger and deicer F3-116. . To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the rear window defogger. Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-116.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the airflow selection in and the temperature set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer. Refer to Windshield washer F3-106.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer to Hazard warning flasher F3-8.

We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons you could have snow and freez- ing temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle.

8-10

Black plate (497,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non- freezing type wiper blades may not perform as well as standard wiper blades. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed.

NOTE When the season requiring non-freez- ing type wiper blades is over, replace them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion protection Refer to Corrosion protection F10-4.

& Snow tires

WARNING

. When replacing or installing tire (s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(c) Speed symbol

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the bottom of drivers door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same in items (a) to (h), it may lead to serious mechanical damage to the drive train of your car and affect the following factors.

Ride

Handling

Braking

Speedometer/Odometer calibration

Clearance between the body and tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with all season tires as original equipment, which are

designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking perfor- mance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions. When you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construc- tion, brand and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous hand- ling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.

Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your vehicle.

& Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body.

Driving tips/Winter driving

CONTINUED

8-11

8

Black plate (498,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

NOTE When tire chains cannot be used, use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if use on your vehicle is recommended by the device manufacturer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturers in- structions, especially regarding max- imum vehicle speed. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is not covered under warranty.

Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class S device, and use it on the front wheels only. Always use the utmost care when driving with a traction device. Overconfidence be- cause you are using a traction device could easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicle If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel- erator pedal slightly and move the shift lever/select lever back and forth between 1/D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than in 1st (MT models and CVT models with manual mode).

If your vehicle is a CVT model with manual mode, for information about holding the transmission in the 2nd position, refer to Selection of manual mode F7-27.

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to ride on a folded rear seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.

. Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the floor as possible.

8-12

Black plate (499,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

WARNING

. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehi- cles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting for- ward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the extended cargo area cover (if equipped). Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not carry spray cans, contain- ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.

. Do not close the rear gate with cargo protruding from the cargo area. The cargo may be da- maged. In models with power rear gate, the rear gate may open via reverse function.

. In models with power rear gate, be careful not to allow collision between the rear gate and the cargo when you are loading cargo on the roof. Otherwise, the rear gate will hit the cargo when opening and may cause damage to both the cargo and the rear gate.

NOTE For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

CONTINUED

8-13

8

Black plate (500,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

vehicle placard attached to the drivers side door pillar. It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the bottom of drivers side door pillar shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- pending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle including standard equipment, fluids, emergency tools and spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle capacity weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle. Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage. When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita- tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof rack (if equipped)

1) Roof rack

Cargo can be carried on the roof after securing the crossbars to the roof rails and installing an appropriate carrying acces- sory according to the manufacturers instructions. The roof rack system is designed to carry loads (cargo and ac- cessories) of no more than 150 lbs (68 kg). Be sure not to exceed your vehicles GVWR and GAWR.

8-14

Black plate (501,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

CAUTION

. When using the roof rack, make sure that the total carrying load of the roof rack and luggage does not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Over- loading may cause damage to the vehicle.

. For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rails must be used together with the roof rack and any appro- priate carrying attachment that may be needed. The roof rails must never be used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint, or a danger- ous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.

NOTE Remember that the vehicles center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting driving characteristics. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.

& Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped)

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, the roof molding must be used to- gether with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying at- tachment. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying attach- ment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Over- loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety hazard.

Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof moldings and installing the appropriate carrying attach- ment. When installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the manufacturers instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and a carrying attachment, never exceed the maximum load limit as explained below. You should also be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). For information about loading cargo into or onto your vehicle, refer to Loading your vehicle F8-12. The maximum load limit of the cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

CONTINUED

8-15

8

Black plate (502,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)

! Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross- bars, follow the manufacturers instruc- tions and make sure that the attachment is securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. A set of the crossbars is designed to carry loads (cargo and attach- ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg). Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE Remember that the vehicles center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of the crossbars

Each of the two roof moldings has two mounting points for crossbars. Each mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use a screwdriver to remove the covers. When installing the crossbars on the roof mold- ing, follow the manufacturers instructions.

Trailer hitch (dealer option)

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in serious personal in- juries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situa- tion. For possible recommenda- tions and limitations, refer to Trailer towing F8-19.

. Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailers max- imum gross weight. Towing trai- lers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive lock- ing placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch receiver, the trailer could get loose and create a

8-16

Black plate (503,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

traffic safety hazard.

. Although towing regulations for trailer or caravan vehicles vary by state/region, all regulations agree that specifications such as the maximum gross trailer weight must not exceed the les- ser of the following:

Maximum gross trailer weight

Maximum gross tongue weight

GVWR

GAWR

. Failure to comply with the proce- dures set forth will not only compromise your safety, but will also negate your insurance cov- erage and/or may violate the state road and traffic acts and regulations.

. Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying hitch. Do not use with any type of weight distributing hitch.

. The standard bumper beam must be installed after you remove the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU dealer for purchase of a standard bumper beam if you do not have

the original.

. Safety performance is decreased and there is increased risk of injury to passengers in the case of an accident if the trailer hitch or a standard bumper beam is not installed. One of them must always be installed on the vehi- cle.

. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not possible to install the rear towing hook.

When towing a trailer, refer to Trailer towing F8-19.

& Connecting a trailer

1) Ball mount 2) Hitch pin 3) Safety pin A) Hitch receiver tube

1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)

CONTINUED

8-17

8

Black plate (504,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)

receiver tube. 2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount. 3. Insert the safety pin through the provided hole on the hitch pin securely. 4. Check the ball mount assembly by pulling on it to make sure it does not come off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point 2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount. 6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball. 7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailers

maximum gross weight. The chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any part of the vehicle other than the safety chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch electrical wire har- nesss black four-pin electrical wire con- nector to the towing trailers wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch electrical wire harness by individually activating the brake, stop and turn signal lights on the trailer.

NOTE Always disconnect the trailer electrical wire harness before launching or re- trieving a watercraft.

& If not towing a trailer . Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube. . Place the dust cap over the four-pin connector of the hitch electrical wire harness to protect against possible da- mage. . Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin connector using terminal grease.

8-18

Black plate (505,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicles engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect on fuel economy. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious opera- tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment appropriate for your vehicle. Do not use towing equipment other than genuine SUBARU towing equipment. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions on correct installation and use provided by SUBARU. SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to follow the proper instructions. Regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

& Warranties and maintenance SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. (Refer to Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.) Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (en- gine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving.

& Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load limits explained in the following. Exceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are accepta- ble.

! Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum weight in the following table.

Conditions Maximum total trailer

weight

When towing a trailer with brakes. 1,500 lbs (680 kg)

Driving tips/Trailer towing

CONTINUED

8-19

8

Black plate (506,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Trailer towing

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Certification label

GVWR is shown on the certification label located at the bottom of the drivers side door pillar of your vehicle.

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehi- cle. The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the certification label located at the bottom of drivers side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution

8-20

Black plate (507,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

while driving.

! Tongue load

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value of 200 lbs (90 kg).

1) Jack 2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the illustration above. When weighing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing coupler at the height at which it would be during actual towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front; approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailers axle than in the front, the load is taken off

Driving tips/Trailer towing

CONTINUED

8-21

8

Black plate (508,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Trailer towing

the rear axle of the towing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced dur- ing cornering, resulting in over- steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

& Trailer hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a commer- cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger- ous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drilling the frame or under- body of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex- haust system, brake system, or other systems when installing a

hitch or other trailer towing equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer.

& Connecting a trailer

! Trailer brakes

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.

. Do not directly connect your trailers hydraulic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause the vehicles brake performance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident.

If your trailers total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be equipped with its own brake system. Electric brakes or surge brakes are recommended, and must be installed properly. Check that your trailers brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/ or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARUs brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailers hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more information about the trailers brake system.

! Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become discon- nected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Two chains should be used in

8-22

Black plate (509,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

total, one to the right side and the other to the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains crossing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

! Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicles stan- dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province and/ or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicles electrical system and cause a malfunction of your vehicles lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi- cles electrical system requires modifica- tions to the vehicles lighting circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper operation of the turn signals and the brake lights each time you connect a trailer to your vehicle.

! Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tem- porary spare tire is used. The tem- porary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated. Refer to Tires F12- 10.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer manufacturers specifications. Also check federal, state, province and/or other applicable regula- tions.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a commercial road service representative or profes- sional to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.

& Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

. For models equipped with the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) driving support systems, when towing a trailer, press the BSD/ RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the system. The system may not operate properly due to the blocked radar waves. For details about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,

Driving tips/Trailer towing

CONTINUED

8-23

8

Black plate (510,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Driving tips/Trailer towing

refer to BSD/RCTA OFF switch F7-64.

. For models equipped with RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking) system, consult your SUBARU dealer for additional information about towing a trailer.

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer in hilly country on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking performance will be dif- ferent when compared to normal operation. You should never drive at excessive speeds but always employ extra caution when towing a trailer. You should also keep the following tips in mind.

! Before starting out on a trip

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- hitch mounting are in good condition. If any problems are apparent, do not tow the trailer. . Check that the vehicle rests horizon- tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable. . Check that the tire rating and pressures are correct. . Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm that:

the trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball. the trailer lights connector is con- nected properly and trailers brake lights illuminate when the vehicles brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailers turn signal lights flash when the vehicles turn signal lever is oper- ated. the safety chains are connected properly. all cargo in the trailer is secured safety in position. the side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a sig- nificant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn the feel of the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and backing up.

! Driving with a trailer

. You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control. . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel- erations. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, always start out in first gear and release the clutch at moderate engine revolution. . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes. . Slow down before turning. Make a longer than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle. . Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus- ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and promptly begin decelerating your vehicle at a gradual pace. . When passing other vehicles, consid- erable distance is required because of the added weight and length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

8-24

Black plate (511,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

1) Left turn 2) Right turn

. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes practice. When backing up with a trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. When turning back, grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a right turn. . If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed immediately by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

! Driving on grades

. Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift into lower gear (if neces- sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent over- heating of your vehicles brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts. . When driving uphill in hot weather, the air conditioner may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating. . When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to the following indicators be- cause the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating.

: Coolant temperature high warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models)

If the coolant temperature high warning light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates, immediately turn off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle in the nearest safe location. For further instruc- tions and additional information, refer to the following sections.

If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency F9-2 Engine overheating F9-12 Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant temperature high warn- ing light F3-17

AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) F3-19

. For CVT models, avoid using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

! Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps: 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down. 2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load. 4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly release the regular brakes. 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT models) or P position (CVT models) and shut off the engine.

Driving tips/Trailer towing 8-25

8

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22 Left Page

Black plate (19,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency ........................................................ 9-2

Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2 Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3

Screwdriver and wheel nut wrench ...................... 9-4 Under the rear floor............................................. 9-4

Flat tires............................................................... 9-5 Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-5 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 9-8

Jump starting ...................................................... 9-9 How to jump start............................................... 9-10

Engine overheating ............................................ 9-12 If steam is coming from the engine compartment.................................................... 9-12

If no steam is coming from the engine compartment.................................................... 9-12

Towing ................................................................ 9-13 Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-13 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-15 Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-16

Access key if access key does not operate properly ............................................. 9-17 Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-17 Switching power status...................................... 9-17 Starting engine .................................................. 9-18

Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be opened............................................................. 9-18

Power rear gate - if power rear gate does not operate properly....................................... 9-19 When the power rear gate is deactivated ............ 9-19 When the rear gate cannot be unlocked ............. 9-20 When the rear gate cannot be closed ................. 9-20

If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........ 9-21

In case of emergency

9

Black plate (516,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

1) Models with multi function display 2) Models without multi function display

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti- vated regardless of the ignition switch position. Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.

NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.

Temporary spare tire

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead to an accident.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/trans- mitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is un- able to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/ or system resetting.

9-2

Black plate (517,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using other sizes may result in severe mechan- ical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Re- move the temporary spare tire and re- install the conventional tire as soon as possible because the spare tire is de- signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem- porary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. For the correct tire pressure, refer to Tires F12-10.

When using the temporary spare tire, note the following. . Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). . Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly. . Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time. . Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar 2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire. . The temporary spare tire must be used only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire gets punctured, replace the wheel with a rear wheel and install the temporary spare tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools.

. Jack

. Jack handle

. Screwdriver

. Towing hook (eye bolt)

. Wheel nut wrench

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

CONTINUED

9-3

9

Black plate (518,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

& Screwdriver and wheel nut wrench

1) Screwdriver 2) Wheel nut wrench

The screwdriver, wheel nut wrench, etc. are stored in your vehicle. The tools can also be stored in the tool bucket.

& Under the rear floor The jack, jack handle and towing hook are stored as shown in the following illustra- tions.

1) Under-floor storage compartment (if equipped) (Refer to Under-floor storage compartment F6-17.)

2) Jack handle 3) Spare tire 4) Tool bucket

1) Wheel nut wrench 2) Screwdriver 3) Jack 4) Towing hook (eye bolt)

NOTE . For how to use the jack, refer to Flat tires F9-5. . The following items may be different depending on the model.

The shape of the storage com- partment The locations of some mainte- nance tools

9-4

Black plate (519,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

& Changing a flat tire

WARNING

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the ground and this can result in a severe accident.

. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never get under the vehicle while support- ing the vehicle with this jack.

. Before using the jack, be sure that there are no occupants or cargo in the vehicle.

. Always turn off the engine before raising the flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point due to a jolt and this can result in a severe accident.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when- ever possible, then stop the engine. 2. Apply the parking brake securely and shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models) or the select lever to the P (Park) position (CVT models). 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire. 5. Take out the jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench. The tools and the spare tire are stored

under the floor of the cargo area. Refer to Maintenance tools F9-3.

NOTE Make sure that the jack is well lubri- cated before using it.

6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out.

NOTE If the spare tire provided in your vehicle is a temporary spare tire, carefully read Temporary spare tire F9-2 and strictly follow the instructions.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

CONTINUED

9-5

9

Black plate (520,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

In case of emergency/Flat tires

1) Notch 2) Valve hole

7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on the opposite side of the valve hole and pry the wheel cover to remove it.

8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

Jack-up points

9. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

10. Insert the jack handle into the jack- screw, and turn the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary. 11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

9-6

Black plate (521,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth. 13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident.

14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.

15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration. For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer to Tires F12-10. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility.

16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment. Be sure to place the spacer in the manner shown in the illustration, and then tighten the bolt in the front side of the bracket.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

CONTINUED

9-7

9

Black plate (522,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

In case of emergency/Flat tires

17. When storing the spare tire after repairing a flat tire, be sure to place the spacer in the manner shown in the illustration, and then tighten the bolt in the rear side of the bracket.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.

& Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

Low tire pressure warning light (type A)

Low tire pressure warning light (type B)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro- vides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when a tire pressure is severely low relative to the selected TPMS mode. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while gradually redu- cing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the drivers side. If this light still illumi- nates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have

9-8

Black plate (523,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pres- sure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approxi- mately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/ or system resetting.

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not oper- ate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if the sealant residue is properly cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

Jump starting

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help.

Keep everyone including chil- dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode.

. Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suitable

In case of emergency/Jump starting

CONTINUED

9-9

9

Black plate (524,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

In case of emergency/Jump starting

eye protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings, bands or other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are avail- able.

. A running engine can be danger- ous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are un- sure about the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a com- petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.

& How to jump start 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is grounded. 2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch. 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.

9-10

Black plate (525,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

A) Booster battery B) Strut mounting nut

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery. (2) Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) term- inal of the booster battery. (3) Connect one end of the other cable to the negative () terminal of the booster battery. (4) Connect the other end of the cable to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the discharged battery. 6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order.

In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-11

9

Black plate (526,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

In case of emergency/Engine overheating

Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia- tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot, the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the road and stop the vehicle in a safe location.

& If steam is coming from the engine compartment

. Turn off the engine and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. . Contact an authorized SUBARU deal- er.

& If no steam is coming from the engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling speed. 2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the

engine compartment. Refer to Engine hood F11-7. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn off the engine and contact an authorized SUBARU dealer for repair. 3. After the coolant temperature high warning light that has blinked or illumi- nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine. For details about the warning light, refer to Coolant temperature low indicator light/ Coolant temperature high warning light F3-17. 4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If the coolant level is below the LOW mark, add coolant up to the FULL mark.

NOTE For details about how to check the coolant level or how to add coolant, refer to Engine coolant F11-13.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counter- clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing down and turning it.

9-12

Black plate (527,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the following procedures for safety.

WARNING

Never tow AWD models (both CVT and MT models) with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or deterioration of the center differential.

& Towing and tie-down hooks The towing hooks should be used only in an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow).

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing hook and tie-down hook. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for towing or tie-down purposes.

. To prevent deformation to the front bumper and the towing hook, do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing hook.

Front towing hook: 1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and jack handle out of the cargo area.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and pry open the cover.

In case of emergency/Towing

CONTINUED

9-13

9

Black plate (528,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

In case of emergency/Towing

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook except when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehicle could interfere with prop- er operation of the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision.

Rear towing hook: 1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and jack handle out of the cargo area.

2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and you will find a

threaded hole for attaching the towing hook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using the jack handle.

9-14

Black plate (529,1)

Model "A8220BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 28

After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook except when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to rem